i5/OS Information Center, Version 5 Release 4
About information center
Overview and what's new
Notices
Hardware topics
Software topics
Printable PDFs and manuals
FAQ about information center
Information center updates
Site map
Memo to users
Connecting to System i
Choose your connection
Connecting to System i: Web clients
iSeries Access for Web
Connecting to System i: Windows clients
iSeries Access for Windows
EZ-Setup
iSeries Navigator
Connecting to System i: Linux clients
iSeries Access for Linux iSeries
Connecting to System i: Wireless clients
iSeries Access for Wireless
iSeries Navigator for Wireless
IBM Toolbox for Java 2 Micro Edition
Connecting to System i: Interfaces
iSeries Navigator
EZ-Setup
Character-based interface
Connecting to System i: Consoles
Telnet
Connecting to System i: Consoles
Operations Console
Twinaxial Console
Hardware Management Console (HMC)
Thin Console
iSeries Access
iSeries Access for Web
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
License information
Planning
iSeries Access for Web offerings
Web application
Portal application
Security considerations
Single sign-on considerations
Configuring Enterprise Identity Mapping
Checklist: Planning, installing, and configuring
Prerequisites for installing iSeries Access for Web
Hardware requirements
Performance tuning
iSeries software requirements
SSL usage notes
PTF requirements
Web browser requirements
Browser considerations
Deleting the beta release
Upgrade considerations
Installing iSeries Access for Web on the iSeries server
Installing iSeries Access for Web
Installing iSeries Access for Web PTFs
iSeries Access for Web in a Web application server environment
Configuring iSeries Access for Web
Examples for configuring a new Web application server environment
i5/OS integrated Web application server
WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS
WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
WebSphere Application Server V6.0 for OS/400
WebSphere Application Server V6.0 for OS/400 with Single sign-on
WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.0 for OS/400
WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.1
WebSphere Application Server V5.1 for iSeries
WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.0
WebSphere Application Server V5.0 for iSeries
ASF Tomcat
Examples for configuring an existing Web application server environment
WebSphere Application Server V6.1 for i5/OS
WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.1 for i5/OS
WebSphere Application Server - Express V6.1 for i5/OS
WebSphere Application Server V6.0 for OS/400
WebSphere Application Server Network Deployment V6.0 for OS/400
WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.1
WebSphere Application Server V5.1 for iSeries
WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries V5.0
WebSphere Application Server V5.0 for iSeries
ASF Tomcat
New Web application server considerations
Customizing iSeries Access for Web
Policies
Default page content
Home page
Customized content
Special tags
Style sheets
Main page
Customized content
Page template
Customized content
Special tags
Style sheets
Login template
Customized content
Special tags
Style sheets
Using iSeries Access for Web
iSeries Access for Web functions
5250
Command
Customize
Database
Download
File
Jobs
Mail
Messages
My folder
My home page
Other
Print
URL interfaces
NLS considerations
Saving and restoring iSeries Access for Web
iSeries Access for Web in a portal environment
Portal concepts
Cooperative portlets
Cross-site scripting
Configuring iSeries Access for Web
Examples for configuring a new portal environment
Workplace Services Express V2.6
WebSphere Portal - Express for Multiplatforms V5.0.2 (iSeries)
WebSphere Portal - Express for Multiplatforms V5.0.2 (iSeries) with Single sign-on
Examples for configuring an existing portal environment
IBM WebSphere Portal V6.0
Workplace Services Express V2.6
WebSphere Portal - Express for Multiplatforms V5.0.2 (iSeries)
Customizing iSeries Access for Web
Creating pages
Customizing portlets
Portal roles
Using iSeries Access for Web
iSeries Access for Web functions
5250
Command
Database
Files
IFrame
Other
Print
NLS considerations
Saving and restoring iSeries Access for Web
Deleting iSeries Access for Web
Related information
iSeries Access for Windows
Introduction
Installation and setup
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
License information
Setting up the System i platform
Prerequisites to install iSeries Access for Windows on i5/OS
i5/OS release requirements
i5/OS storage requirements
Required and optional programs to install
Installing iSeries Access for Windows on the i5/OS
Obtaining and installing PTFs
Configuring TCP/IP on i5/OS platform
Configuring iSeries NetServer on i5/OS
Removing iSeries Access for Windows from i5/OS
Setting up the PC
Prerequisites to set up the PC
Setting up TCP/IP on the PC
Installing a network adapter or modem
Configuring TCP/IP support on the PC
Configuring TCP/IP on Windows operating systems
Adding the system name to the HOSTS file
Configuring TCP/IP over twinaxial connections
Verifying the TCP/IP configuration
Configuring the PC for iSeries NetServer
Installing iSeries Access for Windows on the PC
Installing from iSeries NetServer
Installing from a CD-ROM
Installing from a network drive
Installing on multiple PCs
Creating and using a tailored installation image of iSeries Access for Windows
Creating a CD-ROM
Performing a silent installation of iSeries Access for Windows
Creating response files for iSeries Access for Windows installations
Example: Response file (setup.iss)
Starting a silent installation
Return codes for silent installations
SMS switch
Installing service packs
Installing the service pack silently
When to check service level function
Setting check service level properties
Scheduling check service level
Obtaining and installing PTFs
Sites for downloading service packs
Accessing scheduled tasks remotely
Integrating plug-ins
Installing or removing individual components
Installing other language versions
Upgrading iSeries Access for Windows
Uninstalling iSeries Access for Windows from the PC
Related information
Using
Administration
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
iSeries Access for Windows network environments
Microsoft Windows Terminal Server
Use iSeries Access for Windows in a three-tier environment
Using distributed transaction support
Access iSeries services from the middle tier
Add TCP/IP configuration to all users
Set PC5250 files location for all users
User profiles for PCs with multiple users
ODBC administration
Overview of the iSeries Access ODBC driver
Set up your system for the iSeries Access ODBC driver
Adding the local system to the RDB directory
Specify the ODBC data source
Use independent ASPs through ODBC
iSeries Access for Windows ODBC security
Common ODBC strategies that are not secure
ODBC program security strategies
Related information for ODBC security
Troubleshoot ODBC
ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
Client-side ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
Server-side ODBC diagnostic and performance tools
Collecting an ODBC Trace (SQL.LOG)
Gather a detailed trace
Gather a detail trace for a Microsoft Transaction Server (MTS)
iSeries Access ODBC error messages
Troubleshoot the iSeries connection
Checking the server status
Verifying that subsystems are active
Verifying that prestart jobs are running
Additional TCP/IP considerations
Common ODBC errors
SQL errors
SQL0104 - Token &1 was not valid. Valid tokens: &2
SQL0113 - Name &1 not allowed.
SQL0114 - Relational database &1 not the same as current &2 server
SQL0204 - MYSYSCONF not found
SQL0208 - ORDER BY column not in result table
SQL0900 - Application process not in a connected state
SQL0901 - SQL System Error
SQL5001 - Column qualifier or table &2 undefined.
SQL5016 - Object name &1 not valid for naming convention
SQL7008 - &1 in &2 not valid for operation. The reason code is 3
Stored procedure errors
SQL0444 - External program &A in &B not found (DB2 UDB SQL)
No data returned on OUTPUT and INPUT_OUTPUT parameters
SQL0501 - Cursor CRSR000x not open
ODBC incorrect output and unpredictable errors
Gather information for IBM Support
Host server administration
Identify i5/OS host servers and associated programs.
Host servers by function
File server
Database server
Database server programs
SQL packages
SQL package names
Cleanup SQL packages
Statement naming conventions
Rules and restrictions when using DRDA
Data queue server
Network print server
Central server
Remote command and distributed program call server
Signon server
Server Port Mapper
Extended Dynamic Remote SQL server (QXDAEDRSQL)
DRDA/DDM server
Use i5/OS host servers
Establish client/server communications
Host Servers port numbers
Port numbers for host servers and server mapper
Start host servers
Server daemons
Example: STRHOSTSVR
End host servers
Example: ENDHOSTSVR
iSeries Subsystems
Subsystems used for server Jobs
Use of autostart jobs
Use of prestart jobs
iSeries system values
Identify and display iSeries server jobs
Use iSeries Navigator to identify server jobs
Use the iSeries character-based interface to display server job
iSeries job names
Display using WRKACTJOB
Display using the history log
Display server job for a user
Use EZ-Setup and iSeries Navigator with host servers
Use server exit programs
Register exit programs
Write exit programs
Exit program parameters
File server
Database server
Data queue server
Network print server
Central server
Remote command and distributed program call server
Signon server
Examples: Exit programs
Examples: Creating exit programs with RPG
Examples: Create exit programs with CL commands
iSeries NetServer administration
Restrict users with policies and application administration
Overview of iSeries Access for Windows policies
Set up your system to use policies
Configure a system for using iSeries Access for Windows policies
Configure client PCs for policies
Create policy files
Microsoft System Policy Editor
Create iSeries Access for Windows policy templates
Create and update policy files
iSeries Access for Windows policy list
Policies by function
Policies by function: .NET Data provider
.NET Data Provider policy: Prevent .NET Data Provider usage
Policies by function: ActiveX automation objects
ActiveX policy: Prevent data transfer upload automation object
ActiveX policy: Prevent data transfer download automation object
ActiveX policy: Prevent Remote Command automation object
ActiveX policy: Prevent Remote program automation object
ActiveX policy: Prevent data queue automation object
Policies by function: Communication
Communication policy: Default user mode
Communications policy: TCP/IP Address Lookup Mode
Communication policy: Port lookup mode
Communication policy: Require Secure Sockets
Communication policy: Prevent changes to active environment
Communication policy: Prevent environment list changes
Communication policy: Prevent connections to systems not previously defined
Communication policy: Prevent use of non-mandated environments
Communication policy: Timeout value
Policies by function: Data Transfer
Policies by function: Data Transfer uploads
Data Transfer policy: Prevent all Data Transfer
Data Transfer policy: Prevent appending and replacing host files
Data Transfer policy: Prevent Data Transfer GUI upload
Data Transfer policy: Prevent usage of RFROMPCB
Data Transfer policy: Prevent autostart uploads
Data Transfer policy: Data Transfer iSeries file creation
Data Transfer policy: Prevent host file creation
Data Transfer policy: Prevent Wizard iSeries file creation
Data Transfer policy: Prevent non-Wizard iSeries file creation
Data Transfer policy: Data Transfer downloads
Data Transfer policy: Prevent all Data Transfers from a system
Data Transfer policy: Prevent Data Transfer GUI download
Data Transfer policy: Prevent usage of RTOPCB
Data Transfer policy: Prevent autostart downloads
Policies by function: Directory update
Directory update policy: Prevent using directory update
Policies by function: Incoming Remote Command
Incoming Remote Command policy: Run as system
Incoming Remote Command policy: Command mode
Incoming Remote Command policy: Cache security
Incoming Remote Command policy: Allow generic security
Incoming Remote Command policy: Generic Security Runs command as logged on user
Policies by function: Installation
Installation policy: Selective setup source directory
Installation policy: Prevent Setup
Installation policy: Prevent Selective Setup
Installation policy: Prevent uninstall
Installation policy: Prevent check service pack level
Installation policy: Prevent installation of service pack
Installation policy: Prevent upgrades
Installation policy: Prevent installation of individual components
Policies by function: License management
License policy: Time to delay before releasing iSeries Access for Windows license
Policies by function: National Language Support
National Language Support policy: ANSI code page
National Language Support policy: OEM code page
National Language Support policy: EBCDIC code page
Language policy: BiDi Transform
Policies by function: ODBC
ODBC policy: Prevent use of named data sources
ODBC policy: Prevent use of program generated data sources
Policies by function: OLE DB
OLE DB Provider policy: Prevent OLE DB Provider usage
Policies by function: iSeries Navigator
iSeries Navigator policy: Prevent usage of iSeries Navigator
Policies by function: Passwords
Password policy: Warn user before iSeries password expires
Password policy: Prevent iSeries Access for Windows password changes
Policies by function: PC5250 emulation
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent configuration of display sessions
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent configuration of printer sessions
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent usage of PC5250 Emulator
PC5250 emulation policy: Maximum number of PC5250 sessions
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent changing of .WS profiles
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent menu configuration
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent toolbar configuration
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent multi-session configuration
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent keyboard configuration
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent mouse configuration
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent Java applet execution
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent access to macros
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent profile imports in Emulator Session Manager
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent profile deletion in Emulator Session Manager
PC5250 emulation policy: Prevent directory changes in Emulator Session Manager
Policies by function: PC Commands
PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwblogon.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbcfg.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbback.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbrest.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of Cwbenv.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of cwbundbs.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of Wrksplf.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkmsg.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkprt.exe
PC command policy: Prevent use of wrkusrj.exe
Policies by function: Service
Service policy: When to check service level
Service policy: Delay time
Service policy: Frequency
Service policy: Copy image to PC
Service policy: Run silently
Service policy: Service path
Service policy: Autostart background service job
Policies by function: User interface
User interface policy: Prevent creation of desktop icons
Policies by template
Caecfg.adm
Caerestr.adm: iSeries Access for Windows Runtime Restrictions
Config.adm: iSeries Access for Windows mandated connections
Caeinrst.adm: Install restrictions
SYSNAME.adm: Per-system policies
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) administration
Code license and disclaimer information
Programming
What's new
Printable PDFs
iSeries Access for Windows C/C++ APIs
iSeries Access for Windows C/C++ APIs overview
API groups, header files, import libraries, and DLLs
Programmer's Toolkit
Install the Programmer's Toolkit
Launch the Programmer's Toolkit
iSeries name formats for connection APIs
OEM, ANSI, and Unicode considerations
Use a single iSeries Access for Windows API type
Use mixed iSeries Access for Windows API types
Write a generic iSeries Access for Windows application
Obsolete iSeries Access for Windows APIs
Obsolete Communications APIs
Obsolete Data Queues APIs
Obsolete Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
Obsolete Security APIs
Obsolete Serviceability APIs
Obsolete System Object Access (SOA) API
Obsolete National Language Support (NLS) APIs
Obsolete Database APIs
Return codes and error messages
iSeries Access for Windows return codes that correspond to operating system errors
iSeries Access for Windows return codes
Global iSeries Access for Windows return codes
iSeries Access for Windows-specific return codes
Security return codes
Communications return codes
Configuration return codes
Automation Object return codes
WINSOCK return codes
SSL return codes
iSeries Access for Windowscomponent-specific return codes
Administration APIs return code
Communications APIs return codes
Database APIs return codes
Data Queues APIs return codes
Directory Update APIs return codes
National language support APIs return codes
iSeries Object APIs return codes
Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs return codes
Security APIs return codes
Serviceability APIs return codes
System Object Access APIs return codes
iSeries Access for WindowsAdministration APIs
Administration APIs list
cwbAD_GetClientVersion
cwbAD_GetProductFixLevel
cwbAD_IsComponentInstalled
cwbAD_IsOpNavPluginInstalled
Example: Administration APIs
iSeries Access for Windows Communications and Security APIs
System object attributes
System object attributes list
Communications and security: Create and delete APIs
cwbCO_CreateSystem
cwbCO_CreateSystemLike
cwbCO_DeleteSystem
Communications and security: Connect and disconnect APIs
cwbCO_Connect
cwbCO_Disconnect
cwbCO_GetConnectTimeout
cwbCO_GetPersistenceMode
cwbCO_IsConnected
cwbCO_SetConnectTimeout
cwbCO_SetPersistenceMode
cwbCO_Verify
Communication and security: Security validation and data APIs
cwbCO_ChangePassword
cwbCO_GetDefaultUserMode
cwbCO_GetFailedSignons
cwbCO_GetPasswordExpireDate
cwbCO_GetPrevSignonDate
cwbCO_GetPromptMode
cwbCO_GetSignonDate
cwbCO_GetUserIDEx
cwbCO_GetValidateMode
cwbCO_GetWindowHandle
cwbCO_HasSignedOn
cwbCO_SetDefaultUserMode
cwbCO_SetPassword
cwbCO_SetPromptMode
cwbCO_SetUserIDEx
cwbCO_SetWindowHandle
cwbCO_SetValidateMode
cwbCO_Signon
cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
Communications and security: Get and set attribute APIs
cwbCO_CanModifyDefaultUserMode
cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddress
cwbCO_CanModifyIPAddressLookupMode
cwbCO_CanModifyPersistenceMode
cwbCO_CanModifyPortLookupMode
cwbCO_CanModifyUseSecureSockets
cwbCO_GetDescription
cwbCO_GetHostCCSID
cwbCO_GetHostVersionEx
cwbCO_GetIPAddress
cwbCO_GetIPAddressLookupMode
cwbCO_GetPortLookupMode
cwbCO_GetSystemName
cwbCO_IsSecureSockets
cwbCO_SetIPAddress
cwbCO_SetIPAddressLookupMode
cwbCO_SetPortLookupMode
cwbCO_UseSecureSockets
Defines for cwbCO_Service
Differences between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
Similarities between cwbCO_Signon and cwbCO_VerifyUserIDPassword
Communications: Create and delete APIs
cwbCO_CreateSysListHandle
cwbCO_CreateSysListHandleEnv
cwbCO_DeleteSysListHandle
cwbCO_GetNextSysName
cwbCO_GetSysListSize
Communications: System information APIs
cwbCO_GetActiveConversations
cwbCO_GetConnectedSysName
cwbCO_GetDefaultSysName
cwbCO_GetHostVersion
cwbCO_GetUserID
cwbCO_IsSystemConfigured
cwbCO_IsSystemConfiguredEnv
cwbCO_IsSystemConnected
Communications: Configured environments information
cwbCO_GetActiveEnvironment
cwbCO_GetEnvironmentName
cwbCO_GetNumberOfEnvironments
Communications: Environment and connection information
cwbCO_CanConnectNewSystem
cwbCO_CanModifyEnvironmentList
cwbCO_CanModifySystemList
cwbCO_CanModifySystemListEnv
cwbCO_CanSetActiveEnvironment
Example: Using iSeries Access for Windows communications APIs
iSeries Access for Windows Data Queues APIs
Data queues
Ordering data queue messages
Work with data queues
Typical use of data queues
Data Queues: Create, delete, and open APIs
cwbDQ_CreateEx
cwbDQ_DeleteEx
cwbDQ_OpenEx
Data Queues: Accessing data queues APIs
cwbDQ_AsyncRead
cwbDQ_Cancel
cwbDQ_CheckData
cwbDQ_Clear
cwbDQ_Close
cwbDQ_Create
cwbDQ_Delete
cwbDQ_GetLibName
cwbDQ_GetQueueAttr
cwbDQ_GetQueueName
cwbDQ_GetSysName
cwbDQ_Open
cwbDQ_Peek
cwbDQ_Read
cwbDQ_Write
Data Queues: Attributes APIs
cwbDQ_CreateAttr
cwbDQ_DeleteAttr
cwbDQ_GetAuthority
cwbDQ_GetDesc
cwbDQ_GetForceToStorage
cwbDQ_GetKeySize
cwbDQ_GetMaxRecLen
cwbDQ_GetOrder
cwbDQ_GetSenderID
cwbDQ_SetAuthority
cwbDQ_SetDesc
cwbDQ_SetForceToStorage
cwbDQ_SetKeySize
cwbDQ_SetMaxRecLen
cwbDQ_SetOrder
cwbDQ_SetSenderID
Data Queues: Read and write APIs
cwbDQ_CreateData
cwbDQ_DeleteData
cwbDQ_GetConvert
cwbDQ_GetData
cwbDQ_GetDataAddr
cwbDQ_GetDataLen
cwbDQ_GetKey
cwbDQ_GetKeyLen
cwbDQ_GetRetDataLen
cwbDQ_GetRetKey
cwbDQ_GetRetKeyLen
cwbDQ_GetSearchOrder
cwbDQ_GetSenderInfo
cwbDQ_SetConvert
cwbDQ_SetData
cwbDQ_SetDataAddr
cwbDQ_SetKey
cwbDQ_SetSearchOrder
Example: Using Data Queues APIs
iSeries Access for Windows Data Transformation and National Language Support (NLS) APIs
iSeries Access for Windows data transformation APIs
iSeries Access for Windows data transformation API list
cwbDT_ASCII11ToBin4
cwbDT_ASCII6ToBin2
cwbDT_ASCIIPackedToPacked
cwbDT_ASCIIToHex
cwbDT_ASCIIToPacked
cwbDT_ASCIIToZoned
cwbDT_ASCIIZonedToZoned
cwbDT_Bin2ToASCII6
cwbDT_Bin2ToBin2
cwbDT_Bin4ToASCII11
cwbDT_Bin4ToBin4
cwbDT_EBCDICToEBCDIC
cwbDT_HexToASCII
cwbDT_PackedToASCII
cwbDT_PackedToASCIIPacked
cwbDT_PackedToPacked
cwbDT_ZonedToASCII
cwbDT_ZonedToASCIIZoned
cwbDT_ZonedToZoned
Example: Using data transformation APIs
iSeries Access for Windows National Language Support (NLS) APIs
Coded character sets
iSeries Access for Windows general NLS APIs list
cwbNL_FindFirstLang
cwbNL_FindNextLang
cwbNL_GetLang
cwbNL_GetLangName
cwbNL_GetLangPath
cwbNL_SaveLang
iSeries Access for Windows conversion NLS APIs list
cwbNL_CCSIDToCodePage
cwbNL_CodePageToCCSID
cwbNL_Convert
cwbNL_ConvertCodePages
cwbNL_ConvertCodePagesEx
cwbNL_CreateConverter
cwbNL_CreateConverterEx
cwbNL_DeleteConverter
cwbNL_GetCodePage
cwbNL_GetANSICodePage
cwbNL_GetHostCCSID
iSeries Access for Windows dialog-box NLS API list
cwbNL_CalcControlGrowthXY
cwbNL_CalcDialogGrowthXY
cwbNL_GrowControlXY
cwbNL_GrowDialogXY
cwbNL_LoadDialogStrings
cwbNL_LoadMenu
cwbNL_LoadMenuStrings
cwbNL_SizeDialog
Example: iSeries Access for Windows NLS APIs
iSeries Access for Windows Directory Update APIs
Typical use of iSeries Access for Windows Directory Update APIs
Requirements for Directory Update entries
Options for Directory Update entries
Directory Update package files syntax and format
Directory Update sample program
Directory Update: Create and delete APIs
cwbUP_CreateUpdateEntry
cwbUP_DeleteEntry
Directory Update: Access APIs
cwbUP_FindEntry
cwbUP_FreeLock
cwbUP_GetEntryHandle
Directory Update: Free Resources APIs
cwbUP_FreeEntryHandle
Directory Update: Change APIs
cwbUP_AddPackageFile
cwbUP_RemovePackageFile
cwbUP_SetCallbackDLL
cwbUP_SetDescription
cwbUP_SetEntryAttributes
cwbUP_SetSourcePath
cwbUP_SetTargetPath
Directory Update: Information APIs
cwbUP_GetCallbackDLL
cwbUP_GetDescription
cwbUP_GetEntryAttributes
cwbUP_GetLockHolderName
cwbUP_GetSourcePath
cwbUP_GetTargetPath
iSeries Access for Windows PC5250 emulation APIs
System Objects APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
iSeries Access objects attributes
Advanced Function Printing
Align Page
Allow Direct Print
Authority
Authority to Check
Automatically End Writer
Back Margin Offset Across
Back Margin Offset Down
Backside Overlay Library Name
Backside Overlay Name
Back Overlay offset across
Back Overlay Offset Down
Characters per Inch
Code Page
Coded Font Name
Coded Font Library Name
Copies
Copies left to Produce
Current Page
Data Format
Data Queue Library Name
Data Queue Name
Date File Opened
User Specified DBCS Data
DBCS Extension Characters
DBCS Character Rotation
DBCS Characters per Inch
DBCS SO/SI Spacing
Defer Write
Degree of Page Rotation
Delete File After Sending
Destination Option
Destination Type
Device Class
Device Model
Device Type
Display any File
Drawer for Separators
Ending Page
File Separators
Fold Records
Font Identifier
Form Feed
Form Type
Form Type Message Option
Front Margin Offset Across
Front Margin Offset Down
Front Overlay Library Name
Front Overlay Name
Front Overlay Offset Across
Front Overlay Offset Down
Graphic Character Set
Hardware Justification
Hold Spool File
Initialize the writer
Internet Address
Job Name
Job Number
Job Separators
Job User
Last Page Printed
Length of Page
Library Name
Lines Per Inch
Manufacturer Type and Model
Maximum Spooled Output Records
Measurement Method
Message Help
Message ID
Message Queue Library Name
Message Queue
Message Reply
Message Text
Message Type
Message Severity
Number of Bytes to Read/Write
Number of Files
Number of Writers Started to Queue
Object Extended Attribute
Open time commands
Operator Controlled
Order of Files On Queue
Output Priority
Output Queue Library Name
Output Queue Name
Output Queue Status
Overflow Line Number
Pages Per Side
Pel Density
Point Size
Print Fidelity
Print on Both Sides
Print Quality
Print Sequence
Print Text
Printer
Printer Device Type
Printer File Library Name
Printer File Name
Printer Queue
Record Length
Remote System
Replace Unprintable Characters
Replacement Character
Resource library name
Resource name
Resource object type
Restart Printing
Save Spooled File
Seek Offset
Seek Origin
Send Priority
Separator page
Source Drawer
Spool SCS
Spool the Data
Spooled File Name
Spooled File Number
Spooled File Status
Spooled Output Schedule
Starting Page
Text Description
Time File Opened
Total Pages
Transform SCS to ASCII
Unit of Measure
User Comment
User Data
User defined data
User defined object library
User defined object name
User defined object type
User defined option(s)
User driver program
User driver program library
User driver program name
User ID
User ID Address
User transform program library
User transform program name
VM/MVS Class
When to Automatically End Writer
When to End Writer
When to Hold File
Width of Page
Workstation Customizing Object Name
Workstation Customizing Object Library
Writer Job Name
Writer Job Number
Writer Job Status
Writer Job User Name
Writer Starting Page
Network Print Server Object Attributes
NPS Attribute Default Value
NPS Attribute High Limit
NPS Attribute ID
NPS Attribute Low Limit
NPS Attribute Possible Value
NPS Attribute Text Description
NPS Attribute Type
NPS CCSID
NPS Object
NPS Object Action
NPS Level
List APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbOBJ_CloseList
cwbOBJ_CreateListHandle
cwbOBJ_DeleteListHandle
cwbOBJ_GetListSize
cwbOBJ_OpenList
cwbOBJ_ResetListAttrsToRetrieve
cwbOBJ_ResetListFilter
cwbOBJ_SetListAttrsToRetrieve
cwbOBJ_SetListFilter
cwbOBJ_SetListFilterWithSplF
iSeries Access for Windows Object APIs
cwbOBJ_CopyObjHandle
cwbOBJ_DeleteObjHandle
cwbOBJ_GetObjAttr
cwbOBJ_GetObjAttrs
cwbOBJ_GetObjHandle
cwbOBJ_GetObjHandleFromID
cwbOBJ_GetObjID
cwbOBJ_RefreshObj
cwbOBJ_SetObjAttrs
iSeries Access for Windows Parameter object APIs
cwbOBJ_CopyParmObjHandle
cwbOBJ_CreateParmObjHandle
cwbOBJ_DeleteParmObjHandle
cwbOBJ_GetParameter
cwbOBJ_SetParameter
iSeries Access for Windows Writer job APIs
cwbOBJ_EndWriter
cwbOBJ_StartWriter
iSeries Access for Windows output queues APIs
cwbOBJ_HoldOutputQueue
cwbOBJ_PurgeOutputQueue
cwbOBJ_ReleaseOutputQueue
iSeries Access for Windows AFP resource APIs
cwbOBJ_CloseResource
cwbOBJ_CreateResourceHandle
cwbOBJ_DisplayResource
cwbOBJ_OpenResource
cwbOBJ_OpenResourceForSplF
cwbOBJ_ReadResource
cwbOBJ_SeekResource
iSeries Access for Windows APIs for new spooled files
cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplF
cwbOBJ_CloseNewSplFAndGetHandle
cwbOBJ_CreateNewSplF
cwbOBJ_GetSplFHandleFromNewSplF
cwbOBJ_WriteNewSplF
APIs for reading spooled files for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbOBJ_CloseSplF
cwbOBJ_OpenSplF
cwbOBJ_ReadSplF
cwbOBJ_SeekSplF
APIs for manipulating spooled files for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbOBJ_CallExitPgmForSplF
cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandle
cwbOBJ_CreateSplFHandleEx
cwbOBJ_DeleteSplF
cwbOBJ_DisplaySplF
cwbOBJ_HoldSplF
cwbOBJ_IsViewerAvailable
cwbOBJ_MoveSplF
cwbOBJ_ReleaseSplF
cwbOBJ_SendNetSplF
cwbOBJ_SendTCPSplF
APIs for handling spooled file messages for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbOBJ_AnswerSplFMsg
cwbOBJ_GetSplFMsgAttr
APIs for analyzing spooled file data for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbOBJ_AnalyzeSplFData
Server program APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbOBJ_DropConnections
cwbOBJ_GetNPServerAttr
cwbOBJ_SetConnectionsToKeep
Example: Using iSeries Objects APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
iSeries Access for Windows Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
Typical use of iSeries Access for Windows Remote Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access remote command APIs list for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbRC_GetClientCCSID
cwbRC_GetHostCCSID
cwbRC_StartSysEx
cwbRC_StopSys
Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Run APIs list for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbRC_RunCmd
Remote Command/Distributed Program Call: Access programs APIs list for iSeries Access for Windows
cwbRC_AddParm
cwbRC_CallPgm
cwbRC_CreatePgm
cwbRC_DeletePgm
cwbRC_GetLibName
cwbRC_GetParm
cwbRC_GetParmCount
cwbRC_GetPgmName
cwbRC_SetLibName
cwbRC_SetParm
cwbRC_SetPgmName
Example: Using Remote iSeries Access for Windows Command/Distributed Program Call APIs
iSeries Access for Windows Serviceability APIs
History log and trace files
Error handles
Typical use of Serviceability APIs
Serviceability APIs list: Writing to history log
cwbSV_CreateMessageTextHandle
cwbSV_DeleteMessageTextHandle
cwbSV_LogMessageText
cwbSV_SetMessageClass
cwbSV_SetMessageComponent
cwbSV_SetMessageProduct
Serviceability APIs list: Writing trace data
cwbSV_CreateTraceDataHandle
cwbSV_DeleteTraceDataHandle
cwbSV_LogTraceData
cwbSV_SetTraceComponent
cwbSV_SetTraceProduct
Serviceability API list: Writing trace points
cwbSV_CreateTraceAPIHandle
cwbSV_CreateTraceSPIHandle
cwbSV_DeleteTraceAPIHandle
cwbSV_DeleteTraceSPIHandle
cwbSV_LogAPIEntry
cwbSV_LogAPIExit
cwbSV_LogSPIEntry
cwbSV_LogSPIExit
cwbSV_SetAPIComponent
cwbSV_SetAPIProduct
cwbSV_SetSPIComponent
cwbSV_SetSPIProduct
Serviceability API list: Reading service files
cwbSV_ClearServiceFile
cwbSV_CloseServiceFile
cwbSV_CreateServiceRecHandle
cwbSV_DeleteServiceRecHandle
cwbSV_GetComponent
cwbSV_GetDateStamp
cwbSV_GetMaxRecordSize
cwbSV_GetMessageText
cwbSV_GetProduct
cwbSV_GetRecordCount
cwbSV_GetServiceFileName
cwbSV_GetServiceType
cwbSV_GetTimeStamp
cwbSV_GetTraceData
cwbSV_GetTraceAPIData
cwbSV_GetTraceAPIID
cwbSV_GetTraceAPIType
cwbSV_GetTraceSPIData
cwbSV_GetTraceSPIID
cwbSV_GetTraceSPIType
cwbSV_OpenServiceFile
cwbSV_ReadNewestRecord
cwbSV_ReadNextRecord
cwbSV_ReadOldestRecord
cwbSV_ReadPrevRecord
Serviceability API list: Retrieving message text
cwbSV_CreateErrHandle
cwbSV_DeleteErrHandle
cwbSV_GetErrClass
cwbSV_GetErrClassIndexed
cwbSV_GetErrCount
cwbSV_GetErrFileName
cwbSV_GetErrFileNameIndexed
cwbSV_GetErrLibName
cwbSV_GetErrLibNameIndexed
cwbSV_GetErrSubstText
cwbSV_GetErrSubstTextIndexed
cwbSV_GetErrText
cwbSV_GetErrTextIndexed
Example: Using iSeries Access for Windows Serviceability APIs
iSeries Access for Windows System Object Access (SOA) APIs
SOA objects
iSeries object views
Typical use of System Object Access APIs for iSeries Access for Windows
Displaying a customized list of iSeries objects
Sample program: Displaying a customized list of iSeries objects
Displaying the Properties view for an iSeries Object
Sample program: Displaying the Properties view of an object
Accessing and updating data for iSeries Objects
Sample program: Accessing and updating data for iSeries objects
iSeries Access for Windows System Object Access programming considerations
About System Object Access errors
System Object Access application profiles
Managing iSeries communications sessions for application programs
System Object Access APIs for iSeries Access for Windows List
CWBSO_CloseList
CWBSO_CopyObjHandle
CWBSO_CreateErrorHandle
CWBSO_CreateListHandle
CWBSO_CreateListHandleEx
CWBSO_CreateObjHandle
CWBSO_CreateParmObjHandle
CWBSO_DeleteErrorHandle
CWBSO_DeleteListHandle
CWBSO_DeleteObjHandle
CWBSO_DeleteParmObjHandle
CWBSO_DisallowListActions
CWBSO_DisallowListFilter
CWBSO_DisplayErrMsg
CWBSO_DisplayList
CWBSO_DisplayObjAttr
CWBSO_GetErrMsgText
CWBSO_GetListSize
CWBSO_GetObjAttr
CWBSO_GetObjHandle
CWBSO_OpenList
CWBSO_ReadListProfile
CWBSO_RefreshObj
CWBSO_ResetParmObj
CWBSO_SetListFilter
CWBSO_SetListProfile
CWBSO_SetListSortFields
CWBSO_SetListTitle
CWBSO_SetObjAttr
CWBSO_SetParameter
CWBSO_WaitForObj
CWBSO_WriteListProfile
SOA attribute special values
Job attributes
Message attributes
Printer attributes
Printer output attributes
TCP/IP interfaces attributes
Ethernet lines attributes
Token-ring lines attributes
Hardware resources attributes
Software products attributes
TCP/IP routes attributes
Users and groups attributes
Libraries in QSYS attributes
iSeries Access for Windows: Database programming
iSeries Access for Windows .NET provider
iSeries Access for Windows OLE DB provider
iSeries Access ODBC
Files required to build an ODBC application
Choose an interface to access the ODBC driver
ODBC C/C++ application header files
ODBC APIs: General concepts
Parameter markers
SQLFetch and SQLGetData
Code directly to ODBC APIs
Call stored procedures
Block insert and block fetch C example
Example: Block inserts using Visual Basic
Visual Basic: The compromise between Jet and ODBC APIs
Retrieve results
Access a database server with an ODBC application
Establish ODBC connections
Execute ODBC functions
Execute prepared statements
Convert strings and arrays of byte
ODBC API return codes
End ODBC functions
Implementation issues of ODBC APIs
ODBC 3.x APIs Notes
SQL Statement Considerations
Connection string keywords
Connection string keywords - General properties
Connection string keywords - Server properties
Connection string keywords - Format properties
Connection string keywords - Package properties
Connection string keywords - Performance properties
Connection string keywords - Sort properties
Connection string keywords - Catalog properties
Connection string keywords - Translation properties
Connection string keywords - Diagnostic properties
Connection string keywords - other properties
Version and release changes in the ODBC driver behavior
ODBC API restrictions and unsupported functions
Signon dialog behavior
ODBC data types and how they correspond to DB2 UDB database types
Large objects (LOBs) considerations
Example: Use the BLOB data type
Connection and statement attributes
Connection pooling
SQLPrepare and SQLNativeSQL escape sequences and scalar functions
Distributed transaction support
Cursor Behavior Notes
Extended dynamic disabled error
ODBC 64-bit Windows and Linux Considerations
Restrictions of the 64–bit iSeries Access for Windows ODBC Driver
SQLTables Description
Handle long-running queries
Commitment control considerations
iSeries Access for Windows ODBC performance
Performance-tuning iSeries Access for Windows ODBC
Introduction to server performance
Introduction to client/server performance
The performance architecture of the iSeries Access for Windows ODBC driver
Select a stringent level of commitment control
Fine-tune record-blocking
Use Extended Dynamic SQL
Performance considerations of common end-user tools
Examples: Common tool behaviors that degrade ODBC performance
Example: Query tool A
Example: Query tool B
Example: Query tool C
SQL performance
SQL performance general considerations
Database design
Normalization
Table size
Use indexes
Match attributes of join fields
Optimizer
Cost estimation
Optimizer decision-making rules
ODBC blocked insert statement
Catalog functions
Exit programs
Examples: User exit programs
Example: ILE C/400 user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
Example: CL user exit program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT
Example: ILE C/400 Program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1
Example: ILE C/400 program for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1
Exit program parameter formats
Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL2 format ZDAQ0200
Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_INIT format ZDAI0100
Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0100
Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_NDB1 format ZDAD0200
Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_SQL1 format ZDAQ0100
Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0100
Parameter fields for exit point QIBM_QZDA_ROI1 format ZDAR0200
Stored procedures
Stored procedure result sets
Examples: Stored procedures
Example: Run CL commands that use SQL stored procedures and ODBC
Example: Stored procedure calls from Visual Basic with return values
Example: Call an iSeries stored procedure by using Visual Basic
Example: Call CL command stored procedures
Tips: Run and call iSeries stored procedures
ODBC program examples
Example: Visual C++ - Access and return data by a call to a stored procedure
Example: Visual Basic - Access and return data by a call to a stored procedure
Examples: RPG - Host code for ODBC stored procedures
iSeries Access for Windows database APIs
Java programming
ActiveX programming
Operations Console
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDFs
Planning considerations for Operations Console
Planning considerations for your configuration
Console planning considerations
Planning considerations for your backup console
Scenarios: Selecting your configuration
Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system without remote support
Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system with remote support
Scenario: Consoles for multiple systems or partitions
Preparation for your network environment
Security of your Operations Console configuration
Preparation for your Operations Console and iSeries Navigator configuration
Verification of Operations Console requirements
Operations Console hardware requirements
Operations Console software requirements
Operations Console cable requirements
Verification of available communications port
Planning considerations for your Operations Console installation or upgrade
Planning considerations for your control panel
Remote control panel
Virtual control panel
Limitations of the virtual control panel
Installing the virtual control panel
PC preparations for Operations Console
Completing the setup prerequisite checklist
Setting up a local console directly attached to the server
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server
Setting up a local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
Setting up a local console on a network
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console on a network
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console on a network
Setting up a remote console through dial-up support
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Remote console through dial-up support
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Remote console through dial-up support
Completing required prerequisite tasks
Installing iSeries Access for Windows
Applying iSeries Access for Windows service packs
Installing Operations Console connection modem
Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows 2000
Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows XP
Installing PC modem
Installing PC modem for Windows 2000
Installing PC modem for Windows XP
Granting remote access
Granting remote access for Windows 2000
Granting remote access for Windows XP
Creating and configuring incoming connections
Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows 2000
Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows XP
Installing an Operations Console cable
Cabling a model 830 or a model 840 Operations Console
Configuring Operations Console on the PC
Completing the setup interview
Managing Operations Console
Managing your console configuration
Changing a console configuration
Deleting a console configuration
Connecting a local console to a system
Connecting a local console on a network to a system
Connecting to another system
Connecting a local console directly attached to the system
Connecting a remote console to a local console by modem
Control tasks between users
Granting or refusing control to a remote console
System i control
Default user (SERVER)
Identifying user in control of a system
Displaying the remote control panel in read-only mode
Requesting and releasing control at the local console
Sending a message to a controlling remote console
Requesting control at the remote console
Releasing control at the remote console
Sending a message to a controlling local console or remote console
Transferring control between users
Using the Properties page
Customizing the Operations Console window
Management of multiple consoles
Multiple local PC consoles on a network
Multiple remote consoles through dial-up support connecting to the same local console directly attached to the system
Switching from one console type to another when a console is currently available
Switching from one console type to another when the current console is not operational
Takeover or recovery of an Operations Console connection
Takeover details
Recovery details
Enabling console takeover
Scenarios: Takeover and recovery
Scenario: LAN connected devices only with takeover enabled
Scenario: A normal IPL and dual-connectivity configurations with take over enabled
Scenario: Recovery of a console requiring a new console type setting
Scenario: How to recover the console during a D-mode IPL with take over enabled
Changing from one console type to another
Changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN)
Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN) in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network in a logical partition
Configuring the PC to use the new console type when changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network
Changing from a local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached
Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a non-partitioned system or a primary partition
Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a logical partition
Configuring the PC to use the new console type
Changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a logical partition
Configuring the PC to use the new console type after changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
Changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a logical partition
Performing optional steps on the PC when changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
Managing your local console on a network
Considerations for changing the service tools device ID passwords
Changing the service tools device ID password on the PC and system
Changing the access password
Resynchronizing the PC and service tools device ID password
Resetting the service tools device ID password on the system
Resetting the service tools device ID password on the PC
Creating service tools device IDs on the system
Configuring a service host name (interface name)
Deallocating or moving the LAN adapter card from use by Operations Console
Changing network values for Operations Console (LAN)
Completing the PC changes
Common tasks
Changing keyboard definitions
Starting the system using a manual IPL
Activating the asynchronous communications line on the system
Deactivating the asynchronous communications line on the system
Using the console service functions (65+21)
Using the OPSCONSOLE macro
Using service tools device IDs in system service tools
Troubleshooting Operations Console connection
Troubleshooting status message
Status messages when configuration is running normally
Status messages when you have connection problems
Troubleshooting connection problems
Local console connection problems
Console fails to connect
Network connection errors
Error message: The connection to the system is not a secure connection
Local or remote console status remains Connecting
Console fails to connect and port detection fails
Performance degradation on local console
Unable to make a connection when infrared devices are installed
Unexpected disconnections
Using HyperTerminal to validate connectivity between client and the system
Installing HyperTerminal
Using HyperTerminal
Remote console connection problems
Remote console through dial-up fails to connect to local console
Local console name mismatch when remote console connects to the local console
Troubleshooting authentication problems
Authentication errors
Troubleshooting emulator problems
PC5250 window does not display user data
Troubleshooting system reference code data
System reference code A6nn500x
System reference code A6005001, A6005004, and A6005007
System reference code A6005008
System reference code A9002000
System reference code A6005082
Failure to display D1008065 and D1008066 automatically after calling the function
IPL step C6004031 takes longer than expected
Troubleshooting remote control panel and virtual control panel problems
Remote control panel fails to start
Unable to use the mode function
Authentication problems
Troubleshooting configuration wizard problems
Local console does not detect console cable
Old network data interfering with reconfiguration of network connectivity
Troubleshooting other Operations Console problems
Operations Console remains in QCTL
System requests do not work
Unable to sign on because of a lost or expired password or disabled user ID
iSeries Access for Wireless
iSeries Navigator for Wireless
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Setting up iSeries Navigator for Wireless
Hardware and software requirements
Selecting a device
Selecting a device: Internet-ready telephones
Selecting a device: PDAs
Selecting a device: PCs
Developing an Internet protection program
Configuring your wireless environment
Configuring a Web application server
Configuring your ASF Jakarta Tomcat servlet engine for HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Base Edition, Version 5.1
Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Express Edition, Version 5.1
Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Version 6.0
Configuring your firewall
Configuring Management Central
Selecting a language
Connecting to your central system
Customizing your connection
Managing your systems with iSeries Navigator for Wireless
Working with systems
Working with Integrated xSeries Servers
Working with tasks
Running commands across multiple systems
Viewing and interacting with monitors
System monitors
Job monitors
Message monitors
File monitors
B2B activity monitors
Related information for iSeries Navigator for Wireless
IBM Toolbox for Java 2 Micro Edition
iSeries Access for Linux
What's new
Printable PDFs
IBM iSeries Access for Linux license information
Prerequisites for using iSeries Access for Linux
Install iSeries Access for Linux
Update iSeries Access for Linux
Uninstall iSeries Access for Linux
iSeries Access for Linux security
iSeries Access for Linux 5250 emulation
Prerequisites for using 5250 emulation
Configure 5250 emulation
Command line emulator options
X resources for the iSeries Access for Linux emulator
Color mapping
Image/fax (3849 emulation)
Keyboard remapping
Miscellaneous preferences
Popup/pull down keypads
Record/playback
Screen print
Session ID
Languages for your emulator
Emulator resources
Troubleshoot 5250 emulation
5250 problem isolation
Font problems
iSeries Access for Linux 5250 emulation FAQs
iSeries Access for Linux Open Database Connectivity
Prerequisites for using ODBC
ODBC language considerations
ODBC 64-bit Windows and Linux Considerations
Restrictions when using ODBC with iSeries Access for Linux
Configure an ODBC data source
Use GUI to configure an ODBC data source
Manually configure an ODBC data source
ODBC examples
Troubleshoot an iSeries Access for Linux ODBC
ODBC problem isolation
Error messages
ODBC FAQs
iSeries Access for Linux utilities
CWBCOPWR - Change advanced communications settings
CWBMEDIC - Service information collection tool
CWBNLTBL - Download conversion tables
CWBPING - Test the connection to the server
CWBRUNSQL - Run batch SQL commands and procedures using an ODBC DSN
CWBTRC - Trace iSeries Access for Linux
RMTCMD - Run an iSeries batch/CL command
RMTODBC - Run an iSeries batch/CL command using the ODBC driver
iSeries Navigator
Getting to know iSeries Navigator
What's new for iSeries Navigator in V5R4
Printable PDF
iSeries Navigator functions by release
Requirements for installing iSeries Navigator
Installing iSeries Navigator
Adding system connections to iSeries Navigator
Working with iSeries Navigator
Related information for iSeries Navigator
iSeries Navigator for Wireless
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Setting up iSeries Navigator for Wireless
Hardware and software requirements
Selecting a device
Selecting a device: Internet-ready telephones
Selecting a device: PDAs
Selecting a device: PCs
Developing an Internet protection program
Configuring your wireless environment
Configuring a Web application server
Configuring your ASF Jakarta Tomcat servlet engine for HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Base Edition, Version 5.1
Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Express Edition, Version 5.1
Configuring your WebSphere Application Server, Version 6.0
Configuring your firewall
Configuring Management Central
Selecting a language
Connecting to your central system
Customizing your connection
Managing your systems with iSeries Navigator for Wireless
Working with systems
Working with Integrated xSeries Servers
Working with tasks
Running commands across multiple systems
Viewing and interacting with monitors
System monitors
Job monitors
Message monitors
File monitors
B2B activity monitors
Related information for iSeries Navigator for Wireless
iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Setting up iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
Setting up iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web: Prerequisites
Configuring security for iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
Configuring Web browser connections to iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
Configuring data-retrieval connections to the local system and managed secondary systems
Configuring Application Administration
Working with iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web
iSeries Navigator tasks on the Web concepts
iSeries Navigator URL parameters and available Web tasks
Working with iSeries Navigator lists on the Web
Application Administration
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Application Administration concepts
Application registration
Application registration on Local Settings
Application registration on Central Settings
iSeries Navigator plug-ins and Application Administration
Access settings for a function
How access to a function is determined
Administration system
How clients initially discover their administration system
Advanced settings in Central Settings
How advanced settings are obtained for a user
Mandated and suggested values
Management Central and Application Administration
When changes take effect
Application Administration as a security tool
Installing Application Administration
Planning your Application Administration strategy
Planning for Application Administration
Planning for the administration system and Central Settings
Setting up Application Administration
Setting up Application Administration for Local Settings
Setting up the administration system for Central Settings
Managing Application Administration
Registering applications for Application Administration (Local Settings)
Registering applications on the administration system (Central Settings)
Working with a function's access setting
Working with user or group access settings
Working with Central Settings
Scenarios: Application Administration
Scenario: Setting up Application Administration
Scenario: Setting up an administration system for Central Settings
Management Central
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Getting started with Management Central
Before you begin
Configuring TCP prerequisite checklist
Management Central connection considerations
Installing Management Central
Checking for the most current MC code
Installing and accessing Management Central
Verifying the connection function
Setting up the central system
Setting up your central system for the first time
Management Central settings and options
Adding endpoint systems to your Management Central network
How to completely remove endpoints
Creating system groups in your Management Central network
Changing the central system setup
Management Central plug-ins
Backup, Recovery, and Media Services (BRMS)
Clusters
Working with systems with partitions
Advanced Job Scheduler
Troubleshooting Management Central connections
Working with Management Central monitors
Monitor concepts
Management collection objects
Job monitors and Collection Services
The QYRMJOBSEL job
QZRCSRVS jobs and their impact on performance
Special considerations
Creating a new monitor
Selecting the metrics
Specifying the threshold values
Specifying the collection interval
Specifying threshold run commands
Specifying event logging and actions
Applying thresholds and actions for a monitor
Viewing monitor results
Graph history concepts
Viewing graph history
Resetting triggered threshold for a monitor
Scenarios: iSeries Navigator monitors
Scenario: System monitor
Scenario: Job monitor for CPU utilization
Scenario: Job monitor with Advanced Job Scheduler notification
Scenario: Message monitor
Using other features of Management Central
Working with inventory
Viewing an inventory
How to use inventories
Running actions on an inventory
Searching a Management Central users and groups inventory
Extreme Support
Working with systems with partitions
Running commands with Management Central
Packaging and sending objects with Management Central
Distributing fixes to multiple systems with iSeries Navigator
Packaging and distribution considerations
Managing users and groups with Management Central
Sharing with other users in Management Central
Synchronizing date and time values
Synchronizing functions
Scheduling tasks or jobs with Management Central scheduler
Advanced Job Scheduler
Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
Scheduling jobs with Advanced Job Scheduler
What's new in Advanced Job Scheduler for V5R4
Installing the Advanced Job Scheduler
Setting up the Advanced Job Scheduler
Assigning the general properties
Specifying permission levels
Setting up a scheduling calendar
Setting up a holiday calendar
Setting up a fiscal calendar
Specifying a mail server to use for notification
Setting up multiple scheduling environments
Assigning data libraries to users
Managing the Advanced Job Scheduler
Creating and scheduling a job
Creating and scheduling a job group
Predefined schedules
Setting up a predefined schedule
Adding a schedule to a scheduled job
Adding a schedule to a holiday calendar
Creating a temporary scheduled job
Scheduling job dependencies
The Work Flow Manager
Creating a new work flow
Starting a work flow
Working with work flows
Monitoring job activity for the Advanced Job Scheduler
Scheduled job activity
Specifying the activity retention
Viewing the scheduled job activity details
Viewing the scheduled job activity for a specific job
Viewing the activity log details
Viewing the activity log for a specific job
Monitoring for messages with Advanced Job Scheduler
Creating and working with local data area
Creating and working with application controls and job controls
Working with notification
Working with library lists
Working with command variables
Working with Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
Hardware and software requirements
Selecting a device
Configuring your wireless environment
Configuring your Web application server
Configuring your firewall
Selecting a language
Connecting to your i5/OS operating system
Customizing your connection
Managing Advanced Job Scheduler for Wireless
Troubleshooting the Advanced Job Scheduler
Related information for Management Central
Intelligent agents
Developing iSeries Navigator plug-ins
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Plug-in support in iSeries Navigator
What you can do with a plug-in
How plug-ins work
Plug-in requirements
Distributing plug-ins
Setup.ini file
Example: Information section of setup.ini
Example: Service section of setup.ini
Example: Identify files section of setup.ini
Example: Exit programs section of the setup.ini
MRI setup file
Identifying plug-ins to iSeries Navigator
Installing and running sample plug-ins
Setting up sample C++ plug-ins
Setting up sample Visual Basic plug-ins
Sample Visual Basic plug-in directory of files
Setting up the sample Java plug-ins
Sample Java plug-in directory of files
Plug-in programming reference
C++ reference
iSeries Navigator structure and flow of control for C++ plug-ins
iSeries Navigator COM interfaces for C++
Description of IA4HierarchyFolder Interface
IA4HierarchyFolder interface specifications listing
IA4HierarchyFolder::Activate
IA4HierarchyFolder::BindToList
IA4HierarchyFolder::DisplayErrorMessage
IA4HierarchyFolder::GetAttributesOf
IA4HierarchyFolder::GetColumnDataItem
IA4HierarchyFolder::GetColumnInfo
IA4HierarchyFolder::GetIconIndexOf
IA4HierarchyFolder::GetItemCount
IA4HierarchyFolder::GetToolBarInfo
IA4HierarchyFolder::GetListObject
IA4HierarchyFolder::ItemAt
IA4HierarchyFolder::ProcessTerminating
IA4HierarchyFolder::Refresh
Description of IA4PropSheetNotify interface
IA4PropSheetNotify interface specifications listing
IA4PropSheetNotify::ApplyChanges
IA4PropSheetNotify::GetErrorMessage
IA4PropSheetNotify::InformUserState
iSeries Navigator APIs
iSeries Navigator API listing
cwbUN_GetSystemValue
cwbUN_GetSystemHandle
cwbUN_ReleaseSystemHandle
cwbUN_CheckObjectAuthority
cwbUN_CheckSpecialAuthority
cwbUN_CheckAS400Name
cwbUN_GetUserAttribute
cwbUN_ConvertPidlToString
cwbUN_GetDisplayNameFromItemId
cwbUN_GetDisplayNameFromName
cwbUN_GetDisplayPathFromName
cwbUN_GetIndexFromItemId
cwbUN_GetIndexFromName
cwbUN_GetIndexFromPidl
cwbUN_GetListObject
cwbUN_GetParentFolderNameFromName
cwbUN_GetParentFolderPathFromName
cwbUN_GetParentFolderPidl
cwbUN_GetSystemNameFromName
cwbUN_GetSystemNameFromPidl
cwbUN_GetTypeFromName
cwbUN_GetTypeFromPidl
cwbUN_RefreshAll
cwbUN_RefreshList
cwbUN_RefreshListItems
cwbUN_UpdateStatusBar
cwbUN_GetODBCConnection
cwbUN_EndODBCConnections
cwbUN_GetIconIndex
cwbUN_GetSharedImageList
cwbUN_GetAdminValue
cwbUN_GetAdminValueEx
cwbUN_GetAdminCacheState
cwbUN_GetAdminCacheStateEx
cwbUN_IsSubcomponentInstalled
cwbUN_OpenLocalLdapServer
cwbUN_FreeLocalLdapServer
cwbUN_GetLdapSvrPort
cwbUN_GetLdapSvrSuffixCount
cwbUN_GetLdapSvrSuffixName
cwbUN_OpenLdapPublishing
cwbUN_FreeLdapPublishing
cwbUN_GetLdapPublishCount
cwbUN_GetLdapPublishType
cwbUN_GetLdapPublishServer
cwbUN_GetLdapPublishPort
cwbUN_GetLdapPublishParentDn
Return codes unique to iSeries Navigator APIs
Visual Basic reference
iSeries Navigator structure and flow of control for Visual Basic plug-ins
iSeries Navigator Visual Basic interfaces
iSeries Navigator ListManager interface class
iSeries Navigator ActionsManager interface class
iSeries Navigator DropTargetManager interface class
Java reference
iSeries Navigator structure and flow of control for Java plug-ins
Customizing the plug-in registry files
Customizing the C++ registry values
Primary registry key
Data server implementation
Shell plug-in implementation class
Shell plug-in implementation for objects
Shell plug-ins
Global changes for C++ plug-in registry files
Customizing the Visual Basic plug-in registry values
Primary registry key
Visual Basic plug-in implementation class
Parent field values
Example: New folder registry key
Visual Basic plug-in implementation objects
Global changes for Visual Basic plug-in registry files
Sample Java registry file
Property pages for a property sheet handler
Description of QueryContextMenu flags
Example: Constructing Visual Basic property pages for a property sheet handler
Property sheet handling in Java
Example: Java Properties Manager
Secure Sockets Layer registry entry
Operations Console
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDFs
Planning considerations for Operations Console
Planning considerations for your configuration
Console planning considerations
Planning considerations for your backup console
Scenarios: Selecting your configuration
Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system without remote support
Scenario: A single console directly attached to the system with remote support
Scenario: Consoles for multiple systems or partitions
Preparation for your network environment
Security of your Operations Console configuration
Preparation for your Operations Console and iSeries Navigator configuration
Verification of Operations Console requirements
Operations Console hardware requirements
Operations Console software requirements
Operations Console cable requirements
Verification of available communications port
Planning considerations for your Operations Console installation or upgrade
Planning considerations for your control panel
Remote control panel
Virtual control panel
Limitations of the virtual control panel
Installing the virtual control panel
PC preparations for Operations Console
Completing the setup prerequisite checklist
Setting up a local console directly attached to the server
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server
Setting up a local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console directly attached to the server with remote access allowed
Setting up a local console on a network
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Local console on a network
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Local console on a network
Setting up a remote console through dial-up support
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows 2000: Remote console through dial-up support
Completing prerequisite checklist for Windows XP: Remote console through dial-up support
Completing required prerequisite tasks
Installing iSeries Access for Windows
Applying iSeries Access for Windows service packs
Installing Operations Console connection modem
Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows 2000
Installing Operations Console connection modem for Windows XP
Installing PC modem
Installing PC modem for Windows 2000
Installing PC modem for Windows XP
Granting remote access
Granting remote access for Windows 2000
Granting remote access for Windows XP
Creating and configuring incoming connections
Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows 2000
Creating and configuring incoming connections for Windows XP
Installing an Operations Console cable
Cabling a model 830 or a model 840 Operations Console
Configuring Operations Console on the PC
Completing the setup interview
Managing Operations Console
Managing your console configuration
Changing a console configuration
Deleting a console configuration
Connecting a local console to a system
Connecting a local console on a network to a system
Connecting to another system
Connecting a local console directly attached to the system
Connecting a remote console to a local console by modem
Control tasks between users
Granting or refusing control to a remote console
System i control
Default user (SERVER)
Identifying user in control of a system
Displaying the remote control panel in read-only mode
Requesting and releasing control at the local console
Sending a message to a controlling remote console
Requesting control at the remote console
Releasing control at the remote console
Sending a message to a controlling local console or remote console
Transferring control between users
Using the Properties page
Customizing the Operations Console window
Management of multiple consoles
Multiple local PC consoles on a network
Multiple remote consoles through dial-up support connecting to the same local console directly attached to the system
Switching from one console type to another when a console is currently available
Switching from one console type to another when the current console is not operational
Takeover or recovery of an Operations Console connection
Takeover details
Recovery details
Enabling console takeover
Scenarios: Takeover and recovery
Scenario: LAN connected devices only with takeover enabled
Scenario: A normal IPL and dual-connectivity configurations with take over enabled
Scenario: Recovery of a console requiring a new console type setting
Scenario: How to recover the console during a D-mode IPL with take over enabled
Changing from one console type to another
Changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN)
Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network (LAN) in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
Changing the console from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network in a logical partition
Configuring the PC to use the new console type when changing from a local console directly attached to a local console on a network
Changing from a local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached
Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a non-partitioned system or a primary partition
Changing the console from local console on a network (LAN) to a local console directly attached for a logical partition
Configuring the PC to use the new console type
Changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
Changing the console from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console in a logical partition
Configuring the PC to use the new console type after changing from a twinaxial console to an Operations Console
Changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a non-partitioned or primary partitioned system
Changing the console from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console in a logical partition
Performing optional steps on the PC when changing from an Operations Console to a twinaxial console
Managing your local console on a network
Considerations for changing the service tools device ID passwords
Changing the service tools device ID password on the PC and system
Changing the access password
Resynchronizing the PC and service tools device ID password
Resetting the service tools device ID password on the system
Resetting the service tools device ID password on the PC
Creating service tools device IDs on the system
Configuring a service host name (interface name)
Deallocating or moving the LAN adapter card from use by Operations Console
Changing network values for Operations Console (LAN)
Completing the PC changes
Common tasks
Changing keyboard definitions
Starting the system using a manual IPL
Activating the asynchronous communications line on the system
Deactivating the asynchronous communications line on the system
Using the console service functions (65+21)
Using the OPSCONSOLE macro
Using service tools device IDs in system service tools
Troubleshooting Operations Console connection
Troubleshooting status message
Status messages when configuration is running normally
Status messages when you have connection problems
Troubleshooting connection problems
Local console connection problems
Console fails to connect
Network connection errors
Error message: The connection to the system is not a secure connection
Local or remote console status remains Connecting
Console fails to connect and port detection fails
Performance degradation on local console
Unable to make a connection when infrared devices are installed
Unexpected disconnections
Using HyperTerminal to validate connectivity between client and the system
Installing HyperTerminal
Using HyperTerminal
Remote console connection problems
Remote console through dial-up fails to connect to local console
Local console name mismatch when remote console connects to the local console
Troubleshooting authentication problems
Authentication errors
Troubleshooting emulator problems
PC5250 window does not display user data
Troubleshooting system reference code data
System reference code A6nn500x
System reference code A6005001, A6005004, and A6005007
System reference code A6005008
System reference code A9002000
System reference code A6005082
Failure to display D1008065 and D1008066 automatically after calling the function
IPL step C6004031 takes longer than expected
Troubleshooting remote control panel and virtual control panel problems
Remote control panel fails to start
Unable to use the mode function
Authentication problems
Troubleshooting configuration wizard problems
Local console does not detect console cable
Old network data interfering with reconfiguration of network connectivity
Troubleshooting other Operations Console problems
Operations Console remains in QCTL
System requests do not work
Unable to sign on because of a lost or expired password or disabled user ID
Twinaxial console
Hardware Management Console
Thin Console
Database
Printable PDFs
Database overview
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
DB2 Universal Database for iSeries
Terminology: SQL versus traditional file access
Getting started with iSeries Navigator
Starting iSeries Navigator
Creating a schema
Editing the list of schemas displayed
Creating a table and defining a column
Defining additional columns on a table
Creating the supplier table
Copying column definitions
Inserting information into a table
Viewing the contents of a table
Changing information in a table
Deleting information from a table
Copying and moving a table
Copying a table
Moving a table
Creating and using a view
Creating a view over a single table
Creating a WHERE clause
Creating a view that combines data from multiple tables
Deleting database objects
iSeries Navigator database tasks
Database objects creation tasks
Database objects operation tasks
Database performance optimization tasks
Mapping your database
Querying your database by running SQL scripts
Stopping SQL scripts
Viewing the job log
Generating SQL for existing objects
Building SQL statements with SQL Assist
Starting iSeries System Debugger
Managing check pending constraints
Importing and exporting data
Getting started with SQL
Creating a schema
Creating and using a table
Using the LABEL ON statement
Inserting information into a table
Getting information from a single table
Getting information from multiple tables
Changing information in a table
Deleting information from a table
Creating and using a view
Creating a view on a single table
Creating a view that combines data from multiple tables
Database information finder
Administration
Printable PDF
Database administration
Altering and managing database objects
Creating database objects
Ensuring data integrity
Importing and exporting data between systems
Managing journals
Working with multiple databases
Working with triggers and constraints
Writing DB2 programs
Database backup and recovery
Backup and recovery
Recovering and restoring your database
Journal management
Distributed database administration
Planning and design
Initial setup
Administration
Security
Data availability and protection
Performance
Troubleshooting
Application development
Queries and reports
V5R3 changes to Query for iSeries
Security
Controlling DDM and DRDA access
Granting object and data authority
Limiting access to specific fields of a database file
Specifying public authority
Using database file capabilities to control I/O operations
Using logical files to secure data
Commitment control
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Commitment control concepts
How commitment control works
How commit and rollback operations work
Commit operation
Rollback operation
Commitment definition
Scope for a commitment definition
Commitment definition names
Example: Jobs and commitment definitions
How commitment control works with objects
Types of committable resources
Local and remote committable resources
Access intent of a committable resource
The commit protocol of a committable resource
Journaled files and commitment control
Sequence of journal entries under commitment control
Commit cycle identifier
Record locking
Commitment control and independent disk pools
Independent disk pool considerations for commitment definitions
Considerations for XA transactions
Considerations and restrictions for commitment control
Commitment control for batch applications
Two-phase commitment control
Roles in commit processing
States of the transaction for two-phase commitment control
Commitment definitions for two-phase commitment control
Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Allow vote read-only
Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not wait for outcome
Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Indicate OK to leave out
Commitment definition for two-phase commit: Not select a last agent
Vote reliable effect on flow of commit processing
XA transaction support for commitment control
SQL server mode and thread-scoped transactions for commitment control
Starting commitment control
Commit notify object
Commit lock level
Ending commitment control
System-initiated end of commitment control
Commitment control during activation group end
Implicit commit and rollback operations
Commitment control during normal routing step end
Commitment control during abnormal system or job end
Updates to the notify object
Commitment control recovery during initial program load after abnormal end
Managing transactions and commitment control
Displaying commitment control information
Displaying locked objects for a transaction
Displaying jobs associated with a transaction
Displaying resource status of a transaction
Displaying transaction properties
Optimizing performance for commitment control
Minimizing locks
Managing transaction size
Soft commit
Scenarios and examples: Commitment control
Scenario: Commitment control
Practice problem for commitment control
Logic flow for practice problem
Steps associated with the logic flow for the practice program
Example: Using a transaction logging file to start an application
Example: Using a notify object to start an application
Example: Unique notify object for each program
Example: Single notify object for all programs
Example: Using a standard processing program to start an application
Example: Code for a standard processing program
Processing flow
Example: Code for a standard commit processing program
Example: Using a standard processing program to decide whether to restart the application
Troubleshooting transactions and commitment control
Commitment control errors
Error conditions
Nonerror conditions
Error messages to monitor during commitment control
Monitoring for errors after a CALL command
Failure of normal commit or rollback processing
Detecting deadlocks
Recovering transactions after communications failure
When to force commit and rollback operations and when to cancel resynchronization
Ending a long-running rollback
Related information
Performance and query optimization
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Query Engine Overview
SQE and CQE Engines
Query Dispatcher
Statistics Manager
Plan Cache
Data access on DB2 UDB for iSeries: data access paths and methods
Permanent objects and access methods
Table
Table scan
Table probe
Radix index
Radix index scan
Radix index probe
Encoded vector index
Encoded vector index symbol table scan
Encoded vector index probe
Temporary objects and access methods
Temporary hash table
Hash table scan
Hash table probe
Temporary sorted list
Sorted list scan
Sorted list probe
Temporary list
List scan
Temporary row number list
Row number list scan
Row number list probe
Temporary bitmap
Bitmap scan
Bitmap probe
Temporary index
Temporary index scan
Temporary index probe
Temporary buffer
Buffer scan
Queue
Enqueue
Dequeue
Objects processed in parallel
Spreading data automatically
Processing queries: Overview
How the query optimizer makes your queries more efficient
General query optimization tips
Access plan validation
Single table optimization
Join optimization
Nested loop join implementation
Join optimization algorithm
Join order optimization
Cost estimation and index selection for join secondary dials
Predicates generated through transitive closure
Look ahead predicate generation (LPG)
Tips for improving performance when selecting data from more than two tables
Multiple join types for a query
Sources of join query performance problems
Tips for improving the performance of join queries
Distinct optimization
Grouping optimization
Grouping hash implementation
Index grouping implementation
Optimizing grouping by eliminating grouping columns
Optimizing grouping by adding additional grouping columns
Optimizing grouping by using index skip key processing
Optimizing grouping by removing read triggers
Ordering optimization
View implementation
View composite implementation
View materialization implementation
Materialized query table optimization
MQT supported function
Using MQTs during Query optimization
MQT examples
Details on the MQT matching algorithm
Determining unnecessary MQTs
Summary of MQT query recommendations
Recursive query optimization
Recursive query example
Multiple initialization and iterative fullselects
Predicate Pushing
Specifying SEARCH consideration
Specifying CYCLE considerations
SMP and recursive queries
Optimizing query performance using query optimization tools
Verify the performance of SQL applications
Examine query optimizer debug messages in the job log
Gather information about embedded SQL statements with the PRTSQLINF command
Viewing the plan cache with iSeries Navigator
Monitoring your queries using memory-resident database monitor
Memory-resident database monitor external API description
Memory-resident database monitor external table description
Sample SQL queries
Memory-resident database monitor row identification
Using iSeries Navigator with summary monitors
Starting a summary monitor
Analyzing summary monitor information
Importing a monitor
Monitoring your queries using Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON)
Start Database Monitor (STRDBMON) command
End Database Monitor (ENDDBMON) command
Database monitor performance rows
Database monitor examples
Database monitor performance analysis example 1
Database monitor performance analysis example 2
Database monitor performance analysis example 3
Additional database monitor examples
Using iSeries Navigator with detailed monitors
Starting a detailed monitor
Analyze detailed monitor data
Comparing monitor data
Viewing statements in a monitor
Importing a monitor
Query optimizer index advisor
Display index advisor information
Database manager indexes advised system table
Index advisor columns
Querying database monitor view 3020 - Index advised
View the implementation of your queries with Visual Explain
Starting Visual Explain
Overview of information available from Visual Explain
Change the attributes of your queries with the Change Query Attributes (CHGQRYA) command
Control queries dynamically with the query options file QAQQINI
Specifying the QAQQINI file
Creating the QAQQINI query options file
QAQQINI query options file format
Setting the options within the query options file
QAQQINI query options file authority requirements
QAQQINI file system supplied triggers
QAQQINI query options
Set resource limits with the Predictive Query Governor
Using the Query Governor
Canceling a query with the Query Governor
Controlling the default reply to the query governor inquiry message
Testing performance with the query governor
Examples of setting query time limits
Testing temporary storage usage with the query governor
Examples of setting query temporary storage limits
Control parallel processing for queries
Controlling system wide parallel processing for queries
Controlling job level parallel processing for queries
Collecting statistics with the Statistics Manager
Automatic statistics collection
Automatic statistics refresh
Viewing statistics requests
Indexes versus column statistics
Monitoring background statistics collection
Replication of column statistics with CRTDUPOBJ versus CPYF
Determining what column statistics exist
Manually collecting and refreshing statistics
Statistics Manager APIs
Display information with Database Health Center
Show Materialized Query Table columns
Manage Check Pending Constraints columns
Query optimization tools: Comparison table
Creating an index strategy
Binary radix indexes
Specifying PAGESIZE on CRTPF or CRTLF commands
General index maintenance
Encoded vector indexes
How the EVI works
When to create EVIs
EVI maintenance
Recommendations for EVI use
Comparing Binary radix indexes and Encoded vector indexes
Indexes and the optimizer
Instances where an index is not used
Determining unnecessary indexes
Show index for a table
Manage index rebuilds
Indexing strategy
Reactive approach to tuning
Proactive approach to tuning
Coding for effective indexes
Avoid numeric conversions
Avoid arithmetic expressions
Avoid character string padding
Avoid the use of like patterns beginning with % or _
Using indexes with sort sequence
Using indexes and sort sequence with selection, joins, or grouping
Using indexes and sort sequence with ordering
Examples of indexes
Index example: Equals selection with no sort sequence table
Index example: Equals selection with a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Equal selection with a shared-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Greater than selection with a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Join selection with a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Join selection with a shared-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering with no sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering with a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering with a shared-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Grouping with no sort sequence table
Index example: Grouping with a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Grouping with a shared-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with a shared-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering and grouping on the same columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a shared-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering and grouping on different columns with a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering and grouping on different columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a unique-weight sort sequence table
Index example: Ordering and grouping on different columns with ALWCPYDTA(*OPTIMIZE) and a shared-weight sort sequence table
Application design tips for database performance
Use live data
Reduce the number of open operations
Retain cursor positions
Retaining cursor positions for non-ILE program calls
Retaining cursor positions across ILE program calls
General rules for retaining cursor positions for all program calls
Programming techniques for database performance
Use the OPTIMIZE clause
Use FETCH FOR n ROWS
Improve SQL blocking performance when using FETCH FOR n ROWS
Use INSERT n ROWS
Control database manager blocking
Optimize the number of columns that are selected with SELECT statements
Eliminate redundant validation with SQL PREPARE statements
Page interactively displayed data with REFRESH(*FORWARD)
General DB2 UDB for iSeries performance considerations
Effects on database performance when using long object names
Effects of precompile options on database performance
Effects of the ALWCPYDTA parameter on database performance
Tips for using VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC data types in databases
Database monitor: Formats
Database monitor SQL table format
Optional database monitor SQL view format
Database monitor view 1000 - SQL Information
Database monitor view 3000 - Table Scan
Database monitor view 3001 - Index Used
Database monitor view 3002 - Index Created
Database monitor view 3003 - Query Sort
Database monitor view 3004 - Temp Table
Database monitor view 3005 - Table Locked
Database monitor view 3006 - Access Plan Rebuilt
Database monitor view 3007 - Optimizer Timed Out
Database monitor view 3008 - Subquery Processing
Database monitor view 3010 - HostVar & ODP Implementation
Database monitor view 3014 - Generic QQ Information
Database monitor view 3015 - Statistics Information
Database monitor view 3018 - STRDBMON/ENDDBMON
Database monitor view 3019 - Rows retrieved
Database monitor view 3020 - Index advised (SQE)
Database monitor view 3021 - Bitmap Created
Database monitor view 3022 - Bitmap Merge
Database monitor view 3023 - Temp Hash Table Created
Database monitor view 3025 - Distinct Processing
Database monitor view 3026 - Set operation
Database monitor view 3027 - Subquery Merge
Database monitor view 3028 - Grouping
Database monitor view 3030 - Materialized query tables
Database monitor view 3031 - Recursive common table expressions
Memory Resident Database Monitor: DDS
External table description (QAQQQRYI) - Summary Row for SQL Information
External table description (QAQQTEXT) - Summary Row for SQL Statement
External table description (QAQQ3000) - Arrival sequence
External table description (QAQQ3001) - Using existing index
External table description (QAQQ3002) - Index created
External table description (QAQQ3003) - Query sort
External table description (QAQQ3004) - Temporary table
External table description (QAQQ3007) - Optimizer information
External table description (QAQQ3008) - Subquery processing
External table description (QAQQ3010) - Host variable and ODP implementation
External table description (QAQQ3030) - Materialized query table implementation
Query optimizer messages reference
Query optimization performance information messages
CPI4321 - Access path built for &18 &19
CPI4322 - Access path built from keyed file &1
CPI4323 - The query access plan has been rebuilt
CPI4324 - Temporary file built for file &1
CPI4325 - Temporary result file built for query
CPI4326 - &12 &13 processed in join position &10
CPI4327 - File &12 &13 processed in join position &10
CPI4328 - Access path of file &3 was used by query
CPI4329 - Arrival sequence access was used for &12 &13
CPI432A - Query optimizer timed out for file &1
CPI432B - Subselects processed as join query
CPI432C - All access paths were considered for file &1
CPI432D - Additional access path reason codes were used
CPI432F - Access path suggestion for file &1
CPI4330 - &6 tasks used for parallel &10 scan of file &1
CPI4331 - &6 tasks used for parallel index created over file
CPI4332 - &1 host variables used in query
CPI4333 - Hashing algorithm used to process join
CPI4334 - Query implemented as reusable ODP
CPI4335 - Optimizer debug messages for hash join step &1 follow
CPI4336 - Group processing generated
CPI4337 - Temporary hash table build for hash join step &1
CPI4338 - &1 Access path(s) used for bitmap processing of file &2
CPI433D - Query options used to build the i5/OS query access plan
CPI433F - Multiple join classes used to process join
CPI4340 - Optimizer debug messages for join class step &1 follow
CPI4341 - Performing distributed query
CPI4342 - Performing distributed join for query
CPI4343 - Optimizer debug messages for distributed query step &1 of &2 follow:
CPI4345 - Temporary distributed result file &3 built for query
CPI4346 - Optimizer debug messages for query join step &1 of &2 follow:
CPI4347 - Query being processed in multiple steps
CPI4348 - The ODP associated with the cursor was hard closed
CPI4349 - Fast past refresh of the host variables values is not possible
CPI434C - The query access plan was not rebuilt
CPI4350 - Materialized query tables were considered for optimization
CPI4351 - Additional reason codes for query access plan has been rebuilt.
Query optimization performance information messages and open data paths
SQL7910 - All SQL cursors closed
SQL7911 - ODP reused
SQL7912 - ODP created
SQL7913 - ODP deleted
SQL7914 - ODP not deleted
SQL7915 - Access plan for SQL statement has been built
SQL7916 - Blocking used for query
SQL7917 - Access plan not updated
SQL7918 - Reusable ODP deleted
SQL7919 - Data conversion required on FETCH or embedded SELECT
SQL7939 - Data conversion required on INSERT or UPDATE
PRTSQLINF message reference
SQL400A - Temporary distributed result file &1 was created to contain join result
SQL400B - Temporary distributed result file &1 was created to contain join result
SQL400C - Optimizer debug messages for distributed query step &1 and &2 follow
SQL400D - GROUP BY processing generated
SQL400E - Temporary distributed result file &1 was created while processing distributed subquery
SQL4001 - Temporary result created
SQL4002 - Reusable ODP sort used
SQL4003 - UNION
SQL4004 - SUBQUERY
SQL4005 - Query optimizer timed out for table &1
SQL4006 - All indexes considered for table &1
SQL4007 - Query implementation for join position &1 table &2
SQL4008 - Index &1 used for table &2
SQL4009 - Index created for table &1
SQL401A - Processing grouping criteria for query containing a distributed table
SQL401B - Temporary distributed result table &1 was created while processing grouping criteria
SQL401C - Performing distributed join for query
SQL401D - Temporary distributed result table &1 was created because table &2 was directed
SQL401E - Temporary distributed result table &1 was created because table &2 was broadcast
SQL401F - Table &1 used in distributed join
SQL4010 - Table scan access for table &1
SQL4011 - Index scan-key row positioning used on table &1
SQL4012 - Index created from index &1 for table &2
SQL4013 - Access plan has not been built
SQL4014 - &1 join column pair(s) are used for this join position
SQL4015 - From-column &1.&2, to-column &3.&4, join operator &5, join predicate &6
SQL4016 - Subselects processed as join query
SQL4017 - Host variables implemented as reusable ODP
SQL4018 - Host variables implemented as non-reusable ODP
SQL4019 - Host variables implemented as file management row positioning reusable ODP
SQL402A - Hashing algorithm used to process join
SQL402B - Table &1 used in hash join step &2
SQL402C - Temporary table created for hash join results
SQL402D - Query attributes overridden from query options file &2 in library &1
SQL4020 - Estimated query run time is &1 seconds
SQL4021 - Access plan last saved on &1 at &2
SQL4022 - Access plan was saved with SRVQRY attributes active
SQL4023 - Parallel table prefetch used
SQL4024 - Parallel index preload access method used
SQL4025 - Parallel table preload access method used
SQL4026 - Index only access used on table number &1
SQL4027 - Access plan was saved with DB2 UDB Symmetric Multiprocessing installed on the system
SQL4028 - The query contains a distributed table
SQL4029 - Hashing algorithm used to process the grouping
SQL4030 - &1 tasks specified for parallel scan on table &2.
SQL4031 - &1 tasks specified for parallel index create over table &2
SQL4032 - Index &1 used for bitmap processing of table &2
SQL4033 - &1 tasks specified for parallel bitmap create using &2
SQL4034 - Multiple join classes used to process join
SQL4035 - Table &1 used in join class &2
Programming
Database programming
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Database file concepts
DB2 Universal Database for iSeries
Interfaces to DB2 Universal Database for iSeries
Traditional system interface
SQL
iSeries Navigator
IBM Query for iSeries
Database files
How database files are described
Externally and program-described data
Dictionary-described data
Record format description
Access path description
Naming conventions for a database file
Database data protection and monitoring
Database file sizes
Example: Database file sizes
Setting up database files
Creating and describing database files
Creating a library
Setting up source files
Why source files are used
Creating a source file
Creating a source file using the Create Source Physical File (CRTSRCPF) command
Creating a source file with DDS
Creating a source file without DDS
IBM-supplied source files
Source file attributes
Describing database files
Describing database files using DDS
Example: Describing a physical file using DDS
Example: Describing a logical file using DDS
Additional DDS field definition functions
Using existing field descriptions and field reference files to describe a database file
Using a data dictionary for field reference in a database file
Sharing existing record format descriptions in a database file
Record format relationships between physical and logical files
Record format sharing limitation with physical and logical files
Specifying database file and member attributes
Specifying the file name and member name (FILE and MBR) parameters
Specifying the physical file data members (DTAMBRS) parameter
Specifying the source file and source member (SRCFILE and SRCMBR) parameters
Specifying the file type (FILETYPE) parameter
Specifying the maximum number of members (MAXMBRS) parameter
Specifying the preferred storage unit (UNIT) parameter
Specifying the force write ratio (FRCRATIO) parameter
Specifying the force keyed access path (FRCACCPTH) parameter
Specifying the record format level check (LVLCHK) parameter
Specifying the access path maintenance (MAINT) parameter
MAINT parameter comparison
MAINT parameter tips
Specifying the access path recovery (RECOVER) parameter
Specifying the share open data path (SHARE) parameter
Specifying the maximum file and record wait time (WAITFILE and WAITRCD) parameters
Specifying the authority (AUT) parameter
Specifying the system (SYSTEM) parameter
Specifying the text description (TEXT) parameter
Specifying the coded character set identifier (CCSID) parameter
Specifying the sort sequence (SRTSEQ) parameter
Specifying the language identifier (LANGID) parameter
Setting up physical files
Creating a physical file
Specifying physical file and member attributes
Expiration date
Size of a physical file member
Storage allocation
Method of allocating storage
Record length
Deleted records
Physical file capabilities
Source type
Implicit physical file journaling
Setting up logical files
Creating a logical file
Creating a logical file with more than one record format
Controlling how records are retrieved in a logical file with multiple formats
Controlling how records are added to a logical file with multiple formats
Defining logical file members
Describing logical file record formats
Describing field use for logical files
Describing field use for logical files: Both
Describing field use for logical files: Input only
Describing field use for logical files: Neither
Deriving new fields from existing fields
Concatenated fields
Substring fields
Renamed fields
Translated fields
Describing floating-point fields in logical files
Describing access paths for logical files
Selecting and omitting records for logical files
Access path select/omit
Dynamic select/omit
Selecting and omitting logical file records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Sharing existing access paths between logical files
Example: Implicitly shared access paths
Setting up a join logical file
Example 1: Basic concepts of joining two physical files
Reading a join logical file
Case 1: Matching records in primary and secondary files
Case 2A: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword not specified)
Case 2B: A record missing in the secondary file (JDFTVAL keyword specified)
Case 3: Secondary file has more than one match for a record in the primary file
Case 4: An extra record in the secondary file
Case 5: Random access
Setting up a join logical file
Example 2: Using more than one field to join files
Example 3: Reading duplicate records in the secondary file
Example 4: Using join fields whose attributes are different
Example 5: Describing fields that never appear in the record format
Example 6: Specifying key fields in a join logical file
Specifying select/omit statements in a join logical file
Example 7: Joining three or more physical files
Example 8: Joining a physical file to itself
Example 9: Using defaults for missing records from secondary files
Example 10: A complex join logical file
Join logical file considerations
Performance considerations
Data integrity considerations
Summary of rules
Requirements
Join fields
Fields in join logical files
Miscellaneous rules
Describing access paths for database files
Using arrival sequence access paths for database files
Using keyed sequence access paths for database files
Arranging key fields in an alternative collating sequence
Arranging key fields with the SRTSEQ parameter
Arranging key fields in ascending or descending sequence
Using more than one key field
Preventing duplicate key values
Arranging duplicate keys
Using existing access path specifications
Using floating-point fields in database file access paths
Securing database files
Granting file and data authority
Authorizing a user or group using iSeries Navigator
Types of object authority
Types of data authority
Specifying public authority
Defining public authority using iSeries Navigator
Setting a default public authority using iSeries Navigator
Using database file capabilities to control I/O operations
Limiting access to specific fields in a database file
Using logical files to secure data
Processing database files
Database file processing: Runtime considerations
File and member name
File processing options
Specifying the type of processing
Specifying the initial file position
Reusing deleted records
Ignoring the keyed sequence access path
Delaying end-of-file processing
Specifying the record length
Ignoring record formats
Determining whether duplicate keys exist
Data recovery and integrity
Protecting your files with journaling and commitment control
Writing data and access paths to auxiliary storage
Checking changes to the record format description
Checking the expiration date of a physical file member
Preventing the job from changing data in a file
Locking shared data
Locking records
Locking files
Locking members
Locking record format data
Database lock considerations
Displaying locked rows using iSeries Navigator
Displaying locked records using the Display Record Locks (DSPRCDLCK) command
Sharing database files in the same job or activation group
Open considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
Input/output considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
Close considerations for files shared in a job or an activation group
Example 1: A single set of files with similar processing options
Example 2: Multiple sets of files with similar processing options
Example 3: A single set of files with different processing options
Sequential-only processing of database files
Open considerations for sequential-only processing
Input/output considerations for sequential-only processing
Close considerations for sequential-only processing
Summary of runtime considerations for processing database files
Storage pool paging option effect on database performance
Opening a database file
Opening a database file member
Using Open Database File (OPNDBF) command
Using Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Creating a query with the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Using an existing record format in the file
Using a file with a different record format
CL program coding with the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
The zero-length literal and the contains (*CT) function
Usage notes for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) examples
Selecting records without using DDS
Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 1: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 2: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 3: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 4: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 5: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 6: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 7: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 8: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 9: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 10: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 11: Selecting records using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
Example 1: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
Example 2: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
Example 3: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
Example 4: Specifying a keyed sequence access path without using DDS
Specifying key fields from different files
Dynamically joining database files without DDS
Example 1: Dynamically joining database files without DDS
Example 2: Dynamically joining database files without DDS
Example 3: Dynamically joining database files without DDS
Handling missing records in secondary join files
Unique-key processing
Example 1: Unique-key processing
Example 2: Unique-key processing
Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
Example 1: Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
Example 2: Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
Example 3: Defining fields derived from existing field definitions
Handling divide-by-zero errors
Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
Example: Summarizing data from database file records (grouping)
Final total-only processing
Example 1: Final total-only processing
Example 2: Final total-only processing
Example 3: Final total-only processing
Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 1: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Example 2: Controlling how the system runs the Open Query File command
Considerations for using the FORMAT parameter
Considerations for arranging records
Considerations for DDM files
Considerations for writing a high-level language program
Messages sent when the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command is run
Using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command for more than just input
Comparing date, time, and timestamp using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Performing date, time, and timestamp arithmetic using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Durations
Rules for date, time, and timestamp arithmetic
Subtracting dates
Incrementing and decrementing dates
Subtracting times
Incrementing and decrementing times
Subtracting timestamps
Incrementing and decrementing timestamps
Using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command for random processing
Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations
Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command: Performance considerations for sort sequence tables
Grouping, joining, and selection: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
Ordering: Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command performance
Performance comparisons with other database functions
Field use
Files shared in a job
Checking if the record format description changed
Other runtime considerations for the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Overrides and the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Copying from an open query file
Example 1: Copying from an open query file
Example 2: Copying from an open query file
Example 3: Copying from an open query file
Example 4: Copying from an open query file
Typical errors when using the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Open data path considerations
Field names
Expressions
Built-in functions
Restricted built-in functions
Basic database file operations in programs
Setting a position in the file
Reading database records
Reading database records using an arrival sequence access path
Reading next operation
Reading previous operation
Reading first operation
Reading last operation
Reading same operation
Reading by relative record number operation
Reading database records using a keyed sequence access path
Reading next operation
Reading previous operation
Reading first operation
Reading last operation
Reading same operation
Reading by key operation
Reading by relative record number operation
Reading when logical file shares an access path with more keys operation
Waiting for more records when end of file is reached
Releasing locked records
Updating database records
Adding database records
Identifying which record format to add in a file with multiple formats
Using the force-end-of-data operation
Deleting database records
Closing a database file
Monitoring database file errors in a program
System handling of error messages
Effect of error messages on file positioning
Determining which messages you want to monitor
Managing database files
Basic operations for managing database files
Copying a file
Moving a file
Managing database members
Member operations common to all database files
Adding members
Changing member attributes
Renaming members
Removing members
Physical file member operations
Initializing data in a physical file member
Clearing data from a physical file member
Reorganizing a physical file member
Reorganizing a table using iSeries Navigator
Reorganizing a physical file member using the Reorganize Physical File Member (RGZPFM) command
Example: Reorganizing a physical file member
Usage notes: Reorganizing a physical file member
Reorganization options
Suspending or canceling a reorganize operation
Displaying records in a physical file member
Using database attribute and cross-reference information
Displaying information about database files
Displaying attributes of a file using iSeries Navigator
Displaying attributes of a file using the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
Displaying the description of the fields in a file
Displaying the relationships between files on the system
Displaying the files used by programs
Displaying the system cross-reference files
Writing the output from a command directly to a database file
Example: A command output file
Output files for the Display File Description (DSPFD) command
Output files for the Display Journal (DSPJRN) command
Output files for the Display Problems (DSPPRB) command
Changing database file descriptions and attributes
Effects of changing fields in a file description
Changing a physical file description and attributes
Example 1: Changing a physical file description and attributes
Example 2: Changing a physical file description and attributes
Changing a logical file description and attributes
Recovering and restoring your database
Recovering data in a database file
Managing journals
Journals
Working with journals
Creating a journal using iSeries Navigator
Creating a journal receiver using iSeries Navigator
Values for new journals and journal receivers
Adding a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
Removing a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
Activating a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
Deactivating a remote journal using iSeries Navigator
Displaying journal information for a table using iSeries Navigator
Swapping journal receivers using iSeries Navigator
Starting or stopping a journal for a table (file) using iSeries Navigator
Ensuring data integrity with commitment control
Transactions
Benefits of using commitment control
Usage notes: Commitment control
Reducing time in access path recovery
Saving access paths
Restoring access paths
Journaling access paths
System-managed access-path protection
Rebuilding access paths
Controlling when access paths are rebuilt
Designing files to reduce access path rebuilding time
Other methods to avoid rebuilding access paths
Database recovery process after an abnormal system end
Database file recovery during the IPL
Database file recovery after the IPL
Effects of the storage pool paging option on database recovery
Database file recovery options table
Database save and restore
Database considerations for save and restore
Using source files
Working with source files
Using the source entry utility
Using device source files
Copying source file data
Copying to and from source files using the Copy Source File (CPYSRCF) command
Copying to and from source files using the Copy File (CPYF) command
Source sequence numbers used in copies
Loading and unloading data from systems other than System i
Using source files in a program
Creating an object using a source file
Creating an object from source statements in a batch job
Determining which source file member was used to create an object
Managing a source file
Changing source file attributes
Reorganizing source file member data
Determining when a source statement was changed
Using source files for documentation
Controlling the integrity of your database with constraints
Setting up constraints for your database
Removing unique, primary key, or check constraints
Working with a group of constraints
Details: Working with a group of constraints
Working with constraints that are in check pending status
Displaying records that put a constraint in check pending status
Processing constraints that are in check pending status
Unique constraints
Primary key constraints
Check constraints
Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
Adding referential constraints
Before you add referential constraints
Defining the parent file in a referential constraint
Defining the dependent file in a referential constraint
Specifying referential constraint rules
Details: Specifying referential constraint delete rules
Details: Specifying referential constraint update rules
Details: Specifying referential constraint rules—journaling requirements
Details: Adding referential constraints
Details: Avoiding constraint cycles
Verifying referential constraints
Enabling or disabling referential constraints
Removing referential constraints
Details: Removing a constraint with the CST parameter
Details: Removing a constraint with the TYPE parameter
Details: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
Example: Ensuring data integrity with referential constraints
Referential integrity terms
Referential integrity enforcement
Foreign key enforcement
Parent key enforcement
Enforcement of delete rules
Enforcement of update rules
Constraint states
Check pending status in referential constraints
Dependent file restrictions in check pending
Parent file restrictions in check pending
Referential integrity and CL commands
Triggering automatic events in your database
Uses for triggers
Benefits of using triggers in your business
Creating trigger programs
Adding triggers using iSeries Navigator
How trigger programs work
Other important information about working with trigger programs
Recommendations for trigger programs
Precautions to take when coding trigger programs
Functions to use with care in trigger programs
Commands, statements, and operations that you cannot use in trigger programs
Monitoring the use of trigger programs
Trigger and application programs that are under commitment control
Trigger and application programs that are not under commitment control
Trigger program error messages
Examples: Trigger programs
Example: Insert trigger written in RPG/400
Example: Update trigger written in ILE COBOL
Example: Delete trigger written in ILE C
Data structures for the example database files
Trigger buffer sections
Trigger buffer field descriptions
Adding triggers
Displaying triggers
Removing triggers
Enabling or disabling physical file triggers
Triggers and their relationship to CL commands
Triggers and their relationship to referential integrity
Database distribution
Double-byte character set considerations
DBCS field data types
DBCS field mapping considerations
DBCS field concatenation
DBCS field substring operations
Comparing DBCS fields in a logical file
Using DBCS fields in the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Using the wildcard function with DBCS fields
Comparing DBCS fields through the Open Query File (OPNQRYF) command
Using concatenation with DBCS fields
Using sort sequence with DBCS fields
Related information
Distributed database programming
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Introduction to distributed database programming
Distributed relational database processing
Remote unit of work
Distributed unit of work
Other distributed relational database terms and concepts
Distributed Relational Database Architecture support
DRDA and CDRA support
Application requester driver programs
Distributed relational database on i5/OS
Managing an i5/OS distributed relational database
Example: Spiffy Corporation distributed relational database
Spiffy organization and system profile
Business processes of the Spiffy Corporation Automobile Service
Distributed relational database administration for the Spiffy Corporation
Planning and design
Identifying your needs and expectations for a distributed relational database
Data needs for distributed relational databases
Distributed relational database capabilities
Goals and directions for a distributed relational database
Designing the application, network, and data for a distributed relational database
Tips: Designing distributed relational database applications
Network considerations for a distributed relational database
Data considerations for a distributed relational database
Developing a management strategy for a distributed relational database
General operations for a distributed relational database
Security considerations for a distributed relational database
Accounting for a distributed relational database
Problem analysis for a distributed relational database
Backup and recovery for a distributed relational database
Initial setup
i5/OS work management
Setting up your work management environment for DRDA
APPC subsystems
TCP/IP subsystems
User databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
Using the relational database directory
Working with the relational database directory
Adding an entry for SNA usage
Adding an entry for TCP/IP usage
Specifying a relational database alias name
Adding an entry for an application requester driver
Using the WRKRDBDIRE command
The *LOCAL directory entry
Directory entries for user databases on independent auxiliary storage pools
Example: Setting up a relational database directory
Setting up DRDA security
Setting up the TCP/IP server for DRDA
Setting up SQL packages for interactive SQL
Setting up DDM files
Loading data into tables in a distributed relational database
Loading new data into the tables of a distributed relational database
Loading data into a table using SQL
Manipulating data in tables and files using the i5/OS query management function
Entering data, update tables, and make inquiries using data file utility
Moving data from one system to another
Creating a user-written application program
Querying a database using interactive SQL
Querying remote systems using DB2 UDB for iSeries query management function
Copying files to and from tape
Moving data between systems using copy file commands
Transferring data over network using network file commands
Moving a table using object save and restore commands
Moving a database to i5/OS from a system other than i5/OS
Moving data from another IBM system
Moving data from a non-IBM system
Security
Elements of distributed relational database security
Elements of security in an APPC network
APPN configuration lists
Conversation level security
DRDA application server security in an APPC network
Elements of security in a TCP/IP network
Application requester security in a TCP/IP network
Application server security in a TCP/IP network
Connection security protocols for DDM and DRDA
Secure Sockets Layer for DDM and DRDA
Required programs
i5/OS requirements
Internet Protocol Security Architecture for DDM and DRDA
Considerations for certain passwords being sent as clear text
Ports and port restrictions for DDM and DRDA
DRDA server access control exit programs
Example: DRDA server access control exit program
Object-related security for DRDA
Authority to distributed relational database objects
Programs that run under adopted authority for a distributed relational database
Protection strategies in a distributed relational database
Application development
Programming considerations for a distributed relational database application
Naming of distributed relational database objects
System (*SYS) naming convention
SQL (*SQL) naming convention
Default collection name
Connecting to a distributed relational database
Remote unit of work
Activation group states
Connectable and connected state
Unconnectable and connected state
Connectable and unconnected state
Distributed unit of work
Activation group states
Initial state of an activation group
Connection states
Activation group connection states
When a connection is ended
Run with both RUW and DUW connection management
Implicit connection management for the default activation group
Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
Explicit connection management
SQL specific to distributed relational database and SQL CALL
Distributed relational database statements
SQL CALL statement (stored procedures)
DB2 Universal Database for iSeries CALL considerations
DB2 Universal Database for iSeries coexistence
Ending DRDA units of work
Stored procedures, user-defined functions, and commitment control
Coded character set identifier
i5/OS support
Other DRDA data conversion
DDM files and SQL
Preparing distributed relational database programs
Precompiling programs with SQL statements
Listing
Temporary source file member
SQL package creation
Precompiler commands
Compiling an application program
Binding an application
Testing and debugging
Program references
Working with SQL packages
Using the Create SQL Package (CRTSQLPKG) command
Managing an SQL package
Deleting an SQL package using the Delete SQL Package (DLTSQLPKG) command
Modifying package authorizations
Using the SQL DROP PACKAGE statement
Administration
Monitoring relational database activity
Working with jobs in a distributed relational database
Working with user jobs in a distributed relational database
Working with active jobs in a distributed relational database
Working with commitment definitions in a distributed relational database
Tracking request information with the job log of a distributed relational database
Locating distributed relational database jobs
Operating remote systems
Controlling DDM conversations
Reclaiming DDM resources
Displaying objects used by programs
Example: Displaying program reference
Dropping a collection from a distributed relational database
Job accounting in a distributed relational database
Managing the TCP/IP server
DRDA TCP/IP server terminology
TCP/IP communication support concepts for DDM
Establishing a DRDA or DDM connection over TCP/IP
DRDA and DDM listener program
Start TCP/IP Server (STRTCPSVR) CL command
DDM listener restriction
Examples: Starting TCP/IP Server
End TCP/IP Server (ENDTCPSVR) CL command
End TCP/IP server restrictions
Example: Ending TCP/IP server
Starting DDM listener in iSeries Navigator
DRDA and DDM server jobs
Subsystem descriptions and prestart job entries with DDM
DRDA and DDM prestart jobs
Monitoring prestart jobs
Managing prestart jobs
Removing prestart job entries
Routing entries
Configuring the DDM server job subsystem
Identifying server jobs
i5/OS job names
Displaying server jobs
Displaying active jobs using the WRKACTJOB command
Displaying active user jobs using the WRKUSRJOB command
Displaying the history log
Auditing the relational database directory
Data availability and protection
Recovery support for a distributed relational database
Data recovery after disk failures for distributed relational databases
Auxiliary storage pools
Checksum protection in a distributed relational database
Mirrored protection for a distributed relational database
Journal management for distributed relational databases
Index recovery
Designing tables to reduce index rebuilding time
System-managed access-path protection
Transaction recovery through commitment control
Save and restore processing for a distributed relational database
Saving and restoring indexes in the distributed relational database environment
Saving and restoring security information in the distributed relational database environment
Saving and restoring SQL packages in the distributed relational database environment
Saving and restoring relational database directories
Network redundancy considerations for a distributed relational database
Data redundancy in your distributed relational database network
Performance
Improving distributed relational database performance through the network
Improving distributed relational database performance through the system
Improving distributed relational database performance through the database
Deciding DRDA data location
Factors that affect blocking for DRDA
DB2 UDB for iSeries to DB2 UDB for iSeries blocking
DB2 UDB for iSeries to non-DB2 UDB for iSeries blocking
Non-DB2 UDB for iSeries to DB2 UDB for iSeries blocking
Summarization of DRDA blocking rules
Factors that affect the size of DRDA query blocks
Troubleshooting
i5/OS problem handling overview
Isolating distributed relational database problems
DRDA incorrect output problems
Application does not complete in the expected time
Working with distributed relational database users
Copy screen
Messages
Message types
Distributed relational database messages
Handling program start request failures for APPC
Handling connection request failures for TCP/IP
Server is not started or the port ID is not valid
DRDA connection authorization failure
System not available
Connection failures specific to interactive SQL
Not enough prestart jobs at server
Application problems
Listings
Precompiler listing
CRTSQLPKG listing
SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
Distributed relational database SQLCODEs and SQLSTATEs
System and communications problems
Getting data to report a failure
Printing a job log
Finding job logs from TCP/IP server prestart jobs
Printing the product activity log
Job tracing
Trace job
Start trace
Communications trace
Standard communications trace
Finding your line, controller, and device descriptions
TCP/IP communications trace
TCP/IP communication trace formatting
Finding first-failure data capture data
Starting a service job to diagnose application server problems
Service jobs for APPC servers
Creating your own transaction program name and setting QCNTSRVC
Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 UDB for iSeries application requester
Creating your own transaction program name for debugging a DB2 UDB for iSeries application server job
Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 UDB for VM application requester
Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 UDB for z/OS application requester
Setting QCNTSRVC as a transaction program name on a DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows application requester
Service jobs for TCP/IP servers
QRWOPTIONS data area
Example: CL command to create the data area
Examples: Application programming
Example: Program definitions
Example: RPG program
Example: COBOL program
Example: C program using embedded SQL
Example: Java program
Example: Program output
User FAQs
Connecting to a distributed relational database
i5/OS system value QCCSID
CCSID conversion considerations for DB2 UDB for z/OS and DB2 UDB server for VM database managers
Why am I getting an SQL5048N message when I attempt to connect from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows?
Do i5/OS files have to be journaled?
When will query data be blocked for better performance?
How do you interpret an SQLCODE and the associated tokens reported in an SQL0969N error message?
How can the host variable type in WHERE clauses affect performance?
Can I use a library list for resolving unqualified table and view names?
Can a DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows user specify that the NLSS sort sequence table of the DRDA job on i5/OS be used instead of the usual EBCDIC sequence?
Why are no rows returned when I perform a query?
What level of DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows is required to interact with DB2 for iSeries?
How can I get scrollable cursor support enabled from DB2 for Linux, UNIX, and Windows to the System i platform?
Other tips for interoperating in unlike environments
Interpreting trace job and first-failure data capture data
Interpreting data entries for the RW component of trace job
Example: Analyzing the RW trace data
Description of RW trace points
RWff RC—Receive Data Stream Trace Point
RWff SN—Send Data Stream Trace Point
RWQY S1—Partial Send Data Stream Trace Point 1
RWQY S2—Partial Send Data Stream Trace Point 2
RWQY BP—Successful Fetch Trace Point
RWQY NB—Unsuccessful Fetch Trace Point
RWQY P0—Result Set Pseudo-Open
RWQY AR—Array Result Set Processed
RWQY DA—Array Result Set SQLDA
RWQY DO—Debug Options
RWQY L1 and RWEX L1—Saved in Outbound LOB Table Trace Point
RWQY L2 and RWEX L2—Built in Datastream from LOB Table Trace Point
RWQY L0 and RWEX L0—Saved in Inbound LOB Table Trace Point
RWAC RQ—Access RDB Request Trace Point
RWAC cb—Access RDB Control Block Trace Points
RWSY FN: SYNCxxx [TYPE:x]—Source TCP SYNC/RESYNC Trace Point
RWSY xx: yyyyyyy...—Target TCP SYNC/RESYNC Trace Point
RW_ff_m—Application Requester Driver Control Block Trace Point
First-failure data capture
First-failure data capture dump
FFDC dump output description
DDM error codes
Command check codes
Conversational protocol error code descriptions
DDM syntax error code descriptions
Related information
System i information
Distributed relational database library
Other IBM distributed relational database platform libraries
Architecture books
IBM Redbooks
Embedded SQL programming
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Common concepts and rules for using embedded SQL
Writing applications that use SQL
Using host variables in SQL statements
Assignment rules for host variables in SQL statements
Rules for string assignment of host variables in SQL statements
Rules for CCSIDs of host variables in SQL statements
Rules for numeric assignment of host variables in SQL statements
Rules for date, time, and timestamp assignment of host variables in SQL statements
Indicator variables in applications that use SQL
Indicator variables used with host structures
Indicator variables used to set null values
Handling SQL error return codes using the SQLCA
Using the SQL diagnostics area
Updating applications to use the SQL diagnostics area
i5/OS programming model
Additional notes on using the SQL diagnostics area
Example: SQL routine exception
Example: Logging items from the SQL diagnostics area
Handling exception conditions with the WHENEVER statement
Coding SQL statements in C and C++ applications
Defining the SQL communications area in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Defining SQL descriptor areas in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Embedding SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Comments in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Continuation for SQL statements in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Including code in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Margins in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Names in C and C++ applications that use SQL
NULLs and NULs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Statement labels in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Preprocessor sequence for C and C++ applications that use SQL
Trigraphs in C and C++ applications that use SQL
WHENEVER statement in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Using host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Declaring host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Numeric host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Character host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Graphic host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Binary host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
LOB host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
ROWID host variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Using host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Host structure declarations in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Host structure indicator array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Using arrays of host structures in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Host structure array in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Host structure array indicator structure in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Using pointer data types in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Using typedef in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Using ILE C compiler external file descriptions in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Determining equivalent SQL and C or C++ data types
Notes on C and C++ variable declaration and usage
Using indicator variables in C and C++ applications that use SQL
Coding SQL statements in COBOL applications
Defining the SQL communication area in COBOL applications that use SQL
Defining SQL descriptor areas in COBOL applications that use SQL
Embedding SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
Comments in COBOL applications that use SQL
Continuation for SQL statements in COBOL applications that use SQL
Including code in COBOL applications that use SQL
Margins in COBOL applications that use SQL
Sequence numbers in COBOL applications that use SQL
Names in COBOL applications that use SQL
COBOL compile-time options in COBOL applications that use SQL
Statement labels in COBOL applications that use SQL
WHENEVER statement in COBOL applications that use SQL
Multiple source COBOL programs and the SQL COBOL precompiler
Using host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Declaring host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Numeric host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Floating-point host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Character host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Graphic host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Binary host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
LOB host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Datetime host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
ROWID host variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Using host structures in COBOL applications that use SQL
Host structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
Host structure indicator array in COBOL applications that use SQL
Using host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
Host structure array in COBOL applications that use SQL
Host array indicator structure in COBOL applications that use SQL
Using external file descriptions in COBOL applications that use SQL
Using external file descriptions for host structure arrays in COBOL applications that use SQL
Determining equivalent SQL and COBOL data types
Notes on COBOL variable declaration and usage
Using indicator variables in COBOL applications that use SQL
Coding SQL statements in PL/I applications
Defining the SQL communications area in PL/I applications that use SQL
Defining SQL descriptor areas in PL/I applications that use SQL
Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
Example: Embedding SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
Comments in PL/I applications that use SQL
Continuation for SQL statements in PL/I applications that use SQL
Including code in PL/I applications that use SQL
Margins in PL/I applications that use SQL
Names in PL/I applications that use SQL
Statement labels in PL/I applications that use SQL
WHENEVER statement in PL/I applications that use SQL
Using host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
Declaring host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
Numeric-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
Character-host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
Binary host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
LOB host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
ROWID host variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
Using host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
Host structures in PL/I applications that use SQL
Host structure indicator arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
Using host structure arrays in PL/I applications that use SQL
Host structure array in PL/I applications that use SQL
Host structure array indicator in PL/I applications that use SQL
Using external file descriptions in PL/I applications that use SQL
Determining equivalent SQL and PL/I data types
Using indicator variables in PL/I applications that use SQL
Differences in PL/I because of structure parameter passing techniques
Coding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications
Defining the SQL communications area in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Defining SQL descriptor areas in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Example: Embedding SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Comments in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Continuation for SQL statements in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Including code in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Sequence numbers in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Names in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Statement labels in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
WHENEVER statement in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Using host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Declaring host variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Using host structures in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Using host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Using external file descriptions in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
External file description considerations for host structure arrays in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Determining equivalent SQL and RPG/400 data types
Assignment rules in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Example: Using indicator variables in RPG/400 applications that use SQL
Differences in RPG/400 because of structure parameter passing techniques
Correctly ending a called RPG/400 program that uses SQL
Coding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications
Defining the SQL communication area in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Defining SQL descriptor areas in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Embedding SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Comments in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Continuation for SQL statements in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Including code in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Using directives in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Sequence numbers in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Names in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Statement labels in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
WHENEVER statement in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Using host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Declaring host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Declaring binary host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Declaring LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
LOB host variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
LOB locators in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
LOB file reference variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Declaring ROWID variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Using host structures in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Using host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Using external file descriptions in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
External file description considerations for host structure arrays in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Determining equivalent SQL and ILE RPG data types
Notes on ILE RPG variable declaration and usage
Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Example: Using indicator variables in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Example: SQLDA for a multiple row-area fetch in ILE RPG applications that use SQL
Example: Dynamic SQL in an ILE RPG application that uses SQL
Coding SQL statements in REXX applications
Using the SQL communication area in REXX applications
Using SQL descriptor areas in REXX applications
Embedding SQL statements in REXX applications
Comments in REXX applications that use SQL
Continuation of SQL statements in REXX applications that use SQL
Including code in REXX applications that use SQL
Margins in REXX applications that use SQL
Names in REXX applications that use SQL
Nulls in REXX applications that use SQL
Statement labels in REXX applications that use SQL
Handling errors and warnings in REXX applications that use SQL
Using host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
Determining data types of input host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
The format of output host variables in REXX applications that use SQL
Avoiding REXX conversion in REXX applications that use SQL
Using indicator variables in REXX applications that use SQL
Preparing and running a program with SQL statements
Basic processes of the SQL precompiler
Input to the SQL precompiler
Source file CCSIDs in the SQL precompiler
Output from the SQL precompiler
Listing
Temporary source file members created by the SQL precompiler
Sample SQL precompiler output
Non-ILE SQL precompiler commands
Compiling a non-ILE application program that uses SQL
ILE SQL precompiler commands
Compiling an ILE application program that uses SQL
Setting compiler options using the precompiler commands
Interpreting compile errors in applications that use SQL
Error and warning messages during a compile of application programs that use SQL
Error and warning messages during a PL/I, C, or C++ compile
Error and warning messages during a COBOL compile
Error and warning messages during a RPG compile
Binding an application that uses SQL
Program references in applications that use SQL
Displaying SQL precompiler options
Running a program with embedded SQL
Running a program with embedded SQL: i5/OS DDM considerations
Running a program with embedded SQL: Override considerations
Running a program with embedded SQL: SQL return codes
Example programs: Using DB2 UDB for iSeries statements
Example: SQL statements in ILE C and C++ programs
Example: SQL statements in COBOL and ILE COBOL programs
Example: SQL statements in PL/I programs
Example: SQL statements in RPG/400 programs
Example: SQL statements in ILE RPG programs
Example: SQL statements in REXX programs
Report produced by example programs that use SQL
CL command descriptions for host language precompilers
CRTSQLCBL (Create Structured Query Language COBOL) command
CRTSQLCBLI (Create SQL ILE COBOL Object) command
CRTSQLCI (Create Structured Query Language ILE C Object) command
CRTSQLCPPI (Create Structured Query Language C++ Object) command
CRTSQLPLI (Create Structured Query Language PL/I) command
CRTSQLRPG (Create Structured Query Language RPG) command
Related information
SQL programming
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Introduction to DB2 UDB for iSeries Structured Query Language
SQL concepts
SQL relational database and system terminology
SQL and system naming conventions
Types of SQL statements
SQL communication area
SQL diagnostics area
SQL objects
Schemas
Journals and journal receivers
Catalogs
Tables, rows, and columns
Aliases
Views
Indexes
Constraints
Triggers
Stored procedures
Sequences
User-defined functions
User-defined types
SQL packages
Application program objects
User source file member
Output source file member
Program
SQL package
Module
Service program
Data definition language
Creating a schema
Creating a table
Adding and removing constraints
Referential integrity and tables
Adding and removing referential constraints
Example: Adding referential constraints
Example: Removing constraints
Check pending
Creating a table using LIKE
Creating a table using AS
Creating and altering a materialized query table
Declaring a global temporary table
Creating and altering an identity column
Using ROWID
Creating and using sequences
Comparison of identity columns and sequences
Creating descriptive labels using the LABEL ON statement
Describing an SQL object using COMMENT ON
Changing a table definition
Adding a column
Changing a column
Allowable conversions of data types
Deleting a column
Order of operations for the ALTER TABLE statement
Creating and using ALIAS names
Creating and using views
WITH CHECK OPTION on a view
WITH CASCADED CHECK OPTION
WITH LOCAL CHECK OPTION
Example: Cascaded check option
Creating indexes
Catalogs in database design
Getting catalog information about a table
Getting catalog information about a column
Dropping a database object
Data manipulation language
Retrieving data using the SELECT statement
Basic SELECT statement
Specifying a search condition using the WHERE clause
Expressions in the WHERE clause
Comparison operators
NOT keyword
GROUP BY clause
HAVING clause
ORDER BY clause
Static SELECT statements
Handling null values
Special registers in SQL statements
Casting data types
Date, time, and timestamp data types
Specifying current date and time values
Date/time arithmetic
Handling duplicate rows
Defining complex search conditions
Special considerations for LIKE
Multiple search conditions within a WHERE clause
Using OLAP specifications
Joining data from more than one table
Inner join
Inner join using the JOIN syntax
Inner join using the WHERE clause
Joining data with the USING clause
Left outer join
Right outer join
Exception join
Cross join
Simulating a full outer join
Multiple join types in one statement
Using table expressions
Using recursive queries
Using the UNION keyword to combine subselects
Specifying the UNION ALL keyword
Using the EXCEPT keyword
Using the INTERSECT keyword
Data retrieval errors
Inserting rows using the INSERT statement
Inserting rows using the VALUES clause
Inserting rows using a select-statement
Inserting multiple rows using the blocked INSERT statement
Inserting data into tables with referential constraints
Inserting values into an identity column
Changing data in a table using the UPDATE statement
Updating a table using a scalar-subselect
Updating a table with rows from another table
Updating tables with referential constraints
Examples: UPDATE rules
Updating an identity column
Updating data as it is retrieved from a table
Removing rows from a table using the DELETE statement
Removing rows from tables with referential constraints
Example: DELETE rules
Using subqueries
Subqueries in SELECT statements
Subqueries and search conditions
Usage notes on subqueries
Including subqueries in the WHERE or HAVING clause
Correlated subqueries
Correlated names and references
Example: Correlated subquery in a WHERE clause
Example: Correlated subquery in a HAVING clause
Example: Correlated subquery in a select-list
Example: Correlated subquery in an UPDATE statement
Example: Correlated subquery in a DELETE statement
Sort sequences and normalization in SQL
Sort sequence used with ORDER BY and row selection
Sort sequence and ORDER BY
Sort sequence and row selection
Sort sequence and views
Sort sequence and the CREATE INDEX statement
Sort sequence and constraints
ICU sort sequence
Normalization
Data protection
Security for SQL objects
Authorization ID
Views
Auditing
Data integrity
Concurrency
Journaling
Commitment control
Savepoints
Atomic operations
Constraints
Adding and using check constraints
Save and restore functions
Damage tolerance
Index recovery
Catalog integrity
User auxiliary storage pool
Independent auxiliary storage pool
Routines
Stored procedures
Defining an external procedure
Defining an SQL procedure
Calling a stored procedure
Using the CALL statement where procedure definition exists
Using the embedded CALL statement where no procedure definition exists
Using the embedded CALL statement with an SQLDA
Using the dynamic CALL statement where no CREATE PROCEDURE exists
Examples: CALL statements
Example 1: ILE C and PL/I procedures called from an ILE C program
Example 2: A REXX procedure called from an ILE C program
Returning result sets from stored procedures
Example 1: Calling a stored procedure that returns a single result set
Example 2: Calling a stored procedure that returns a result set from a nested procedure
Parameter passing conventions for stored procedures and user-defined functions
Indicator variables and stored procedures
Returning a completion status to the calling program
Using user-defined functions
UDF concepts
Writing UDFs as SQL functions
Example: SQL scalar UDFs
Example: SQL table UDFs
Writing UDFs as external functions
Registering UDFs
Example: Exponentiation
Example: String search
Example: BLOB string search
Example: String search over a user-defined type (UDT)
Example: AVG over a user-defined type (UDT)
Example: Counting
Example: Table function returning document IDs
Passing arguments from DB2 to external functions
Parameter style SQL
Parameter style DB2SQL
Parameter style GENERAL
Parameter style GENERAL WITH NULLS
Parameter style DB2GENERAL
Parameter style Java
Table function considerations
Error processing for UDFs
Threads considerations
Parallel processing
Fenced or unfenced considerations
Save and restore considerations
Examples: UDF code
Example: Square of a number UDF
Example: Counter
Example: Weather table function
Using UDFs in SQL statements
Using parameter markers or the NULL values as function arguments
Using qualified function references
Using unqualified function references
Summary of function references
Triggers
SQL triggers
BEFORE SQL triggers
AFTER SQL triggers
INSTEAD OF SQL triggers
Handlers in SQL triggers
SQL trigger transition tables
External triggers
Example: External triggers
Debugging an SQL routine
Improving performance of procedures and functions
Improving implementation of procedures and functions
Redesigning routines for performance
Processing special data types
Large objects
Large object data types
Large object locators
Example: Using a locator to work with a CLOB value
Example: LOBLOC.SQC in C
Example: LOBLOC.SQB in COBOL
Indicator variables and LOB locators
LOB file reference variables
Example: Extracting CLOB data to a file
Example: LOBFILE.SQC in C
Example: LOBFILE.SQB in COBOL
Example: Inserting data into a CLOB column
Displaying the layout of LOB columns
Journal entry layout of LOB columns
User-defined distinct types
Defining a UDT
Example: Money
Example: Resumé
Defining tables with UDTs
Example: Sales
Example: Application forms
Manipulating UDTs
Examples: Using UDTs
Example: Comparisons between UDTs and constants
Example: Casting between UDTs
Example: Comparisons involving UDTs
Example: Sourced UDFs involving UDTs
Example: Assignments involving UDTs
Example: Assignments in dynamic SQL
Example: Assignments involving different UDTs
Example: Using UDTs in UNION
Examples: Using UDTs, UDFs, and LOBs
Example: Defining the UDT and UDFs
Example: Using the LOB function to populate the database
Example: Using UDFs to query instances of UDTs
Example: Using LOB locators to manipulate UDT instances
Using DataLinks
Linking control levels in DataLinks
NO LINK CONTROL
FILE LINK CONTROL with FS permissions
FILE LINK CONTROL with DB permissions
Working with DataLinks
Using SQL in different environments
Using a cursor
Types of cursors
Examples: Using a cursor
Step 1: Defining the cursor
Step 2: Opening the cursor
Step 3: Specifying what to do when the end of data is reached
Step 4: Retrieving a row using a cursor
Step 5a: Updating the current row
Step 5b: Deleting the current row
Step 6: Closing the cursor
Using the multiple-row FETCH statement
Multiple-row FETCH using a host structure array
Multiple-row FETCH using a row storage area
Unit of work and open cursors
Dynamic SQL applications
Designing and running a dynamic SQL application
CCSID of dynamic SQL statements
Processing non-SELECT statements
Using the PREPARE and EXECUTE statements
Processing SELECT statements and using a descriptor
Fixed-list SELECT statements
Varying-list SELECT statements
SQL descriptor areas
SQLDA format
Example: A SELECT statement for allocating storage for SQLDA
Example: A SELECT statement using an allocated SQL descriptor
Parameter markers
Using dynamic SQL through client interfaces
Accessing data with Java
Accessing data with Domino
Accessing data with ODBC
Accessing data with i5/OS PASE
Accessing data with iSeries Access for Windows OLE DB Provider
Accessing data with Net.Data
Accessing data through a Linux partition
Accessing data using Distributed Relational Database Architecture (DRDA)
Using interactive SQL
Starting interactive SQL
Using the statement entry function
Prompting
Syntax checking
Statement processing mode
Subqueries
CREATE TABLE prompting
Entering DBCS data
Using the list selection function
Example: Using the list selection function
Session services description
Exiting interactive SQL
Using an existing SQL session
Recovering an SQL session
Accessing remote databases with interactive SQL
Using the SQL statement processor
Execution of statements after errors occur
Commitment control in the SQL statement processor
Source member listing for the SQL statement processor
Distributed relational database function and SQL
DB2 UDB for iSeries distributed relational database support
DB2 UDB for iSeries distributed relational database example program
SQL package support
Valid SQL statements in an SQL package
Considerations for creating an SQL package
CRTSQLPKG authorization
Creating a package on a database other than DB2 UDB for iSeries
Target release (TGTRLS) parameter
SQL statement size
Statements that do not require a package
Package object type
ILE programs and service programs
Package creation connection
Unit of work
Creating packages locally
Labels
Consistency token
SQL and recursion
CCSID considerations for SQL
Connection management and activation groups
Source code for PGM1
Source code for PGM2
Source code for PGM3
Multiple connections to the same relational database
Implicit connection management for the default activation group
Implicit connection management for nondefault activation groups
Distributed support
Determining the connection type
Connect and commitment control restrictions
Determining the connection status
Distributed unit of work connection considerations
Ending connections
Distributed unit of work
Managing distributed unit of work connections
Checking the connection status
Cursors and prepared statements
Application requester driver programs
Problem handling
DRDA stored procedure considerations
Reference
DB2 Universal Database for iSeries sample tables
Department table (DEPARTMENT)
DEPARTMENT
Employee table (EMPLOYEE)
EMPLOYEE
Employee photo table (EMP_PHOTO)
EMP_PHOTO
Employee resumé table (EMP_RESUME)
EMP_RESUME
Employee to project activity table (EMPPROJACT)
EMPPROJACT
Project table (PROJECT)
PROJECT
Project activity table (PROJACT)
PROJACT
Activity table (ACT)
ACT
Class schedule table (CL_SCHED)
CL_SCHED
In-tray table (IN_TRAY)
IN_TRAY
Organization table (ORG)
ORG
Staff table (STAFF)
STAFF
Sales table (SALES)
SALES
DB2 UDB for iSeries CL command descriptions
Reference
Database information finder
DB2 Multisystem
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
DB2 Multisystem overview
Benefits of using DB2 Multisystem
DB2 Multisystem: Basic terms and concepts
Node groups with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
How node groups work with DB2 Multisystem
Tasks to complete before using the node group commands with DB2 Multisystem
Create Node Group command
Display Node Group command
Change Node Group Attributes command
Delete Node Group command
Distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
Create Physical File command and SQL CREATE TABLE statement
Restrictions when creating or working with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
System activities after the distributed file is created
How CL commands work with distributed files
CL commands: Allowable to run against a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
CL commands: Affecting only local pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
CL commands: Affecting all the pieces of a distributed file with DB2 Multisystem
Journaling considerations with DB2 Multisystem
Copy File command with distributed files with DB2 Multisystem
Partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
Planning for partitioning with DB2 Multisystem
Choosing partitioning keys with DB2 Multisystem
Customizing data distribution with DB2 Multisystem
Partitioned tables
Creation of partitioned tables
Modification of existing tables
From a nonpartitioned table to a partitioned table
Modification of existing partitioned tables
Restrictions when altering a column's data type
From a partitioned table to a nonpartitioned table
Indexes with partitioned tables
Query performance and optimization
Queries using SQL Query Engine
Check constraint optimization
SQL Query Engine: Index usage
Queries using Classic Query Engine
Materialization
CQE query optimization considerations
Classic Query Engine: Index usage
Save and restore considerations
Journaling a partitioned table
Traditional system interface considerations
Restrictions for a partitioned table
Scalar functions available with DB2 Multisystem
PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
Examples of PARTITION with DB2 Multisystem
HASH with DB2 Multisystem
Example of HASH with DB2 Multisystem
NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
Examples of NODENAME with DB2 Multisystem
NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
Example of NODENUMBER with DB2 Multisystem
Special registers with DB2 Multisystem
Relative record numbering function with DB2 Multisystem
Performance and scalability with DB2 Multisystem
Why you should use DB2 Multisystem
Performance enhancement tip with DB2 Multisystem
How DB2 Multisystem helps you expand your database system
Redistribution issues for adding systems to a network
Query design for performance with DB2 Multisystem
Optimization with DB2 Multisystem: Overview
Implementation and optimization of a single file query with DB2 Multisystem
Implementation and optimization of record ordering with DB2 Multisystem
Implementation and optimization of the UNION and DISTINCT clauses with DB2 Multisystem
Processing of the DSTDTA and ALWCPYDTA parameters with DB2 Multisystem
Implementation and optimization of join operations with DB2 Multisystem
Collocated join with DB2 Multisystem
Directed join with DB2 Multisystem
Repartitioned join with DB2 Multisystem
Broadcast join with DB2 Multisystem
Join optimization with DB2 Multisystem
Partitioning keys over join fields with DB2 Multisystem
Implementation and optimization of grouping with DB2 Multisystem
One-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
Two-step grouping with DB2 Multisystem
Grouping and joins with DB2 Multisystem
Subquery support with DB2 Multisystem
Access plans with DB2 Multisystem
Reusable open data paths with DB2 Multisystem
Temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
Temporary result writer job: Advantages with DB2 Multisystem
Temporary result writer job: Disadvantages with DB2 Multisystem
Control of the temporary result writer with DB2 Multisystem
Optimizer messages with DB2 Multisystem
Changes to the Change Query Attributes command with DB2 Multisystem
Asynchronous job usage parameter with DB2 Multisystem
Apply remote parameter with DB2 Multisystem
Summary of performance considerations
Related information
DB2 Web Query
Printable PDFs
Introducing IBM DB2 Web Query for System i
Using the Reporting Interface
Using Power Painter
Creating a Report With Report Assistant
Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
Creating a Graph With Graph Assistant
Visualizing Trends in Reports
Using the DB2 Web Query Viewer
Understanding User Interface Basics
Creating a Reporting Procedure With SQL Report Wizard
Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Layout Painter
Describing and Accessing Data: Overview
Using the Synonym Editor
Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
Running Web Query Reports Using the Java Batch Run Utility
Distributed data management
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Introduction to i5/OS DDM
System compatibility
Overview of DDM functions
Basic DDM concepts
Parts of DDM
Parts of DDM: Source DDM
Parts of DDM: Target DDM
Parts of DDM: DDM file
Create a DDM file using SNA
Create a DDM file using TCP/IP
Create a DDM file using RDB directory entry information
Effect of job description on ASP group selection
Example: Use the basic concepts of DDM in an APPC network
Example: Use the basic concepts of DDM in an APPN network
Additional DDM concepts
iSeries server as the source server for DDM
Integrated Language Environment and DDM
Source server actions dependent on type of target server
iSeries server as the target server for DDM
DDM-related jobs and DDM conversations
Examples: Access multiple remote files with DDM
Example: Access files on multiple servers with DDM
Example: Process multiple requests for remote files with DDM
Use language, utility, and application support for DDM
Programming language considerations for DDM
DDM considerations for all languages
HLL program input and output operations with i5/OS DDM
Commitment control support for DDM
Use DDM files with commitment control
ILE RPG considerations for DDM
ILE COBOL considerations for DDM
Direct file support with ILE COBOL
BASIC considerations for DDM
PL/I considerations for DDM
CL command considerations for DDM
ILE C considerations for DDM
Utility considerations for DDM
System/38-compatible database tools
System/38-compatible data file utility (DFU/38)
System/38-compatible query utility (Query/38)
Non-iSeries or non-System/38 Query/38 example
Query/38 output considerations for DDM
Query/38 command considerations for DDM
Query/38 optimization for DDM
Existing Query/38 application considerations for DDM
Data file utility for iSeries server
i5/OS database query
Multiple remote files
Sort utility
iSeries Access Family considerations for DDM
iSeries Access Family transfer function considerations
iSeries Access Family copy command considerations
Hierarchical file system API support for DDM
Prepare to use DDM
Communications requirements for DDM in an APPC network
Configure a communications network in a TCP/IP network
Security requirements for DDM
DDM file requirements
Program modification requirements for DDM
DDM architecture-related restrictions
iSeries source and target restrictions and considerations for DDM
Non-iSeries target restrictions and considerations for DDM
Security
Elements of distributed relational database security
Elements of security in an APPC network
APPN configuration lists
Conversation level security
DRDA application server security in an APPC network
Elements of security in a TCP/IP network
Application requester security in a TCP/IP network
Application server security in a TCP/IP network
Connection security protocols for DDM or DRDA
Secure Sockets Layer for DDM and DRDA
Required programs
iSeries server requirements
Internet Protocol Security Protocol for DDM/DRDA
Considerations for certain passwords being passed as clear text
Ports and port restrictions for DDM/DRDA
DDM server access control exit program for additional security
User exit program requirement
User exit program parameter list for DDM
User exit program example for DDM
Parameter list example for DDM
DRDA server access control exit programs with example
User exit program considerations for DDM
Use CL and DDS with DDM
DDM-specific CL commands
CHGDDMF (Change DDM File) command
Example: CHGDDMF command
CRTDDMF (Create DDM File) command
Examples: CRTDDMF command
DSPDDMF (Display DDM Files) command
RCLDDMCNV (Reclaim DDM Conversations) command
SBMRMTCMD (Submit Remote Command) command
iSeries and System/38 target systems on the SBMRMTCMD command
Restrictions for the SBMRMTCMD command
Examples: SBMRMTCMD command
Additional considerations: SBMRMTCMD command
WRKDDMF (Work with DDM Files) command
DDM-related CL command considerations
File management handling of DDM files
ALCOBJ (Allocate Object) command
Member names and iSeries target servers on the ALCOBJ command
Lock multiple DDM files with the ALCOBJ command
ALCOBJ command completion time with DDM
CHGJOB (Change Job) command
CHGLF (Change Logical File) command
CHGPF (Change Physical File) command
CHGSRCPF (Change Source Physical File) command
CLRPFM (Clear Physical File Member) command
Copy commands with DDM
CRTDTAARA (Create Data Area) command
CRTDTAQ (Create Data Queue) command
CRTLF (Create Logical File) command
CRTPF (Create Physical File) command
CRTSRCPF (Create Source Physical File) command
DLCOBJ (Deallocate Object) command
Member names and iSeries target servers on the DLCOBJ command
Unlock multiple DDM files on the DLCOBJ command
DLTF (Delete File) command
DSPFD (Display File Description) command
DSPFFD (Display File Field Description) command
OPNQRYF (Open Query File) command
OVRDBF (Override with Database File) command
RCLRSC (Reclaim Resources) command
RNMOBJ (Rename Object) command
WRKJOB (Work with Job) command
WRKOBJLCK (Work with Object Lock) command
DDM-related CL parameter considerations
DDMACC parameter considerations
DDMCNV parameter considerations
OUTFILE parameter considerations for DDM
DDM-related CL command lists
Object-oriented commands with DDM
Target iSeries-required file management commands
Member-related commands with DDM
Commands not supporting DDM
Source file commands
DDM-related CL command summary charts
Data description specifications considerations for DDM
iSeries target considerations for DDM
Non-iSeries target considerations for DDM
DDM-related DDS keywords and information
DDM user profile authority
Operating considerations for DDM
Access files with DDM
Types of files supported by i5/OS DDM
Existence of DDM file and remote file
Rules for specifying target server file names for DDM
Target iSeries file names for DDM
Target non-iSeries file names for DDM
Use location-specific file names for commonly named files for DDM
Examples: Access iSeries DDM remote files (iSeries-to-iSeries)
Example: Access System/36 DDM remote files (iSeries-to-System/36)
Access members with DDM
Example: Access DDM remote members (iSeries server only)
Example: DDM file that opens a specific member
Work with access methods for DDM
Access intents
Key field updates
Deleted records
Blocked record processing
Variable-length records
Other DDM-related functions involving remote files
Perform file management functions on remote servers
Lock files and members for DDM
Allocate Object (ALCOBJ) and Deallocate Object (DLCOBJ) commands
Work with Job (WRKJOB) and Work with Object Locks (WRKOBJLCK) commands
Control DDM conversations
Display DDMCNV values (WRKJOB command)
Change DDMCNV values (CHGJOB) command
Reclaim DDM resources (RCLRSC and RCLDDMCNV commands)
Display DDM remote file information
Display DDM remote file records
Coded character set identifier with DDM
Use of object distribution
Use of object distribution with DDM
Manage the TCP/IP server
DDM terminology
TCP/IP communication support concepts for DDM
Establish a DRDA or DDM connection over TCP/IP
DDM listener program
Start TCP/IP Server (STRTCPSVR) CL command
End TCP/IP Server (ENDTCPSVR) CL command
Start DDM listener in iSeries Navigator
DDM server jobs
Subsystem descriptions and prestart job entries with DDM
DDM prestart jobs
Monitor prestart jobs
Manage prestart jobs
Remove prestart job entries
Routing entries
Configure the DDM server job subsystem
Identify server jobs
iSeries job names
Display server jobs
Display the history log
Cancel distributed data management work
End Job (ENDJOB) command
End Request (ENDRQS) command
Performance considerations for DDM
Batch file processing with DDM
Interactive file processing with DDM
DDM conversation length considerations
DDM problem analysis on the remote server
Handle connection request failures for TCP/IP
DDM server is not started or the port ID is not valid
DDM connection authorization failure
DDM server not available
Not enough prestart jobs at server
System/36 source and target considerations for DDM
DDM-related differences between iSeries and System/36 files
System/36 source to iSeries target considerations for DDM
iSeries source to System/36 target considerations for DDM
Override considerations to System/36 for DDM
Personal computer source to iSeries target considerations for DDM
Examples: Code DDM-related tasks
Communications setup for DDM examples and tasks
DDM example 1: Simple inquiry application
DDM example 2: ORDERENT application
DDM example 2: Central server ORDERENT files
DDM example 2: Description of ORDERENT program
DDM example 2: Remote server ORDERENT files
DDM example 2: Transfer a program to a target server
DDM example 2: Pass-through method
DDM example 2: SBMRMTCMD command method
DDM example 2: Copy a file
DDM example 3: Access multiple iSeries files
DDM example 4: Access a file on System/36
DDM architecture code point attributes
DDM commands and parameters
Subsets of DDM architecture supported by i5/OS DDM
Supported DDM file models
Alternate Index File (ALTINDF)
Direct file (DIRFIL)
Directory file (DIRECTORY)
Keyed file (KEYFIL)
Sequential file (SEQFIL)
Stream file (STRFIL)
Supported DDM access methods
DDM commands and objects
CHGCD (Change Current Directory) Level 2.0
CHGEOF (Change End of File) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
CHGFAT (Change File Attribute) Level 2.0
CLOSE (Close File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
CLRFIL (Clear File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
CLSDRC (Close Directory) Level 2.0
CPYFIL (Copy File) Level 2.0
CRTAIF (Create Alternate Index File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
CRTDIRF (Create Direct File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
CRTDRC (Create Directory) Level 2.0
CRTKEYF (Create Keyed File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
CRTSEQF (Create Sequential File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
CRTSTRF (Create Stream File) Level 2.0
DCLFIL (Declare File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
DELDCL (Delete Declared Name) Level 1.0
DELDRC (Delete Directory) Level 2.0
DELFIL (Delete File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
DELREC (Delete Record) Level 1.0
EXCSAT (Exchange Server Attributes) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
FILAL and FILATTRL (File Attribute List) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
FRCBFF (Force Buffer) Level 2.0
GETDRCEN (Get Directory Entries) Level 2.0
GETREC (Get Record at Cursor) Level 1.0
GETSTR (Get Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
INSRECEF (Insert at EOF) Level 1.0
INSRECKY (Insert Record by Key Value) Level 1.0
INSRECNB (Insert Record at Number) Level 1.0
LCKFIL (Lock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
LCKSTR (Lock Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
LODRECF (Load Record File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
LODSTRF (Load Stream File) Level 2.0
LSTFAT (List File Attributes) Level 1.0, Level 2.0, and Level 3.0
MODREC (Modify Record with Update Intent) Level 1.0
OPEN (Open File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
OPNDRC (Open Directory) Level 2.0
PUTSTR (Put Substream) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
QRYCD (Query Current Directory) Level 2.0
QRYSPC (Query Space) Level 2.0
RNMDRC (Rename Directory) Level 2.0
RNMFIL (Rename File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
SBMSYSCMD (Submit server Command) Level 4.0
SETBOF (Set Cursor to Beginning of File) Level 1.0
SETEOF (Set Cursor to End of File) Level 1.0
SETFRS (Set Cursor to First Record) Level 1.0
SETKEY (Set Cursor by Key) Level 1.0
SETKEYFR (Set Cursor to First Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
SETKEYLM (Set Key Limits) Level 1.0
SETKEYLS (Set Cursor to Last Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
SETKEYNX (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
SETKEYPR (Set Cursor to Previous Record in Key Sequence) Level 1.0
SETLST (Set Cursor to Last Record) Level 1.0
SETMNS (Set Cursor Minus) Level 1.0
SETNBR (Set Cursor to Record Number) Level 1.0
SETNXT (Set Cursor to Next Number) Level 1.0
SETNXTKE (Set Cursor to Next Record in Key Sequence with a Key Equal to Value Specified) Level 1.0
SETPLS (Set Cursor Plus) Level 1.0
SETPRV (Set Cursor to Previous Record) Level 1.0
SETUPDKY (Set Update Intent by Key Value) Level 1.0
SETUPDNB (Set Update Intent by Record Number) Level 1.0
ULDRECF (Unload Record File) Level 1.0
ULDSTRF (Unload Stream File) Level 2.0
UNLFIL (Unlock File) Level 1.0 and Level 2.0
UNLIMPLK (Unlock Implicit Record Lock) Level 1.0
UNLSTR (Unlock Substreams) Level 2.0 and Level 3.0
User profile authority
iSeries server-to-CICS considerations with DDM
iSeries languages, utilities, and licensed programs
CRTDDMF (Create DDM File) considerations
iSeries CL considerations
ALCOBJ (Allocate Object)
CLRPFM (Clear Physical File Member)
CPYF (Copy File)
CPYTOTAP, CPYFRMTAP and CPYSPLF commands
DLCOBJ (Deallocate Object)
DSPFD and DSPFFD commands
DSPPFM (Display Physical File Member)
OPNDBF (Open Database File)
OVRDBF (Override with Database File)
RCVNETF (Receive Network File)
Language considerations for iSeries server and CICS
PL/I considerations
PL/I open file requests
PL/I input/output requests
ILE COBOL considerations
ILE COBOL SELECT clause
ILE COBOL statements
ILE C considerations
ILE RPG considerations
File description specifications
ILE RPG input/output operations
Use DDM on the iSeries server versus other IBM systems
iSeries server and System/36 DDM differences
iSeries server and System/38 DDM differences
Related information
SQL call level interface
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Getting started with DB2 UDB CLI
Differences between DB2 UDB CLI and embedded SQL
Advantages of using DB2 UDB CLI instead of embedded SQL
Deciding between DB2 UDB CLI, dynamic SQL, and static SQL
Writing a DB2 UDB CLI application
Initialization and termination tasks in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Example: Initialization and connection in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Transaction processing task in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Allocating statement handles in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Preparing and processing tasks in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Processing results in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Processing SELECT statements in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Processing UPDATE, DELETE, and INSERT statements in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Processing other SQL statements in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Freeing statement handles in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Committing or rolling back in a DB2 UDB CLI application
When to call SQLTransact() in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Effects of calling SQLTransact() in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Diagnostics in a DB2 UDB CLI application
Return codes from a DB2 UDB CLI application
DB2 UDB CLI SQLSTATE values
Data types and data conversion in DB2 UDB CLI functions
Other C data types in DB2 UDB CLI functions
Data conversion in DB2 UDB CLI functions
Working with string arguments in DB2 UDB CLI functions
Length of string arguments in DB2 UDB CLI functions
String truncation in DB2 UDB CLI functions
Interpretation of strings in DB2 UDB CLI functions
DB2 UDB CLI functions
Categories of DB2 UDB CLIs
SQLAllocConnect - Allocate connection handle
SQLAllocEnv - Allocate environment handle
SQLAllocHandle - Allocate handle
SQLAllocStmt - Allocate a statement handle
SQLBindCol - Bind a column to an application variable
SQLBindFileToCol - Bind LOB file reference to LOB column
SQLBindFileToParam - Bind LOB file reference to LOB parameter
SQLBindParam - Bind a buffer to a parameter marker
SQLBindParameter - Bind a parameter marker to a buffer
SQLCancel - Cancel statement
SQLCloseCursor - Close cursor statement
SQLColAttributes - Obtain column attributes
SQLColumnPrivileges - Get privileges associated with the columns of a table
SQLColumns - Get column information for a table
SQLConnect - Connect to a data source
SQLCopyDesc - Copy description statement
SQLDataSources - Get list of data sources
SQLDescribeCol - Describe column attributes
SQLDescribeParam - Return description of a parameter marker
SQLDisconnect - Disconnect from a data source
SQLDriverConnect - (Expanded) Connect to a data source
SQLEndTran - Commit or roll back a transaction
SQLError - Retrieve error information
SQLExecDirect - Execute a statement directly
SQLExecute - Execute a statement
SQLExtendedFetch - Fetch array of rows
SQLFetch - Fetch next row
SQLFetchScroll - Fetch from a scrollable cursor
SQLForeignKeys - Get the list of foreign key columns
SQLFreeConnect - Free connection handle
SQLFreeEnv - Free environment handle
SQLFreeHandle - Free a handle
SQLFreeStmt - Free (or reset) a statement handle
SQLGetCol - Retrieve one column of a row of the result set
SQLGetConnectAttr - Get the value of a connection attribute
SQLGetConnectOption - Return current setting of a connect option
SQLGetCursorName - Get cursor name
SQLGetData - Get data from a column
SQLGetDescField - Get descriptor field
SQLGetDescRec - Get descriptor record
SQLGetDiagField - Return diagnostic information (extensible)
SQLGetDiagRec - Return diagnostic information (concise)
SQLGetEnvAttr - Return current setting of an environment attribute
SQLGetFunctions - Get functions
SQLGetInfo - Get general information
SQLGetLength - Retrieve length of a string value
SQLGetPosition - Return starting position of string
SQLGetStmtAttr - Get the value of a statement attribute
SQLGetStmtOption - Return current setting of a statement option
SQLGetSubString - Retrieve portion of a string value
SQLGetTypeInfo - Get data type information
SQLLanguages - Get SQL dialect or conformance information
SQLMoreResults - Determine whether there are more result sets
SQLNativeSql - Get native SQL text
SQLNextResult - Process the next result set
SQLNumParams - Get number of parameters in an SQL statement
SQLNumResultCols - Get number of result columns
SQLParamData - Get next parameter for which a data value is needed
SQLParamOptions - Specify an input array for a parameter
SQLPrepare - Prepare a statement
SQLPrimaryKeys - Get primary key columns of a table
SQLProcedureColumns - Get input/output parameter information for a procedure
SQLProcedures - Get list of procedure names
SQLPutData - Pass data value for a parameter
SQLReleaseEnv - Release all environment resources
SQLRowCount - Get row count
SQLSetConnectAttr - Set a connection attribute
SQLSetConnectOption - Set connection option
SQLSetCursorName - Set cursor name
SQLSetDescField - Set a descriptor field
SQLSetDescRec - Set a descriptor record
SQLSetEnvAttr - Set environment attribute
SQLSetParam - Set parameter
SQLSetStmtAttr - Set a statement attribute
SQLSetStmtOption - Set statement option
SQLSpecialColumns - Get special (row identifier) columns
SQLStatistics - Get index and statistics information for a base table
SQLTablePrivileges - Get privileges associated with a table
SQLTables - Get table information
SQLTransact - Commit or roll back transaction
DB2 UDB CLI include file
Running DB2 UDB CLI in server mode
Starting DB2 UDB CLI in SQL server mode
Restrictions for running DB2 UDB CLI in server mode
Examples: DB2 UDB CLI applications
Example: Embedded SQL and the equivalent DB2 UDB CLI function calls
Example: Using the CLI XA transaction connection attributes
Example: Interactive SQL and the equivalent DB2 UDB CLI function calls
SQL messages and codes
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
SQLCODE and SQLSTATE concepts
Listing of SQLSTATE class codes
Listing of SQLSTATE values
SQL message concepts
Listing of SQL messages
SQL message finder
SQL Reference
About DB2 for i5/OS SQL Reference
Standard compliance
Who should read the SQL Reference
How to use this book
Printable PDFs
What's new for V5R4
Concepts
Relational database
Structured Query Language
Schemas
Tables
Views
User-defined types
Aliases
Packages and access plans
Routines
Sequences
Authorization, privileges and object ownership
Catalog
Application processes, concurrency, and recovery
Threads
Isolation level
Storage structures
Character conversion
Sort sequence
Distributed relational database
Language elements
Characters
Tokens
Identifiers
Naming conventions
Aliases
Authorization IDs and authorization names
Data types
Promotion of data types
Casting between data types
Assignments and comparisons
Rules for result data types
Conversion rules for operators
Constants
Special registers
Column names
References to variables
Functions
Expressions
Datetime arithmatic
Predicates
Search conditions
Built-in functions
Aggregate functions
Scalar functions
Queries
Authorization
subselect
fullselect
select-statement
Statements
How SQL statements are invoked
SQL return codes
SQL comments
ALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
ALTER PROCEDURE (External)
ALTER PROCEDURE (SQL)
ALTER SEQUENCE
ALTER TABLE
BEGIN DECLARE SECTION
CALL
CLOSE
COMMENT
COMMIT
CONNECT (Type 1)
CONNECT (Type 2)
CREATE ALIAS
CREATE DISTINCT TYPE
CREATE FUNCTION
CREATE FUNCTION (External Scalar)
CREATE FUNCTION (External Table)
CREATE FUNCTION (Sourced)
CREATE FUNCTION (SQL Scalar)
CREATE FUNCTION (SQL Table)
CREATE INDEX
CREATE PROCEDURE
CREATE PROCEDURE (External)
CREATE PROCEDURE (SQL)
CREATE SCHEMA
CREATE SEQUENCE
CREATE TABLE
CREATE TRIGGER
CREATE VIEW
DEALLOCATE DESCRIPTOR
DECLARE CURSOR
DECLARE GLOBAL TEMPORARY TABLE
DECLARE PROCEDURE
DECLARE STATEMENT
DECLARE VARIABLE
DELETE
DESCRIBE
DESCRIBE INPUT
DESCRIBE TABLE
DISCONNECT
DROP
END DECLARE SECTION
EXECUTE
EXECUTE IMMEDIATE
FETCH
FREE LOCATOR
GET DESCRIPTOR
GET DIAGNOSTICS
GRANT (Distinct Type privileges)
GRANT (Function or Procedure privileges)
GRANT (Package privileges)
GRANT (Sequence privileges)
GRANT (Table or View privileges)
HOLD LOCATOR
INCLUDE
INSERT
LABEL
LOCK TABLE
OPEN
PREPARE
REFRESH TABLE
RELEASE (Connection)
RELEASE SAVEPOINT
RENAME
REVOKE (Distinct type privileges)
REVOKE (Function or Procedure privileges)
REVOKE (Package privileges)
REVOKE (Sequences privileges)
REVOKE (Table or View privileges)
ROLLBACK
SAVEPOINT
SELECT
SELECT INTO
SET CONNECTION
SET CURRENT DEBUG MODE
SET CURRENT DEGREE
SET DESCRIPTOR
SET ENCRYPTION PASSWORD
SET OPTION
SET PATH
SET RESULT SETS
SET SCHEMA
SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION
SET TRANSACTION
SET transition-variable
SET variable
SIGNAL
UPDATE
VALUES
VALUES INTO
WHENEVER
SQL control statements
References to SQL parameters and SQL variables
References to SQL condition names
References to SQL cursor names
Summary of 'name' scoping in nested compound statements
SQL- procedure-statement
assignment- statement
CALL statement
CASE statement
compound-statement
FOR statement
GET DIAGNOSTICS statement
GOTO statement
IF statement
ITERATE statement
LEAVE statement
LOOP statement
REPEAT statement
RESIGNAL statement
RETURN statement
SIGNAL statement
WHILE statement
SQL limits
Characteristics of SQL statements
Actions allowed on SQL statements
SQL statement data access indication in routines
Considerations for using distributed relational database
SQLCA (SQL communication area)
Field descriptions
INCLUDE SQLCA declarations
SQLDA (SQL descriptor area)
Field descriptions in an SQLDA header
Field description in an occurrence of SQLVAR
SQLTYPE and SQLLEN
CCSID values in SQLDATA or SQLNAME
Unrecognized and unsupported SQLTYPES
INCLUDE SQLDA declarations
CCSID values
DB2 for i5/OS catalog views
Notes about catalog views
i5/OS catalog tables and views
ODBC and JDBC catalog views
ANS and ISO catalog views
Terminology differences
Reserved schema names and reserved words
Reserved schema names
Reserved words
Related information
Troubleshooting
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Before you call service
System i database FAQ
Monitoring database file errors
Related information
e-business and Web serving
Application servers
WebSphere Application Server
WebSphere Application Server - Express V5.1
Print this topic
Overview
What is WebSphere Application Server - Express?
Overview of the architecture
What's new in Version 5.1
WebSphere Application Server - Express and other WebSphere Application Server products
Get support for WebSphere Application Server - Express
Other resources
Installation
Overview
Step 1: Plan the installation and initial configuration
Time considerations
Prerequisites
Obtain the WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries and current fixes
Verify that the correct cumulative PTF package is installed
Step 2: Install WebSphere Application Server
Determine whether or not WebSphere Application Server - Express is preinstalled
Install the correct cumulative PTF package
Install the WebSphere Express product
Install PTFs
Step 3: Create an initial configuration
Configure software license information
Configure TCP/IP
Step 4: Verify the installation
What's next?
Troubleshoot the installation and initial configuration
Uninstall WebSphere Application Server
Clean up product UserData files
Migration
Overview
The WASPreUpgrade script
The WASPostUpgrade script
Step 1: Plan your migration
Deprecated Version 5.1 items
Migration prerequisites
API and Specifications for version 3.5.x
Step 2: Migrate your applications
Application assembly in WebSphere Application Server - Express
Migrate Web applications
Migrate HTTP sessions
Migrate from wscp to wsadmin
Migrate applications to use Java keystores
Migrate Web services
Migrate Apache SOAP Web services to Web services for J2EE
Migrate applications developed with Version 5 technology preview
Migrate applications that use the XML parser for Java
Step 3: Migrate your server instances
Migrate from a WebSphere Application Server Version 3.5.6 (or later) instance
Migrate from a WebSphere Application Server - Express Version 5.0.x instance
Step 4: Complete the migration
Administration
Administrative considerations for preloaded systems
Create an application server instance
Delete an application server instance
Use the crtwasinst script
Use the dltwasinst script
Display instance properties
Enable a user profile to run an application server
List existing instances
Update the host name of an instance
Configure an HTTP server instance
Configure a Domino Web server instance
Start and test your application server
Use the startServer script
Use a CL command
Verify that the application server has started
Use the stopServer script
Use the serverStatus script
Configure the application server to run your application
Configure classloaders
Administer HTTP transports
Set custom properties for an HTTP transport
Configure logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
Configure access logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
Administer session tracking
Manage substitution variables
Use wsadmin to manage variables
Administer virtual hosts
Virtual hosts
Use the administrative console to administer virtual hosts
Use wsadmin to administer virtual hosts
Configure database access
Administer JDBC providers
The IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC driver
Administer data sources
Administer JDBC providers and data sources with the console
Use wsadmin to configure a JDBC provider
Use wsadmin to configure a data source
Configure connection pooling
Administer mail resources
Regenerate the Web server plug-in configuration
Use the console and wsadmin to update the configuration
Regenerate the plug-in configuration for remote HTTP
Configure remote HTTP
Configure the application server machine for remote HTTP
Configure security settings for your application server
Grant authority to an application server
Revoke authority to an application server
Encode password data
Encode passwords in properties files
Advanced application server settings
Change application server ports
Change application server ports with the console and wsadmin
Manage thread pool settings
Administer Java virtual machine settings
Configure name space bindings
Administer shared libraries
Administer resource adapters
Configure Web server plug-ins
Manually edit the plug-in configuration
The plugin-cfg.xml file
Sample plugin-cfg.xml file
Configure the server for other language environments
Set JVM custom properties
Deploy and start an application
Manage installed applications
Install and uninstall applications with the adminstrative console
Install and uninstall applications with wsadmin
Start and stop applications with the administrative console
Start and stop applications with wsadmin
Advanced application configuration
Administer session tracking
Map virtual hosts for Web modules
Configure session tracking for Web modules
Update applications
Use hot deployment and dynamic reloading
Change or add application files
Change or add WAR files
Change the HTTP plug-in configuration
Use the EARExpander script
Tune performance
Performance overview
Performance guidelines
Performance resources
Access PMI data with the JMX interface
Example: JMX administrative client that retrieves PMI data
Performance tuning guidelines
Application server tuning parameters
Queuing network
Queue configuration tips
Web services tuning tips
Performance tips for wsadmin
Hardware capacity and configuration
Java virtual machine tuning parameters
Java memory tuning tips
Web server tuning parameters
Database tuning
TCP/IP buffer sizes
Application assembly performance checklist
Backup and recovery
Backup and recovery of adminstrative configuration
Backup and recovery of servlets
Backup and recovery of JSP files
Backup and recovery of security configuration
Use the backupConfig script
Use the restoreConfig script
Reference
Administrative tools
The WebSphere administrative console
Enable the administrative console
Start the WebSphere administrative console
Save configuration changes
WebSphere administrative console features
WebSphere administrative console topology reference
Administer console users and groups
Qshell scripts
Configure Qshell to run the scripts
Qshell environment variables
Security and Qshell scripts
Set explicit authorites for startServer and stopServer
The wsadmin tool
Run wsadmin
Syntax and parameters
Use wsadmin in a secure environment
Scripting objects
The AdminControl object
The AdminConfig object
The AdminApp object
The Help object
Java properties of wsadmin
Sample wsadmin commands
Supported scripting languages
The ws_ant script
Start ws_ant
Syntax and parameters
Ant tasks
Java Management Extensions
Customize with JMX
Customize with JMX MBeans
J2EE security permissions example
Product library, directories, and subsystem
Administrative repository
Properties files
Port usage
User profiles
Set the time zone
Supported user.timezone values
Restricted characters in object names
Samples and applications
Application development
Step 1: Plan
Application development tools
Step 2: Design your application
Step 3: Develop your application
Classloaders
Classloader hierarchy
Java Virtual Machine classloaders
Java cache for user classloaders
WebSphere extensions classloader
Java execution modes
Class preloading
Classloaders in applications
Administer classloaders using the WebSphere administrative console
Migrate the classloader Module Visibility Mode setting
Classloader policies
Servlets
Servlet lifecycle
Create a servlet
ServletSample
Step 1: Write the servlet
Enter the servlet import statements
Extend the HTTPServlet class
Write the required servlet methods
Get the HTTP request information, if any
Create the HTTP response
Step 2: Compile the servlet
Step 4: Test the servlet
Application lifecycle listeners and events
Servlet filtering
Page lists
client_types.xml
Example: Extending PageListServlet
Automatic request and response encoding
Enhanced error reporting
Internal servlets
Servlet resources
JavaServer Pages
What are JavaServer Pages (JSP) files?
JSP processor
JSP tag extensions support
IBM extensions to JSP tags
tsx:dbconnect
tsx:userid and tsx:passwd
tsx:dbquery
JSP10employeeRepeatResults.jsp example
tsx:dbmodify
tsx:repeat
tsx:getProperty
Pre-touch tool for compiling and loading JSP files
JSP batch compilation
Disable JSP run-time compilation
Reduce JSP compile time
Data access
Data access overview
Connection management architecture
Connection life cycle
Unshareable and shareable connections
Connection handles
Connections and transactions
Connection pooling
Develop data access applications
Data access development model
Looking up data sources with resource references for relational access
Isolation level and resource reference
IBM extensions to the data access API
Access data with J2EE Connector Architecture connectors
Example: Connection factory lookup
Access connection pools from your components
IBM data access JavaBeans
Data access JavaBeans overview
Example: Using WebSphere Application Server Version 4.0 data access beans
Example: Using WebSphere Application Server - Express data access beans
Data access exceptions
Connection Wait Timeout Exception
Stale Connection Exception
Assemble data access applications
Configuring the isolation level on a resource reference
Configure WebSphere Application Server - Express to access databases
Configure JDBC data access
Create a JDBC provider and data source
Available JDBC providers
Test the connection
Testing a connection with the administrative console
Testing a connection using wsadmin
Example: Test a connection using testConnection(ConfigID)
Example: Test a connection using country and language (properties)
Example: Test a connection to a data source
Example: Creating a JDBC provider and data source using Java Management Extensions API and the scripting tool
Configure JCA data access
Configuring Java 2 Connector connection factories
Installing Java 2 Connector resource adapters
Deploy data access applications
Security of lookups
Pass user and password on the getConnection call
Disable lookup security
Java Naming and Directory Interface (JNDI)
JNDI basic concepts
Naming
Name space logical view
Initial context support
Differences between JNDI and CORBA
Example: Set the syntax used to parse name strings
JNDI implementation
JNDI caching
JNDI cache behavior
JNDI cache properties
JNDI coding examples
JNDI helpers and utilities
Helper class
Namespace dump utility
Example: Output from the namespace dump utility
Invoke the NameServer MBean to dump namespaces
Use JNDI
Obtain the initial JNDI context for the component
Use JNDI to look up Java components
JavaMail
Overview of JavaMail APIs
Configure JavaMail
Set up and configure e-mail services
Configure a JavaMail session using the administrative console
Write JavaMail applications
Example: JavaMail code
Debug JavaMail
Sessions
Deciding between session tracking approaches
Session security
Best practices for session programming
Session programming model and environment
Example: SessionSample.java
Configure session management
Configure session tracking for Wireless Application Protocol devices
Assemble applications to share session data
Tune session management
Maximum in-memory session count
Configure scheduled invalidation
Bean Scripting Framework
Example: Convert JavaScript source to the Bean Scripting Framework
Scenario: Create a Bean Scripting Framework application
Internationalization
Overview of internationalization
Internationalize your application
Identify localizable text
Create message catalogs
Assemble your application code
Internationalization resources
Add logging and tracing to your application
Programming model summary
Overview of JRas
Program with the JRas framework
JRas extensions
Create JRas resource bundles and message files
Develop JRas resource bundles
Create JRas manager and logger instances
Set up for integrated JRas operation
Set up for combined JRas operation
Set up for standalone JRas operation
Extending the JRas framework
Writing User Extensions
Example: user written handler
Example: user written formatter
JRas messages and trace event types
Step 4: Assemble your application
Step 5: Deploy your application
Web services
Overview
WSDL
WSDL architecture
SOAP with Attachments API for Java (SAAJ)
Web services architecture
Web services operations
Develop
Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing application
Develop a service endpoint interface
Develop a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) file
Develop Web service deployment descriptor templates from the WSDL file
Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing WSDL file
Develop implementation templates, deployment descriptor templates, and bindings from a WSDL file
Complete the Java bean or enterprise bean implementation
Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
Develop a Web services client
Set up a Web services client development environment
Develop templates and bindings from a WSDL file.
Configure the webservicesclient.xml deployment descriptor
Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
Use HTTP to transport Web services requests
Configure the endpoint URL information for HTTP bindings
Web services development artifacts
Map between Java, WSDL, and XML
Develop and manage UDDI4J
Web Services Invocation Framework (WSIF)
Goals of WSIF
An overview of WSIF
WSIF and WSDL
WSIF architecture
Using WSIF with Web services that offer multiple bindings
WSIF usage scenarios
Dynamic call
Use WSIF to call Web services
Pass SOAP messages with attachments using WSIF
Writing the WSDL extensions
Passing attachments to WSIF
Types and type mappings
Use the WSIF providers
Use the Java provider
Use the SOAP provider
Develop a WSIF service
Use complex types
Use JNDI
Interact with the J2EE container
WSIF system management and administration
WSIF API
Troubleshoot WSIF
Known restrictions
WSIF SOAP provider: working with legacy applications
Change the default WSIF SOAP provider
Modifying Web services to use the IBM Web Service SOAP provider
Assemble
Web services assembly properties
Assemble a WAR file for your Web services application
Assemble a Web services client
Deploy
Configure
Web services tools
Web services scripts
The Java2WSDL script
The WSDL2Java script
The wsdeploy script
The setupWebServiceClientEnv script
Publish Web Services Description Language files
With the administrative console
With wsadmin
Through a URL
Multipart Web Services Description Language file best practices
Configure Web services security
Overview
Web services security and WebSphere Application Server
Architecture
Request sender
Request receiver
Response sender
Response receiver
Web services security and J2EE role-based security
Securing Web services based on WS-Security
Token type overview
User name tokens
Binary security tokens
XML tokens
Sample Web services security configurations
Default bindings
Configure authentication
Overview
Configure your Web services application
Configure basic authentication
Basic authentication
Nonce
Configure nonce settings
For the client
For the server
Configure identity assertion authentication
Identity assertion
Identity assertion authentication method
Trusted ID evaluator
For the client
For the server
Configure digital signature authentication
XML digital signature
Digital signature authentication method
For the client
For the server
Configure LTPA authentication
LTPA method
Configure the client
Configure the server
Configure a pluggable token
Pluggable token support
Generating a pluggable token
Validating a pluggable token
Configure digital signing
Configure a key locator
Key locators
Key locator default implementation
Develop a key locator
Configure a collection certificate store
Collection certificate store
Configure trust anchors
Trust anchors
Configure the client for request signing
Configure the client for response digital signature verification
Configure the server for request digital signature verification
Configure the server for response signing
Configure XML encryption and decryption
XML encryption
Configure the client for request encryption
Configure the client for response decryption
Configure the server for request decryption
Configure the server for response encryption
Configure HTTP basic authentication
Configure client-side SSL
Troubleshoot Web services security
Troubleshooting tips: Web services security
Configure Web services client bindings
Configure the scope of a Web service port
Troubleshoot
Web services client run time
Serialization and deserialization
Resources
Security
iSeries security resources
Securing Web resources with IBM HTTP Server for iSeries
Using getRemoteUser() and getAuthType() methods
Securing Web resources with WebSphere security
Overview
Developing secured applications
Develop secure Web applications
Example: Secure Web application code
Develop servlet filters for form login processing
Example: Servlet filters
Develop form login pages
Example: Form login
Develop with JAAS to log in programmatically
Example: JAAS programmatic login
Customize a JAAS authentication and login configuration
Find the root cause login exception
Develop your own J2C security mapping module
Develop custom user registries
Custom user registries
UserRegistry interface methods
Example: UserRegistry.java file
Example: FileRegistrySample.java file
Example: Groups.props file
Example: Users.props file
Example: Results.java file
Create a classes subdirectory
Assemble secured applications
Edit the web.xml file to add security settings
Add the was.policy file to applications for Java 2 Security
Deploy secured applications
Assign users and groups to roles
Configure WebSphere security
Configure global security
Global security
Configure a user registry
Configure the local operating system user registry
Configure the LDAP user registry
LDAP
Supported directory services
Using specific directory servers as the LDAP server
Using nested groups in user registries
Adding users to the LDAP user registry
Locating a user's group memberships in LDAP
Configure LDAP search filters
Dynamic and nested group support
Configure dynamic and nested group support for IBM Directory Server
Configure dynamic and nested group support for Sun ONE or iPlanet directory server
Configure the custom user registry
Configure the authentication mechanism
Authentication mechanism
SWAM
LTPA
Configure LTPA keys
Configure single signon
Prerequisites and conditions
Configure single signon and LTPA for WebSphere Application Server - Express
Configure single signon for Lotus Domino
Verify single signon between WebSphere Application Server and Domino
Troubleshooting single signon configurations
Change the default SSL keystore and truststore files
Enable global security
Role-based authorization
Assign users to administrative roles
Assign users to naming roles
Configure trusted mode for the internal HTTP transport
Configure SSL
Configure SSL for the browser
Configure SSL for Web servers
Configuring IBM HTTP Server for iSeries for SSL client authentication
Configure SSL for WebSphere Application Server - Express
Start the Digital Certificate Manager
Create a local certificate authority
SSL configuration repertoires
The iKeyman utility
Configure HTTPS transport for your application server's Web container
Configure SSL for WebSphere applications
Using Java keystore files
Configure SSL for java.net.URL HTTPS protocol
Example: HTTPS servlet
Example: JSSE client servlet
Example: JSSE server servlet
Configure SSL connections to an LDAP server
Configure Java 2 security
Java 2 security
Configure Java 2 policy files
Syntax of policy files
Create and edit policy files with the policy tool
The app.policy file
The was.policy file
The spi.policy file
The library.policy file
The filter.policy file
The java.policy file
The server.policy file
Access Control Exception
Configure JAAS login
Configure J2C authentication data entries
Tune security configuration
General security tuning tips
Security cache properties
Tune CSIv2
Tune LDAP authentication
Tune Web authentication
Tune authorization
SSL performance tips
Example: Setting custom properties for an HTTP transport
Run application servers under specific user profiles
Use iSeries Navigator to enable the user profile to run the application server
Securing iSeries objects and files
Password encoding
Troubleshooting
Troubleshoot by topic
Application server startup
Administration and administrative console
Enterprise applications
HTTP plug-in component
HTTP sessions
Installation
Naming service
Security
Enabling security
Starting applications
Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI)
Web resources
Detect hung threads
Adjust the hang detection policy
Configure the hang detection policy
Resources for monitoring Application Server
Monitor with iSeries commands
Monitor with a message queue
Verify product prerequisites
The checkprereqs script
The prerequisite validator tool
Check for port conflicts
The port validator tool
The servicetools script
Product history report scripts
Product version report scripts
WebSphere Application Server log files
Java Virtual Machine log files
Configure the Java Virtual Machine log files
View the Java Virtual Machine log files
Interpret the contents for the Java Virtual Machine log files
Process log files
Configure the process log files
View the process log files
IBM Service log files
Configure the IBM Service log files
Collect data for IBM Service
The showlog script
Use the WebSphere Application Server trace service
Enable and disable the trace service
Interpret the contents of a trace file
Use wsadmin to configure a trace
Use wsadmin to turn traces on and off
WebSphere Application Server - Express V5
Print this topic
Overview
What is WebSphere Application Server - Express?
Overview of the architecture
WebSphere Application Server - Express and other WebSphere Application Server products
Get support for WebSphere Application Server - Express
Other resources
Installation
Overview
Step 1: Plan the installation and initial configuration
Time considerations
Prerequisites
Obtain the WebSphere Application Server - Express for iSeries and current fixes
Verify that the correct cumulative PTF package is installed
Step 2: Install WebSphere Application Server
Determine whether or not WebSphere Application Server - Express is preloaded
Install the WebSphere Express product
Install the correct cumulative PTF package
Install PTFs
Step 3: Create an initial configuration
Configure software license information
Configure TCP/IP
Step 4: Verify the installation
What's next?
Troubleshoot the installation and initial configuration
Uninstall WebSphere Application Server
Clean up product UserData files
Migration
Overview
The WASPreUpgrade script
The WASPostUpgrade script
Step 1: Plan your migration
Migration prerequisites
API and Specifications for version 3.5.x
Step 2: Migrate your applications
Application assembly in WebSphere Application Server - Express
Migrate Web applications
Migrate HTTP sessions
Migrate from wscp to wsadmin
Step 3: Migrate your server instances
Migrate to a new WebSphere Application Server - Express instance
Step 4: Complete the migration
Administration
Administrative considerations for preloaded systems
Create an application server instance
Delete an application server instance
Use the crtwasinst script
Use the dltwasinst script
Display instance properties
Configure an HTTP server instance
Configure a Domino Web server instance
Start and test your application server
Use the startServer script
Use a CL command
Verify that the application server has started
Use the stopServer script
Use the serverStatus script
Configure the application server to run your application
Configure classloaders
Administer HTTP transports
Set custom properties for an HTTP transport
Configure logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
Configure access logging for internal Web server HTTP transport
Administer session tracking
Manage substitution variables
Use wsadmin to manage variables
Administer virtual hosts
Virtual hosts
Use the administrative console to administer virtual hosts
Use wsadmin to administer virtual hosts
Configure database access
Manage JDBC providers
The IBM Toolbox for Java JDBC driver
Manage data sources
Administer JDBC providers and data sources with the console
Use wsadmin to configure a JDBC provider
Use wsadmin to configure a data source
Configure connection pooling
Administer mail resources
Regenerate the Web server plugin configuration
Use the console and wsadmin to update the configuration
Configure remote HTTP
Configure security settings for your application server
Grant authority to an instance
Revoke authority to an instance
Encode password data
Encode passwords in properties files
Advanced application server settings
Change application server ports with the chgwassvr script
Change application server ports with the console and wsadmin
Manage thread pool settings
Administer Java virtual machine settings
Configure name space bindings
Administer shared libraries
Administer resource adapters
Configure the server for other language environments
Deploy and start an application
Manage installed applications
Install and uninstall applications with the adminstrative console
Install and uninstall applications with wsadmin
Start and stop applications with the administrative console
Start and stop applications with wsadmin
Advanced application settings
Administer session tracking
Map virtual hosts for Web modules
Configure session tracking for Web modules
Use the EARExpander script
Tune performance
Performance overview
Performance guidelines
Performance resources
Performance tuning guidelines
Application server tuning parameters
Queuing network
Queue configuration tips
Web services tuning tips
Performance tips for wsadmin
Hardware capacity and configuration
Java virtual machine tuning parameters
Java memory tuning tips
Web server tuning parameters
Database tuning
TCP/IP buffer sizes
Application assembly performance checklist
Backup and recovery
Backup and recovery of adminstrative configuration
Backup and recovery of servlets
Backup and recovery of JSP files
Backup and recovery of security configuration
Use the backupConfig script
Use the restoreConfig script
Reference
Administrative tools
The WebSphere administrative console
Start the WebSphere administrative console
Save configuration changes
WebSphere administrative console features
WebSphere administrative console topology reference
Administer console users and groups
Qshell scripts
Configure Qshell to run the scripts
Qshell environment variables
Security and Qshell scripts
Set explicit authorites for startServer and stopServer
The wsadmin tool
Run wsadmin
Syntax and parameters
Use wsadmin in a secure environment
Scripting objects
The AdminControl object
The AdminConfig object
The AdminApp object
The Help object
Java properties of wsadmin
Sample wsadmin commands
The Jacl scripting language
The ws_ant script
Start ws_ant
Syntax and parameters
Ant tasks
Java Management Extensions
Customize with JMX
Customize with JMX MBeans
J2EE security permissions example
Product library, directories, and subsystem
Administrative repository
Properties files
Port usage
User profiles and authorities
Set the time zone
Supported user.timezone values
Samples and applications
Application development
Step 1: Plan
Application development tools
Step 2: Design your application
Step 3: Develop your application
Classloaders
Classloader hierarchy
Java Virtual Machine classloaders
Java cache for user classloaders
WebSphere extensions classloader
Java execution modes
Classloaders in applications
Administer classloaders using the WebSphere administrative console
Classloader policies
Servlets
Servlet lifecycle
Create a servlet
ServletSample
Step 1: Write the servlet
Enter the servlet import statements
Extend the HTTPServlet class
Write the required servlet methods
Get the HTTP request information, if any
Create the HTTP response
Step 2: Compile the servlet
Step 4: Test the servlet
Application lifecycle listeners and events
Servlet filtering
Page lists
client_types.xml
Example: Extending PageListServlet
Automatic request and response encoding
Enhanced error reporting
Internal servlets
Servlet resources
JavaServer Pages
What are JavaServer Pages (JSP) files?
JSP processor
JSP tag extensions support
IBM extensions to JSP tags
tsx:dbconnect
tsx:userid and tsx:passwd
tsx:dbquery
JSP10employeeRepeatResults.jsp example
tsx:dbmodify
tsx:repeat
tsx:getProperty
Pre-touch tool for compiling and loading JSP files
JSP batch compilation
Disable JSP run-time compilation
Reduce JSP compile time
Data access
Data access overview
Connection management architecture
Connection life cycle
Unshareable and shareable connections
Connection handles
Connections and transactions
Connection pooling
Develop data access applications
Data access development model
Looking up data sources with resource references for relational access
Isolation level and resource reference
IBM extensions to the data access API
Access data with J2EE Connector Architecture connectors
Example: Connection factory lookup
Access connection pools from your components
IBM data access JavaBeans
Data access JavaBeans overview
Example: Using WebSphere Application Server Version 4.0 data access beans
Example: Using WebSphere Application Server - Express data access beans
Data access exceptions
Connection Wait Timeout Exception
Stale Connection Exception
Assemble data access applications
Configuring the isolation level on a resource reference
Configure WebSphere Application Server - Express to access databases
Configure JDBC data access
Create a JDBC provider and data source
Available JDBC providers
Test the connection
Testing a connection with the administrative console
Testing a connection using wsadmin
Example: Test a connection using testConnection(ConfigID)
Example: Test a connection using country and language (properties)
Example: Test a connection to a data source
Example: Creating a JDBC provider and data source using Java Management Extensions API and the scripting tool
Configure JCA data access
Configuring Java 2 Connector connection factories
Installing Java 2 Connector resource adapters
Deploy data access applications
Security of lookups
Pass user and password on the getConnection call
Disable lookup security
Java Naming and Directory Interface (JNDI)
JNDI basic concepts
Naming
Name space logical view
Initial context support
Differences between JNDI and CORBA
Example: Set the syntax used to parse name strings
JNDI implementation
JNDI caching
JNDI cache behavior
JNDI cache properties
JNDI coding examples
JNDI helpers and utilities
Helper class
Namespace dump utility
Example: Output from the namespace dump utility
Use JNDI
Obtain the initial JNDI context for the component
Use JNDI to look up Java components
JavaMail
Overview of JavaMail APIs
Configure JavaMail
Set up and configure e-mail services
Configure a JavaMail session using the administrative console
Write JavaMail applications
Debug JavaMail
Sessions
Deciding between session tracking approaches
Session security
Best practices for session programming
Session programming model and environment
Example: SessionSample.java
Configure session management
Configure session tracking for Wireless Application Protocol devices
Tune session management
Maximum in-memory session count
Bean Scripting Framework
Example: Convert JavaScript source to the Bean Scripting Framework
Scenario: Create a Bean Scripting Framework application
Internationalization
Overview of internationalization
Internationalize your application
Identify localizable text
Create message catalogs
Assemble your application code
Internationalization resources
Add logging and tracing to your application
Programming model summary
Overview of JRas
Program with the JRas framework
JRas extensions
Create JRas resource bundles and message files
Develop JRas resource bundles
Create JRas manager and logger instances
Set up for integrated JRas operation
Set up for combined JRas operation
Set up for standalone JRas operation
Extending the JRas framework
Writing User Extensions
Example: user written handler
Example: user written formatter
JRas messages and trace event types
Step 4: Assemble your application
Step 5: Deploy your application
Web services
Overview
Web services architecture
Web services operations
Migrate Web services
Migrate Apache SOAP Web services to Web services for J2EE
Migrate applications developed with Version 5 Web services technology preview
Develop
Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing application
Develop a service endpoint interface
Develop a Web Services Description Language (WSDL) file
Develop Web service deployment descriptor templates from the WSDL file
Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
Develop a J2EE Web service based on an existing WSDL file
Develop implementation templates, deployment descriptor templates, and bindings from a WSDL file
Complete the Java bean or enterprise bean implementation
Configure the webservices.xml deployment descriptor
Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
Develop a Web services client
Set up a Web services client development environment
Develop templates and bindings from a WSDL file.
Configure the webservicesclient.xml deployment descriptor
Configure the ibm-webservices-bnd.xmi deployment descriptor
Web services development artifacts
Map between Java, WSDL, and XML
Develop and manage Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP)
Build a SOAP client
Envelope editor
Deploy programming components as SOAP services
SOAP examples
SOAP tools
SoapEarEnabler tool
XML-SOAP Admin tool
Apache SOAP deployment descriptors
Secure SOAP services
HTTP authentication
SOAP signature components
Signature Header Handler
Verification Header Handler
SOAP security files reference
Develop and manage UDDI4J
Enable Web services to use the Web Services Invocation Framework (WSIF)
Goals of WSIF
An overview of WSIF
WSIF and WSDL
WSIF architecture
Using WSIF with Web services that offer multiple bindings
WSIF usage scenarios
Dynamic invocation
Use WSIF to invoke Web services
Pass SOAP messages with attachments using WSIF
Use the WSIF providers
Use the Java provider
Use the SOAP provider
Develop a WSIF service
Use complex types
Use JNDI
Interact with the J2EE container
WSIF system management and administration
WSIF API
Assemble
Web services assembly properties
Assemble a WAR file for your Web services application
Assemble a Web services client
Deploy
Configure
Web services tools
Web services scripts
The Java2WSDL script
The WSDL2Java script
The wsdeploy script
The setupWebServiceClientEnv script
Publish Web Services Description Language files
With the administrative console
With wsadmin
Through a URL
Multipart Web Services Description Language file best practices
Configure Web services security
Overview
Web services security and WebSphere Application Server
Architecture
Web services security and J2EE role-based security
Token type overview
User name tokens
Binary security tokens
XML tokens
Sample Web services security configurations
Default bindings
Configure authentication
Overview
Configure your Web services application
Configure basic authentication
Basic authentication
For the client
For the server
Configure identity assertion authentication
Identity assertion
Identity assertion authentication method
Trusted ID evaluator
For the client
For the server
Configure digital signature authentication
XML digital signature
Digital signature authentication method
For the client
For the server
Configure LTPA authentication
LTPA method
Configure the client
Configure the server
Configure a pluggable token
Pluggable token support
Generating a pluggable token
Validating a pluggable token
Configure HTTP basic authentication
Edit the HTTP basic authentication and SSL configuration
Configure digital signing
Configure a key locator
Key locators
Key locator default implementation
Develop a key locator
Configure a collection certificate store
Collection certificate store
Configure trust anchors
Trust anchors
Configure the client for request signing
Configure the client for response digital signature verification
Configure the server for request digital signature verification
Configure the srever for response signing
Configure encryption and decryption
XML encryption
Configure the client for request encryption
Configure the client for response decryption
Configure the server for request decryption
Configure the server for response encryption
Configure client-side SSL
Resources
Security
iSeries security resources
Securing Web resources with IBM HTTP Server for iSeries
Using getRemoteUser() and getAuthType() methods
Securing Web resources with WebSphere security
Overview
Developing secured applications
Develop secure Web applications
Example: Secure Web application code
Develop servlet filters for form login processing
Example: Servlet filters
Develop form login pages
Example: Form login
Develop with JAAS to log in programmatically
Example: JAAS programmatic login
Develop your own J2C security mapping module
Develop custom user registries
Custom user registries
UserRegistry interface methods
Example: UserRegistry.java file
Example: FileRegistrySample.java file (5.0 and 5.0.1)
Example: FileRegistrySample.java file (5.0.2 and later)
Example: Groups.props file
Example: Users.props file
Example: Results.java file
Develop a custom interceptor for trust associations
Example: Trust association interceptor
Assemble secured applications
Edit the web.xml file to add security settings
Add the was.policy file to applications for Java 2 Security
Deploy secured applications
Assign users and groups to roles
Configure WebSphere security
Configure global security
Global security
Configure a user registry
Configure the local operating system user registry
Configure the LDAP user registry
LDAP
Supported directory services
Using specific directory servers as the LDAP server
Using nested groups in user registries
Adding users to the LDAP user registry
Configure LDAP search filters
Configure the custom user registry
Configure the authentication mechanism
Authentication mechanism
SWAM
LTPA
Configure LTPA keys
Configure single sign-on
Prerequisites and conditions
Configure SSO and LTPA for WebSphere Application Server - Express
Configure SSO for Lotus Domino
Verify SSO between WebSphere Application Server and Domino
Troubleshooting single signon configurations
Configure a trust association interceptor
Trust associations
Change the default SSL keystore and truststore files
Enable global security
Assign users to administrative roles
Assign users to naming roles
Configure SSL
Configure SSL for the browser
Configure SSL for Web servers
Configuring IBM HTTP Server for iSeries for SSL client authentication
Configure SSL for WebSphere Application Server - Express
Start the Digital Certificate Manager
Create a local certificate authority
SSL configuration repertoires
The iKeyman utility
Configure HTTPS transport for your application server's Web container
Configure SSL for WebSphere applications
Using Java keystore files
Configure SSL for java.net.URL HTTPS protocol
Example: HTTPS servlet
Example: JSSE client servlet
Example: JSSE server servlet
Migrate applications to use Java keystores
Configure SSL connections to an LDAP server
Configure Java 2 security
Java 2 security
Configure Java 2 policy files
Syntax of policy files
Create and edit policy files with the policy tool
The app.policy file
The was.policy file
The spi.policy file
The library.policy file
The filter.policy file
The java.policy file
The server.policy file
Access Control Exception
Configure JAAS login
Configure J2C authentication data entries
Tune security configuration
General security tuning tips
Security cache properties
Tune CSIv2
Tune LDAP authentication
Tune Web authentication
Tune authorization
SSL performance tips
Example: Setting custom properties for an HTTP transport
Run application servers under specific user profiles
Use iSeries Navigator to enable the user profile to run the application server
Securing iSeries objects and files
Password encoding
Troubleshooting
Troubleshoot by topic
Install
Application Server startup
Administration and administrative console
Security
Naming service
Access Web resources
Enterprise applications
Universal Description, Discovery, and Integration (UDDI)
Resources for monitoring Application Server
Monitor with iSeries commands
Monitor with a message queue
Verify product prerequisites
The checkprereqs script
The prerequisite validator tool
Check for port conflicts
The port validator tool
The servicetools script
Product history report scripts
Product version report scripts
WebSphere Application Server log files
Java Virtual Machine log files
Configure the Java Virtual Machine log files
View the Java Virtual Machine log files
Interpret the contents for the Java Virtual Machine log files
Process log files
Configure the process log files
View the process log files
IBM Service log files
Configure the IBM Service log files
Collect data for IBM Service
The showlog script
Use the WebSphere Application Server
Enable and disable the trace service
Interpret the contents of a trace file
Use wsadmin to configure a trace
Use wsadmin to turn traces on and off
Domino
Business solutions
IBM Welcome Page V1.1
What's new for Version 1.1
Printable PDF
Overview of IBM Welcome Page V1.1
Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
Interaction with iSeries Directory Server (LDAP)
Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
Interaction with a Lotus Sametime server
Interaction with an Enterprise Identity Mapping server
Install IBM Business Solutions
Verify the prerequisites
Install the applications
Configure and deploy the applications
Configure and deploy into a new application server
Configure and deploy into an existing application server
Manually configure and deploy into WebSphere Application Server, Network Deployment (ND)
Verify installation and setup
Administer IBM Welcome Page V1.1
Manage server properties
Manage user entry properties
Manage group entry properties
Manage administrator properties
Manage client certificates
Manage CA certificates
Manage EIM server properties
Manage EIM domain properties
Manage Sametime server properties
Manage STLinks properties
Use IBM Welcome Page V1.1
Troubleshoot IBM Welcome Page V1.1
IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
What's new for Version 5.2
Printable PDFs
Overview of IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
Interaction with iSeries Directory Server (LDAP)
Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
Interaction with a Lotus Sametime server
Interaction with an Enterprise Identity Mapping server
Using the same directory for IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 and Lotus Sametime
Install IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
Administer IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
Add an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
Add multiple entries from an i5/OS system registry
Add multiple entries using an .ldif file
Update an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
Delete an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
Change password of an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 administrator pages
Modify directory access
Modify enrollment properties of the application
Allow users to update and delete entries
Modify maximum search size of entries
Modify maximum search time
Modify maximum photo size
Set up EIM registration and identity mapping
Set up Sametime chat links (STLinks) support
Set up Sametime presence list support
Use IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
Search for an entry
Using the wildcard character (*)
More on searching by name
Advanced search
Viewing the results
Add an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
How to enter new entry information
How to enter listing information
Update an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
Delete an entry using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
Change your password using the IBM Telephone Directory V5.2 application
Add an entry to your Sametime presence list
Start a Sametime chat with an entry
Manage your EIM registries
Work with additional functions
Troubleshoot IBM Telephone Directory V5.2
Notices and limitations
IBM Survey Creator V1.0
What's new for Version V1.0
Printable PDF
Overview of IBM Survey Creator V1.0
Interaction with WebSphere Application Server
Interaction with HTTP Server for i5/OS
Interaction with iSeries Directory Server (LDAP)
Interaction with LDAP on Domino 6.0 for iSeries
Interaction with a DB2 UDB for iSeries
Survey authentication process
Survey authorization process
Install IBM Survey Creator V1.0
IBM Survey Creator administrator pages
Add survey owners
Remove survey owners
IBM Survey Creator V1.0 owner pages
Create a survey
Types of survey questions
Add a question
Update a question
Remove a question
Preview a survey
Update a survey
Survey results
Remove a survey
Define which users can or can not take a survey
Survey URL usage for survey takers
Take a survey using IBM Survey Creator V1.0
Troubleshoot IBM Survey Creator V1.0
B2B and B2C
WebSphere Commerce Business Edition
WebSphere Commerce Suite, Pro Edition
WebSphere Commerce Payments
Business process integration
WebSphere Business Integration Adapters
WebSphere Business Integration Message Broker
Collaboration
Domino
QuickPlace
Sametime
WebSphere Personalization
WebSphere Portal
Connecting to the Internet
Development tools
iSeries Access for Web
WebSphere Development Studio
WebSphere Development Studio Client
WebSphere Host Publisher
WebSphere Studio Site Developer
e-business enablers
Content Manager OnDemand
DB2 XML Extender Administration and Programming
Lotus Workflow
Lotus Enterprise Integrator
WebSphere Host Integration Solution
WebSphere MQ
Pervasive computing
WebSphere MQ Everyplace
WebSphere Transcoding Publisher
Programming
Easy400
Java
Net.Data
XML Toolkit for IBM System i5
What's new in XML Toolkit for System i5
Printable PDF
XML introduction
Advantages of XML
Uses of XML
XML standards and extensions
XSL introduction
Uses of XSL
XML Scripting for IBM System i5 introduction
XML Toolkit introduction
Available XML Toolkit components
Installation
API documentation
Samples
Getting support
Related information for XML Toolkit for IBM System i5
Security and Directory Server
IBM Directory Server for iSeries (LDAP)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Directory Server concepts
Directories
Distinguished names (DNs)
Suffix (naming context)
Schema
IBM Directory Server schema
Common schema support
Object classes
Attributes
Common subschema elements
The objectclass attribute
The attributetypes attribute
The IBMAttributeTypes attribute
Matching rules
Indexing rules
Indexing rules specifications for attributes
Attribute syntax
Object identifier (OID)
The subschema entries
The IBMsubschema object class
Schema queries
Dynamic schema
Disallowed schema changes
Schema checking
iPlanet compatibility
Generalized and UTC time
Recommended practices for directory structure
Publishing
Replication
Replication overview
Replication terminology
Replication agreements
How replication information is stored in the server
Security considerations for replication information
Replication in a high availability environment
Realms and user templates
Search parameters
National language support (NLS) considerations
Language tags
LDAP directory referrals
Transactions
Directory Server security
Auditing
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) with the Directory Server
Kerberos authentication with the Directory Server
Groups and roles
Static groups
Dynamic groups
Nested groups
Hybrid groups
Determining group membership
Group object classes for nested and dynamic groups
Group attribute types
Roles
Administrative access
Proxy authorization
Access control lists
Filtered access control lists
The access control attribute syntax
EntryOwner
Propagation
Access evaluation
Subtree replication considerations
Example of defining the ACIs and entry owners
Example of changing the ACI and entry owner values
Example of deleting the ACI and entry owner values
Example of retrieving the ACI and entry owner values
Ownership of LDAP directory objects
Password policy
Password policy tips
Authentication
Denial of service
Operating system projected backend
User projected directory information tree
LDAP operations
Administrator and replica bind DNs
User projected schema
Read access to projected users
Directory Server and i5/OS journaling support
Unique attributes
Operational attributes
Server caches
Attribute cache
Filter cache
Entry cache
ACL cache
Controls and extended operations
Save and restore considerations
Getting started with Directory Server
Migration considerations
Migrating to V5R4 from V5R3 or V5R2
Migrating data from V4R4 ,V4R5, or V5R1 to V5R4
Upgrading from V4R4, V4R5, or V5R1 to an interim release
Saving the database library and installing V5R4
Migrating a network of replicating servers
Kerberos service name change
Planning your Directory Server
Configuring the Directory Server
Populating the directory
Web administration
Set up Web administration for the first time
Web administration tool
Scenarios
Scenario: Setting up a Directory Server
Scenario: Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
Administering Directory Server
General administration tasks
Starting the Directory Server
Stopping the Directory Server
Checking the status of the Directory Server
Checking jobs on the Directory Server
Managing server connections
Managing connection properties
Enabling event notification
Specifying transaction settings
Changing the port or IP address
Specifying a server for directory referrals
Adding and removing Directory Server suffixes
Granting administrator access to projected users
Enabling language tags
Tracking access and changes to the LDAP directory
Enabling object auditing for the Directory Server
Adjusting search settings
Enabling or disabling read access to projected users
Publishing information to the Directory Server
Importing an LDIF file
Exporting an LDIF file
Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
Administrative group tasks
Enabling the administrative group
Adding, editing, and removing administrative group members
Search limit group tasks
Creating a search limit group
Changing a search limit group
Copying a search limit group
Removing a search limit group
Proxy authorization group tasks
Creating a proxy authorization group
Changing a proxy authorization group
Copying a proxy authorization group
Removing a proxy authorization group
Unique attribute tasks
Determining if an attribute can be specified as unique
Creating a unique attributes list
Removing an entry from the unique attributes list
Performance tasks
Setting database connections and cache settings
Configuring attribute cache
Configuring transaction settings
Replication tasks
Creating a master-replica topology
Creating a master-forwarder-replica topology
Creating a master server (replicated subtree)
Creating a new replica server
Creating replication credentials
Creating a replica server
Coping data to the replica
Adding supplier information to the new replica
Creating a complex replication topology
Creating a complex topology with peer replication
Promoting a server to be a peer
Setting up a gateway topology
Changing replication properties
Adding supplier information
Editing supplier information
Removing supplier information
Creating replication schedules
Creating a daily replication schedule
Managing replication queues
Setting up replication over a secure connection
Topology tasks
Viewing the topology
Adding a replica
Editing an agreement
Moving or promoting a server
Demoting a master
Replicating a subtree
Editing a subtree
Removing a subtree
Quiescing the subtree
Editing access control lists
Security property tasks
Password tasks
Setting password policy properties
Setting password lockout properties
Setting password validation properties
Viewing password policy attributes
Overriding password policy attributes
Enabling SSL and Transport Layer Security on the Directory Server
Enabling Kerberos authentication on the Directory Server
Configuring DIGEST-MD5 authentication on the Directory Server
Schema tasks
Viewing object classes
Adding an object class
Editing an object class
Copying an object class
Deleting an object class
Viewing attributes
Adding an attribute
Editing an attribute
Copying an attribute
Deleting an attribute
Copying the schema to other servers
Directory entry tasks
Browsing the directory tree
Adding an entry
Adding an entry containing attributes with language tags
Deleteing an entry
Editing an entry
Copying an entry
Editing access control lists
Adding an auxiliary object class
Deleting an auxiliary class
Changing group membership
Searching the directory entries
Changing binary attributes
User and group tasks
User tasks
Adding users
Finding users within the realm
Editing a user's information
Copying a user
Removing a user
Group tasks
Adding groups
Finding groups within the realm
Editing a group's information
Copying a group
Removing a group
Realm and user template tasks
Creating a realm
Creating a realm administrator
Creating a template
Adding the template to a realm
Creating groups
Adding a user to the realm
Realm tasks
Adding a realm
Editing a realm
Removing a realm
Editing ACLs on the realm
Template tasks
Adding a user template
Editing a template
Removing a template
Editing ACLs on the template
Access control list (ACL) tasks
Viewing access rights for a specific effective ACL
Viewing effective owners
Adding , editing. and removing nonfiltered ACLs
Adding , editing. and removing filtered ACLs
Adding or removing owners
Reference
Command line utilities
ldapmodify and ldapadd
ldapdelete
ldapexop
ldapmodrdn
ldapsearch
ldapchangepwd
ldapdiff
Using SSL with the LDAP command line utilities
LDAP data interchange format (LDIF)
Example: LDIF
Version 1 LDIF support
Examples: Version 1 LDIF
Directory Server configuration schema
Directory information tree
Attributes
Object identifiers (OIDs)
IBM Tivoli Directory Server equivalence
Default configuration for Directory Server
Troubleshooting Directory Server
Monitoring errors and access with the Directory Server job log
Using TRCTCPAPP to help find problems
Using the LDAP_OPT_DEBUG option to trace errors
GLEnnnn message identifiers
Common LDAP client errors
ldap_search: Timelimit exceeded
[Failing LDAP operation]: Operations error
ldap_bind: No such object
ldap_bind: Inappropriate authentication
[Failing LDAP operation]: Insufficient access
[Failing LDAP operation]: Cannot contact LDAP server
[Failing LDAP operation]: Failed to connect to SSL server
Password policy-related errors
Troubleshooting the QGLDCPYVL API
Related information
Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Enterprise Identity Mapping overview
Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
EIM domain controller
EIM domain
EIM identifier
EIM registry definitions
System registry definitions
Application registry definitions
Group registry definitions
EIM associations
Lookup information
Identifier associations
Policy associations
Default domain policy associations
Default registry policy associations
Certificate filter policy associations
Certificate filters
EIM lookup operations
Lookup operation examples: Example 1
Lookup operation examples: Example 2
Lookup operation examples: Example 3
Lookup operation examples: Example 4
Lookup operation examples: Example 5
EIM mapping policy support and enablement
EIM access control
EIM access control group: API authority
EIM access control group: EIM task authority
LDAP concepts for EIM
Distinguished name
Parent distinguished name
LDAP schema and other considerations for EIM
Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
i5/OS user profile considerations for EIM
i5/OS auditing for EIM
EIM enabled applications for i5/OS
Enterprise Identity Mapping scenarios
Planning for Enterprise Identity Mapping
Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for eServer
Enterprise Identity Mapping setup requirements for eServer
Identifying needed skills and roles
Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain
Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain controller
Developing an Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definition naming plan
Developing an identity mapping plan
Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping associations
Developing an EIM identifier naming plan
Enterprise Identity Mapping implementation planning worksheets
Planning for Enterprise Identity mapping application development
Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for i5/OS
EIM installation prerequisites for System i
Installing required iSeries Navigator options
Backup and recovery considerations for EIM
Configuring Enterprise Identity Mapping
Creating and joining a new local domain
Creating and joining a new remote domain
Joining an existing domain
Configuring a secure connection to the EIM domain controller
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping domains
Adding an EIM domain to the Domain Management folder
Connecting to an EIM domain
Enabling policy associations for a domain
Testing EIM mappings
Removing an EIM domain from the Domain Management folder
Deleting an EIM domain and all configuration objects
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definitions
Adding a system registry definition
Adding an application registry definition
Adding a group registry definition
Adding an alias to a registry definition
Defining a private user registry type in EIM
Enabling mapping lookup support and the use of policy associations for a target registry
Deleting a registry definition
Removing an alias from a registry definition
Adding a member to a group registry definition
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping identifiers
Creating an EIM identifier
Adding an alias to an EIM identifier
Removing an alias from an EIM identifier
Deleting an EIM identifier
Customizing the EIM identifiers view
Managing EIM associations
Creating EIM associations
Creating EIM identifier association
Creating a policy association
Creating a default domain policy association
Creating a default registry policy association
Creating a certificate filter policy association
Adding lookup information to a target user identity
Removing lookup information from a target user identity
Displaying all identifier associations for an EIM identifier
Displaying all policy associations for a domain
Displaying all policy associations for a registry definition
Deleting an identifier association
Deleting a policy association
Managing EIM user access control
Managing EIM configuration properties
Troubleshooting Enterprise Identity Mapping
Troubleshooting domain controller connection problems
Troubleshooting general EIM configuration and domain problems
Troubleshooting EIM mapping problems
Enterprise Identity Mapping APIs
Related information for Enterprise Identity Mapping
HTTP Server
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Web Administration
Context, directives, and the server area
Content negotiation
Virtual hosts
Proxy server types
Log formats
Security tips
Validation lists
Kerberos
User profiles and required authorities
File compression
Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
Web Publishing with the PUT Method
WebDAV
Real time server statistics
Highly available Web server cluster
Web crawling
Webserver search engine
Triggered cache manager (TCM)
Trigger messages
ASF Jakarta Tomcat server
WebSphere Application Server
Scenarios
Setting up HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
Adding a new directory
Adding user directories
Adding cookie tracking
Adding virtual hosts
Adding password protection
Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process JSP file
Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process Java servlet
Setting up ASF Tomcat in-process War file
Monitoring Web server activity with logs
Tasks
Getting started
Installing and testing
HTTP Server tasks
Setting up additional MIME types
Setting up content and language negotiation
Setting up customized error messages
Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
Setting up environment variables
Setting up highly available Web server cluster
Setting up a cluster with CL commands
Setting up welcome or index page
Manually editing HTTP Server
Managing HTTP Servers
Managing addresses and ports
Managing backup files
Managing directories
Managing a highly available server
Managing ports for ADMIN server
Managing server performance
Compression tasks
Setting up input decompression
Setting up output compression
FRCA tasks
Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
Log tasks
Setting up logs
Proxy tasks
Setting up forward proxy
Setting up reverse proxy
Set up proxy chaining
Search tasks
Managing document lists
Setting up thesaurus dictionary
Managing thesaurus dictionary
Managing search indexes
Setting up document list
Setting up options objects
Managing Web crawlers
Setting up URL mapping rules file
Setting up URL object
Setting up Webserver search engine
Setting up validation lists
Security tasks
Setting up password protection
Setting up SSL for ADMIN server
Setting up to secure against denial of service
Tomcat tasks
Managin ASF Tomcat servers
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process JSP files
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process Java servlets
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process WAR files
Triggered cache manager tasks
Setting up triggered cache manager (TCM)
WebDAV tasks
Setting up WebDAV
Web tasks
Managing WebSphere Application Server
Web Performance Monitor
Web Performance Advisor
Configure SSL for ADMIN wizard
WebSphere Portal
Virtual host tasks
Setting up virtual hosts
Programming
API
HTTP Server APIs
Directives
CGI
Overview of CGI
Environment variables
Overview of High Availability CGI
Guidelines for writing high availability CGIs
Overview of Persistent CGI
Common gateway interface (CGI)
The CGI Process
CGI Program Interface
CGI Programs and Activation Groups
Setting up CGI programs
CGI in PASE
How to enable the server to run CGI programs
Troubleshooting your CGI programs
Apache APR and APIs
Regular expression notation
Setting up third party modules
Handlers
Net.Data programs
Java servlets and JSPs
Troubleshooting
Reference
CL commands
Environment variables
Lotus Domino plug-in
Server-side include commands
Supported i5/OS file systems for Web content
Time formats
Related information
Legal
Files and file systems
Database file management
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Overview of database file management
File types
Working with database files
File resources allocation
File resource allocation: Overview
File resources that must be allocated
How the system allocates resources
Copying files
Copying files: Overview
Copying files: Commands
Copying files: Supported functions
Copying files: Basic functions
File types and copying
Record sequence and copying
Resending copy file completion message
Monitoring for copy errors
Monitoring for zero records in the from-file
Creating a duplicate to-file member
CPYFRMQRYF command support for CCSIDs
CPYSRCF command support for CCSIDs
Copy commands support for null values
Copying physical or logical files
Creating the to-file (CRTFILE parameter)
Specifying CRTFILE(*YES) on either the CPYF or CPYFRMQRYF command
Authorities, user profiles, and file capabilities of the to-file
Adding, replacing, and updating records (MBROPT parameter)
Specifying *REPLACE when copying files
Specifying *ADD when copying files
Specifying *UPDADD when copying files
Copying records into files that use trigger programs
Selecting the records to copy
Selecting records using a specified record format name (RCDFMT parameter)
Selecting records by relative record numbers (FROMRCD and TORCD parameters)
Selecting records by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY parameters)
Key string comparisons made by the copy operation
Example: build-key function
Example: using FROMKEY and TOKEY
Variable-length fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
Date, time, and timestamp fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
Null-capable fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
Different CCSIDs used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
DBCS-graphic fields used by record keys (FROMKEY and TOKEY)
Selecting a specified number of records (NBRRCDS parameter)
Selecting records based on character content (INCCHAR parameter)
Variable-length fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
Null-capable fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
Different CCSIDs used by the INCCHAR parameter
DBCS-graphic fields used by the INCCHAR parameter
Selecting records based on field value (INCREL parameter)
Variable-length fields used by the INCREL parameter
Date, time, and timestamp fields used by the INCREL parameter
Null-capable fields used by the INCREL parameter
Different CCSIDs used by the INCREL parameter
DBCS-graphic fields used by the INCREL parameter
Copying deleted records (COMPRESS parameter)
Requirements of COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the CPYF command
Restrictions of the COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the CPYF command
Details of the COMPRESS(*NO) parameter and the CPYF command
Printing records (PRINT, OUTFMT, and TOFILE(*PRINT) parameters)
Creating an unformatted print listing
Selecting members to copy
Copying file members: Overview
Allowed copy operations and parameters
Copying all members within a file
Copying only certain members within a file
Specifying the member name for the copy operation
Special considerations for the Override Database File (OVRDBF) and Override Tape File (OVRTAPF) commands
How the copy function adds members to the to-file
Copying between different database record formats (FMTOPT parameter)
Specifying data for different field types and attributes
Mapping variable-length fields to fixed-length fields
Map fixed-length fields to variable-length fields
Date, time, and timestamp fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
Null-capable fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
CCSIDs using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
DBCS-graphic fields using FMTOPT(*MAP) or FMTOPT(*NOCHK)
Converting universal coded character set (UCS-2) graphic fields
UCS-2 graphic fields restrictions
Converting universal coded character set transformation format (UTF-8 character and UTF-16 graphic)
Converting System/370 floating-point and null fields
Errors in converting System/370 floating-point and null fields
Conversion rules for copying files
Adding or changing source file sequence number and date fields (SRCOPT and SRCSEQ parameters)
Copying device source files to database source files
Copying database source files to device source files
Copying database source files to database source files
Copying complex objects
Copying files that contain user-defined functions
Copying files that contain user-defined types
Copying files that contain datalinks
Copying files that contain large objects
Copying files that contain identity columns or ROWID attributes
Copying between different systems
Using the Copy From Import File (CPYFRMIMPF) command to copy between different systems
Notes on the CPYFRMIMPF command
Restrictions on the CPYFRMIMPF command
Importing data to the System i platform when the from-file is a database file or DDM file
Importing data to the System i platform when the import file is a stream file
Parallel data loader support to use with the CPYFRMIMPF command
Handling data from the import file
Notes on the delimited import file (CPYFRMIMPF command)
Fixed formatted import file
Improving the performance of the CPYFRMIMPF command
Using the Copy To Import File (CPYTOIMPF) command to copy between different systems
Notes on the CPYTOIMPF command
Restrictions for the CPYTOIMPF command
Notes on the delimited import file (CPYTOIMPF command)
Copying data to the import file in a fixed format (CPYTOIMPF command)
Opened files
Scope of opened files
Opening files using temporary file descriptions
Open considerations when using *LIBL with a DDM file
Detection of file description changes
Displaying information about open files
Monitoring file status with the open and I/O feedback area
Shared files
Open considerations for files shared in a job
I/O considerations for files shared in a job
Close considerations for files shared in a job
Overrides
Overview: Overrides
Benefits of using overrides
Summary of the override commands
Effect of overrides on some commands
Usage of overrides in multithreaded jobs
Application of overrides
Override of file attributes
Override of file names
Override of file names and file attributes
Override of the scope of an open file
How the system processes overrides
Process priority of overrides
How the system processes overrides: scenario
Process overrides: General principles
Scenario: Effect of exits on overrides
Scenario: Effect of TFRCTL on overrides
Scenario: Overrides to the same file at the same call level
CL program overrides
Securing files against overrides
Usage of a generic override for printer files
Example: Apply OVRPRTF with *PRTF
Example: Applying OVRPRTF with *PRTF from multiple call levels
Application of overrides when compiling a program
Deletion of overrides
Display of overrides
Example: Displaying all overrides for a specific activation group
Example: Displaying merged file overrides for one file
Example: Displaying all file overrides for one file
Example: Displaying merged file overrides for all files
Example: Displaying overrides with WRKJOB
Example: Displaying overrides
Tips about displaying overrides
File redirection
Plans for redirecting files
Tips about redirecting files
Default actions for redirected files
Performance
Avoiding keyed sequence access paths
Specifying fewer parameters
Checking record format level identifiers
Preventing errors when copying files
Limitation of recoverable errors during copy
Prevention of date, time, and timestamp errors when copying files
Mapping considerations using the Copy command
Prevention of position errors when copying files
Prevention of allocation errors when copying files
Reasons for allocation errors when copying files
Prevention of copy errors that result from constraint relationships
Copy operation on files not in check-pending status
Copy operation on files in check-pending status
Prevention of copy errors related to your authority to files
Security
Object authority
Object operational authority
Object existence authority
Object management authority
Object reference authority
Object alter authority
Data authorities
Authorities required for file operations
Limitation of access to files and data when creating files
Troubleshooting database file management
File error detection and handling by the system
Messages and message monitors in files by the system
Major and minor return codes in files by the system
Recovery from file system errors
Normal completion of errors by the system
Completion with exceptions of errors by the system
Permanent system or file error
Permanent device or session error on I/O operation
Device or session error on open or acquire operation
Recoverable device or session errors on I/O operation
Reference
Double-byte character set support
Double-byte character set fundamentals
DBCS code scheme
Shift-control double-byte characters
Invalid double-byte code and undefined double-byte code
Usage of double-byte data
Where you can use double-byte data
Where you cannot use double-byte data
Double-byte character size
Process of double-byte characters
Basic double-byte characters
Extended double-byte characters
What happens when extended double-byte characters are not processed
DBCS device file support
What a DBCS file is
When to indicate a DBCS file
How to indicate a DBCS file
Improperly indicated DBCS files
Making printer files capable of DBCS
DBCS display support
Inserting shift-control double-byte characters
Number of displayed extended double-byte characters
Number of DBCS input fields on a display
Effects of displaying double-byte data at alphanumeric workstations
Copy operation of DBCS files
Copy operation of spooled DBCS files
Copy operation of nonspooled DBCS files
Application program considerations for DBCS
Design of application programs that process double-byte data
Changing alphanumeric application programs to DBCS application programs
DBCS font tables
Commands for DBCS font tables
Finding out if a DBCS font table exists
Copying a DBCS font table onto tape or diskette
When to copy a DBCS table onto tape or diskette
How to copy a DBCS table onto tape or diskette
Copying a DBCS font table from tape or diskette
How to copy a DBCS table from a tape or diskette
Deleting a DBCS font table
When to delete a DBCS font table
How to delete a DBCS font table
Starting the character generator utility for DBCS font tables
Copying user-defined double-byte characters
DBCS font files
DBCS sort tables
Commands for DBCS sort tables
Using DBCS sort tables on the system
Finding out if a DBCS sort table exists
Saving a DBCS sort table onto tape or diskette
Restoring a DBCS sort table from tape or diskette
Copying a Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
When to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
How to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table to a data file
Copying a Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
When to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
How to copy the Japanese DBCS master sort table from a data file
Deleting a DBCS sort table
When to delete a DBCS sort table
How to delete a DBCS sort table
DBCS conversion dictionaries
System-supplied dictionary (for Japanese use only) for DBCS
User-created dictionary for DBCS
Commands for DBCS conversion dictionaries
Creating a DBCS conversion dictionary
Editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
Requirements for a DBCS conversion dictionary
DBCS conversion dictionary operations
Displays used for editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
Working with DBCS conversion dictionary display
Edit Related Words display for a DBCS conversion dictionary
Examples of editing operations for a DBCS conversion dictionary
Beginning to edit a DBCS conversion dictionary
Adding the first entries in a DBCS conversion dictionary
Moving a related word in a DBCS conversion dictionary
Deleting an entry in a DBCS conversion dictionary
Ending the editing process in a DBCS conversion dictionary
Suggestions for editing a DBCS conversion dictionary
Displaying and printing the DBCS conversion dictionary
Deleting a DBCS conversion dictionary
DBCS conversion (for Japanese use only)
Where you can use DBCS conversion
How DBCS conversion works
Usage of DBCS conversion
Performing DBCS conversion
Examples of DBCS Conversion
Converting one alphanumeric entry to a double-byte entry
Converting many alphanumeric entries at one time to DBCS
Converting alphanumeric blanks to DBCS blanks
Changing alphanumeric entries or conversion code to DBCS
Using DBCS conversion to enter words in the DBCS conversion dictionary
Considerations for using DBCS conversion
Feedback area layouts
Open feedback area
Device definition list
Volume label fields
I/O feedback area
Common I/O feedback area
I/O feedback area for ICF and display files
I/O feedback area for printer files
I/O feedback area for database files
Get attributes feedback area
Related information for database file management
Integrated file system
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Overview of the integrated file system
What the integrated file system is
Why use the integrated file system
Integrated file system concepts
Directory
Current directory
Home directory
Provided directories
*TYPE2 directories
Link
Hard link
Symbolic link
Path name
Stream file
Name continuity
Extended attributes
Scanning support
Examples: Scanning for viruses and files being opened
Related system values
Scanning occurrences
Object change
Signature change
Different CCSID
During save operation
Object integrity check
File systems
File system comparison
"root" (/) file system
Case-sensitivity in the "root" (/) file system
Path names in the "root" (/) file system
Links in the "root" (/) file system
Integrated file system commands in the "root" (/) file system
Integrated file system APIs in the "root" (/) file system
Object changes journaling in the "root" (/) file system
UDP and TCP devices in the "root" (/) file system
Open systems file system (QOpenSys)
Case-sensitivity in the QOpenSys file system
Path names in the QOpenSys file system
Links in the QOpenSys file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the QOpenSys file system
Integrated file system APIs in the QOpenSys file system
Object changes journaling in the QOpenSys file system
User-defined file systems (UDFSs)
Case-sensitivity in an integrated file system user-defined file system
Path names in an integrated file system user-defined file system
Links in an integrated file system user-defined file system
Integrated file system commands in a user-defined file system
Integrated file system APIs in a user-defined file system
Graphical user interface for a user-defined file system
Creating an integrated file system user-defined file system
Deleting an integrated file system user-defined file system
Displaying an integrated file system user-defined file system
Mounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
Unmounting an integrated file system user-defined file system
Saving and restoring an integrated file system user-defined file system
Object changes journaling in a user-defined file system
User-defined file system and independent auxiliary storage pools
Library file system (QSYS.LIB)
QPWFSERVER authorization list in the QSYS.LIB file system
File-handling restrictions in the QSYS.LIB file system
Support for user spaces in the QSYS.LIB file system
Support for save files in the QSYS.LIB file system
Case-sensitivity in the QSYS.LIB file system
Path names in the QSYS.LIB file system
Links in the QSYS.LIB file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the QSYS.LIB file system
Integrated file system APIs in the QSYS.LIB file system
Independent ASP QSYS.LIB
QPWFSERVER authorization list in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
File handling restrictions in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Support for user spaces in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Support for save files in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Case-sensitivity in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Path names in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Links in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Integrated file system APIs in the independent ASP QSYS.LIB file system
Document library services file system (QDLS)
Integrated file system and HFS in the QDLS file system
User enrollment in the QDLS file system
Case-sensitivity in the QDLS file system
Path names in the QDLS file system
Links in the QDLS file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the QDLS file system
Integrated file system APIs in the QDLS file system
Optical file system (QOPT)
Integrated file system and HFS in the QOPT file system
Case-sensitivity in the QOPT file system
Path names in the QOPT file system
Links in the QOPT file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the QOPT file system
Integrated file system APIs in the QOPT file system
NetWare file system (QNetWare)
Authorities and ownership in the QNetWare file system
Audition in the QNetWare file system
Files and directories in the QNetWare file system
NetWare Directory Services objects in the QNetWare file system
Links in the QNetWare file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the QNetWare file system
Integrated file system APIs in the QNetWare file system
iSeries NetClient file system (QNTC)
Authorities and ownership in the QNTC file system
Case-sensitivity in the QNTC file system
Path names in the QNTC file system
Links in the QNTC file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the QNTC file system
QNTC environment variables
Creating directories in the QNTC file system
Integrated file system APIs in the QNTC file system
Enabling QNTC file system for Network Authentication Service
i5/OS file server file system (QFileSvr.400)
Case-sensitivity in the QFileSvr.400 file system
Path names in the QFileSvr.400 file system
Communications in the QFileSvr.400 file system
Security and object authority in the QFileSvr.400 file system
Links in the QFileSvr.400 file system
Integrated file system commands and displays in the QFileSvr.400 file system
Integrated file system APIs in the QFileSvr.400 file system
Network File System (NFS)
Characteristics of the Network File System
Variations of servers and clients in the Network File System
Links in the Network File System
Integrated file system commands in the Network File System
Integrated file system APIs in the Network File System
Accessing the integrated file system
Accessing using menus and displays
Accessing using CL commands
Path name rules for CL commands and displays
Working with output of the RTVDIRINF and PRTDIRINF commands
Accessing the data of RTVDIRINF
Using the data of RTVDIRINF
Accessing using APIs
Accessing using iSeries Navigator
Accessing using iSeries NetServer
Accessing using File Transfer Protocol
Accessing using a PC
Converting directories from *TYPE1 to *TYPE2
Overview of *TYPE1 to *TYPE2 conversion
Conversion considerations
Conversion status determination
User profiles creation
Objects renamed
Combined characters
Surrogate characters
User profile considerations
Changing maximum storage for a user profile
Changing the owner of a directory
Auxiliary storage requirements
Tips: Symbolic link
Tips: Independent ASP
Tips: Saving and restoring
Tips: Reclaiming integrated file system objects
Integrated file system scanning
Journaling objects
Journaling overview
Journal management
Objects you should journal
Journaled integrated file system objects
Journaled operations
Special considerations for journal entries
Considerations for multiple hard links and journaling
Starting journaling
Changing journaling
Ending journaling
Reclaim operation of the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and user-defined file systems
Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) and Reclaim Storage (RCLSTG) commands comparison
Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
Re-creation of integrated file system provided objects
Examples: Reclaim Object Links (RCLLNK) command
Example: Correcting problems for an object
Example: Correcting problems that exist in a directory subtree
Example: Finding all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
Example: Deleting all damaged objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
Example: Running multiple RCLLNK commands to quickly reclaim all objects in the "root" (/), QOpenSys, and mounted user-defined file systems
Programming support
Copying data between stream files and database files
Copying data using CL commands
Copying data using APIs
Copying data using data-transfer functions
Transferring data from a database file to a stream file
Transferring data from a stream file to a database file
Transferring data into a newly created database file definition and file
Creating a format description file
Copying data between stream files and save files
Performing operations using APIs
ILE C functions
Large file support
Path name rules for APIs
File descriptor
Security
Socket support
Naming and international support
Data conversion
Example: Integrated file system C functions
Working with files and folders using iSeries Navigator
Checking in a file
Checking out a file
Creating a folder
Removing a folder
Moving files or folders to another file system
Setting permissions
Setting up file text conversion
Sending a file or folder to another system
Changing options for a package definition
Scheduling a date and time to send your file or folder
Creating a file share
Changing a file share
Creating a new user-defined file system
Mounting a user-defined file system
Unmounting a user-defined file system
Setting whether objects should be scanned or not
Transport-independent remote procedure call
Network selection APIs
Name-to-address translation APIs
eXternal Data Representation (XDR) APIs
Authentication APIs
Transport-independent RPC (TI-RPC) APIs
TI-RPC simplified APIs
TI-RPC top-level APIs
TI-RPC intermediate-level APIs
TI-RPC expert-level APIs
Other TI-RPC APIs
Related information for integrated file system
Spooled files
Printable PDF
Output spooling
Output queues and spooled files
Default server output queues
Spooling writers
Summary of spooling writer commands
Input spooling
Summary of job input commands
Using an inline data file
Considerations for opening inline data files
Tape files
Printable PDF
Overview of tape files
Concepts
Tape data files
Tape device files
Records, blocks, and formats
Tape labeling
Using tape files
Initializing tapes
Storing data in files on tape
Extending files on tape
Accessing data from a tape device
Setting up a device description
Setting up a device description for each media library device
Setting up a tape device file
Creating tape device file
Specifying tape device file parameters
Tape device files in high-level language programs
Open processing for tape device files
Input/output processing for tape
Read and write considerations
Read considerations
Force-end-of-data considerations
Force-end-of-volume considerations
Close processing for tape
User label processing
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Using overrides
Overriding file attributes
Overriding file names in high-level language programs
Displaying overrides
Deleting overrides
File redirection
Overriding files with the same file types
Overriding files with different file types
Recognizing commands that ignore or restrict overrides
Record formats
Example: Record format *D
Example: Record format *DB
Example: Record format *F
Example: Record format *FB
Example: Record format *V
Example: Record format *VB
Example: Record format *VS
Example: Record format *VBS
Example: Record format *U
Reference
Tape file CL commands
Tape configuration description commands
Tape device file commands
Tape support commands
Feedback area layouts
Open feedback area
Device definition list
Volume label fields
IBM standard volume label (VOL1)
IBM standard data set label 1 (HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
IBM standard data set label 2 (HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
IBM standard user labels (UHL1-UHL8 or UTL1-UTL8)
Other IBM standard labels
ISO/ANSI standard volume label (VOL1)
ISO/ANSI standard data set label 1 (HDR1/EOV1/EOF1)
ISO/ANSI standard data set label 2 (HDR2/EOV2/EOF2)
ISO/ANSI standard user labels (UHL and UTL)
Other ISO/ANSI labels
I/O feedback area
Common I/O feedback area
Troubleshooting tape files
Related information for tape files
Hardware installation and use
Planning for your physical environment
Cabling your server
Installing System i features
Control panel
Printable PDFs
Control panel concepts
Types of control panels
Physical control panel
Remote control panel
Virtual control panel
Control panel functions
Control panel buttons, lights, and indicators
Setting up your control panel
Accessing control panel functions
Instructions and descriptions for control panel functions
Normal control panel functions
Extended control panel functions
Low-level debug panel functions 57 through 70
Using remote control panel APIs
System power and test APIs
Turning on the system
Performing panel lamp test
Clearing panel lamp test
Powering off the system
IPL-related APIs
Setting IPL mode to Manual
Setting IPL mode to Normal
Setting IPL mode to Auto
Setting IPL mode to Secure
Setting IPL type to A
Setting IPL type to B
Setting IPL type to C
Setting IPL type to D
Starting an IPL
Setting IPL speed to Fast
Setting IPL speed to Slow
Setting IPL speed to system default
Other system function APIs
Starting dedicated service tools on the primary or alternate console
Starting a main storage dump
Disabling continuously powered main storage
APIs that check the system status
Is CPM present?
Is CPM enabled?
Is the key inserted?
Is the system turned on?
Is the attention light lit?
Is SPCN present?
Getting the IPL mode
Getting the IPL type
Getting the IPL speed
Getting type and model information
Getting the SPCN system reference code
Getting all system reference codes 1 - 9
Start and stop the server
System configuration list
i5/OS and related software
Installing, upgrading, or deleting i5/OS and related software
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Fastpath for software installation, upgrade, and deletion tasks
Concepts for software installation
Software installation process
Types of software installation devices
Contents of a software order
Software licensing documents
Media distribution set
Individual product documentation
Skipping a release
Performance data collection
Mixed-release environment
Software upgrade or replacement
Supported releases and nonsupported models for i5/OS (OS/400) upgrades
Installation and IBM-supplied objects
Compressed objects and storage space
Files that the system deletes during installation
Globalization and i5/OS software installation
Considerations for changing a primary language
Considerations for installing additional secondary languages
Object conversions
Checklist: i5/OS software upgrade or replacement readiness
Upgrading or replacing i5/OS and related software
Preparing to upgrade or replace i5/OS software
Verifying the contents of your software order
Identifying and reviewing information resources
Verifying the correct optical distribution media
Verifying license keys for keyed products
Preparing the system for i5/OS software upgrade or replacement
Reviewing software PTF (fix) requirements
Finding the latest PSP information
Analyzing fixes you currently have on your system
Required: Installing the Prepare for Install PTFs for V5R2 and V5R3
Installing optional i5/OS PTF to choose disk configuration
Permanently applying program temporary fixes (PTFs)
Adding fix support for currently installed licensed programs
Working with critical system values before you install software
Recording and printing all system values before you install software
Changing certain system values (QSYSLIBL, QUSRLIBL, QALWOBJRST, or QVFYOBJRST)
Optionally changing the scan control system value
Creating a data area to specify the system time zone
Verifying the integrity of user-modified system objects
Verifying user profiles and checking cross-reference files
Checking the QSECOFR user profile
Ensuring that the IBM-supplied product libraries are in the system ASP
Ensuring two-phase commit integrity
Minimizing software installation time
Gathering performance data for benchmark
Gathering performance data with Collection Services
Analyzing performance data
Performing initial upgrade or replacement tasks
Choosing a software installation method and device
Preparing for globalization
Preparing the upgrade device and media
Preparing to upgrade or replace software using an image catalog
Determining storage requirements for image catalog installation
Freeing up space on the load-source disk unit for an image catalog
Scenario: Preparing to upgrade or replace software using an image catalog
Required: Creating a custom list of software to install
Preselecting the licensed programs to install
Adding additional licensed programs to the installation list
Required: Accepting software agreements
Ensuring the system meets disk storage requirements for upgrades
Determining storage space required
Cleaning up disk storage space
Deleting licensed programs during cleanup
Cleaning up user profiles
Required: Allocating additional space for Licensed Internal Code
Choosing disk configuration
Estimating upgrade or replacement time
Preparing your console for software installation
Stopping the integrated server and other application servers
Saving the system
Upgrading or replacing software using automatic installation
Before you begin automatic installation
Replacing software using the automatic installation method
Verifying completion of automatic installation
Upgrading or replacing software using manual installation
Before you begin manual installation
Replacing the Licensed Internal Code
Replacing the i5/OS operating system
Replacing the licensed programs
Verifying completion of manual installation
Checklist: Completing the i5/OS upgrade or replacement
Replacing Licensed Internal Code and i5/OS of the same version and release
Checklist: i5/OS software replacement
Obtaining a record of PTFs applied
Permanently applying PTFs for a replacement of the same release
Determining storage space required for a replacement of the same release
Replacing software of the same release using manual installation
Installing PTFs for the Licensed Internal Code and the operating system
Checklist: Completing the replacement of the same i5/OS release
Checklist: i5/OS software installation readiness
Installing i5/OS and related software on a new system or logical partition
Preparing to install the i5/OS release
Verifying the contents of your software order
Identifying and reviewing information resources
Verifying the correct optical distribution media
Verifying license keys for keyed products
Performing initial installation tasks
Ensuring you have the latest information
Determining disk storage space required for a new installation
Estimating installation time
Preparing your console for software installation
Preparing the installation device and media
Installing the i5/OS release
Installing Licensed Internal Code on a new logical partition
Before you begin to install Licensed Internal Code on a logical partition
Installing Licensed Internal Code on the new logical partition
Installing software on a new system or logical partition (without i5/OS installed)
Before you begin to install software on a new system or logical partition
Installing i5/OS on a new system or logical partition
Installing software on a new system (with i5/OS installed)
Before you begin to install software on a new system
Performing the initial program load (IPL)
Installing additional licensed programs
Before you begin to install additional licensed programs
Using the Work with Licensed Programs menu to install IBM licensed programs
Using the Restore Licensed Programs command to install IBM or non-IBM licensed programs
Installing a secondary language
Before you begin to install a secondary language
Installing secondary languages for IBM licensed programs
Installing secondary languages for non-IBM licensed programs
Checklist: Completing the i5/OS installation
Changing the primary language of your system or logical partition
Before you begin to change the primary language
Changing the primary language
Installing the licensed programs after changing the primary language
Deleting software related to i5/OS
Determining what unused parts of products to delete
Considerations for deleting licensed programs
Deleting licensed programs
Troubleshooting software installation problems
Where to begin recovery
Image catalog recovery
Operations Console recovery
Starting point for automatic installation recovery
Licensed Internal Code recovery
Operating system recovery
Licensed programs, PTFs, and secondary language recovery
Starting the automatic installation process again
Starting the manual installation process again
Initialize System (INZSYS) recovery
Disk configuration warning and error messages
Starting from a power-off condition
Reference codes for i5/OS software installation
Common reference codes for i5/OS software installation
i5/OS installation recovery after using reference codes
i5/OS software reference
Licensed program releases and sizes
Estimates for i5/OS software installation time
Common methods of estimating i5/OS installation time
Conditions that affect i5/OS installation time
i5/OS installation processes
Checklist: Estimating i5/OS installation time
Times for installing licensed programs
Times for conversions
Integrated file system conversions
Conversion of objects that contain SQL statements
Database file conversions
IBM Backup Recovery and Media Services for i5/OS conversions
Data protection mechanisms
Installation devices and media
Optical media
Image catalog for a virtual optical device
Tape or tape libraries
Non-IBM tape device
Alternate installation device
Overview: Alternate installation device
Setting up an alternate installation device
Disabling an alternate installation device
Verifying and selecting an alternate installation device during a manual installation
i5/OS release interoperability
Installation notes about the i5/OS release
Media labels and their contents
Standard set products
Keyed set products
Feature codes for national language version
Blank displays
Using D-mode IPL to refresh the vital product data
System password
Installed status values
Options on the Prepare for Install menu
Options on Work with Licensed Programs menu
Manual installation Option 1. Install all
Automatic installation options
Options for displaying, installing, deleting, and saving from a list
Option 10. Display installed licensed programs
Option 11. Install licensed programs
Option 12. Delete licensed programs
Option 13. Save licensed programs
Options for secondary languages
Option 20. Display secondary languages
Option 21. Install secondary languages
Option 22. Delete secondary languages
Completion status
Commands related to the Work with Licensed Programs menu
Related information for software installation
Distributing software
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Planning to distribute software
Distributing software using iSeries Navigator
Sending IBM software products using iSeries Navigator
Packaging and sending your own software products using iSeries Navigator
Distributing software using central site distribution
Central site distribution concepts
Central site distribution terminology
Overview of tasks to distribute software using central site distribution
Central site distribution of software license information
Types of distribution media for central site distribution
Installation profiles for central site distribution
Benefits of using automatic installation and installation profiles to install distribution media
Installation methods for the target systems
Licensed program compression and decompression for central site distribution
Central site distribution of primary and secondary language files
Central site distribution of program temporary fixes (PTFs)
Checklist: Preparing to distribute software using central site distribution
Preparing software license information for central site distribution
Distributing software license information using iSeries Navigator or paper
Optional: Writing a user-defined installation program for the target systems
Optional: Preparing the central system for virtual images
Checklist: Creating central site distribution media
Duplicating and distributing tape or DVD distribution media
Optional: Duplicating virtual images to physical media
Optional: Duplicating DVD media to virtual images
Optional: Distributing virtual images
Checklist: Installing central site distribution media on the target system
Optional: Preparing the target system for virtual images
Installation tasks for the target systems
Optional tasks to complete after installation
Distributing software reference
Central site distribution media contents
Licensed programs that do not support secondary languages
Cover sheet for central site distribution media
Troubleshooting software distribution
Related information for Distributing software
Maintaining and managing i5/OS and related software
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Using software fixes
Fixes concepts and terms
Types of fixes
Single fixes
Cumulative PTF packages
Groups
Service packs
Cover letters
Sample fix cover letter and description of fields
Save files
Status information
Status descriptions using iSeries Navigator
Status descriptions using the command interface
Order status
Where to find information about fixes
Summary lists
Cross-reference summary lists
Preventive service planning information
Obtaining preventive service planning information
Contents of PSP information
Authorized program analysis reports
Planning your fix management strategy
Determining which interface to use
Ordering fixes
Ordering fixes using the Internet
Ordering fixes using the SNDPTFORD command
Installing fixes
Step 1: Reviewing fix cover letters prior to fix installation
Step 2: Preparing the system to install fixes
Determining the storage area before installing fixes
Step 3: Choosing your fix installation scenario
Installing cumulative PTF packages
Installing fixes received as save files
Installing fixes from media
Distributing fixes to multiple systems with iSeries Navigator
Sending and installing fixes
Copying fixes from media
Adding fix support for a software product
Comparing and updating fixes
Installing fixes on systems with logical partitions
Installing fixes on systems managed by Hardware Management Console
Installing i5/OS fixes from an image catalog
Step 4: Verifying fix installation
Advanced procedures for fix installation
Building a custom fix package
Building virtual image fix packages
Loading fixes
Applying fixes
Canceling the application of fixes
Applying fixes during an unattended IPL
Applying fixes during attended IPL
Applying fixes without an IPL
Applying fixes at the next unattended IPL
Applying Licensed Internal Code fixes without an IPL
Displaying fixes information on your system
Displaying fix status with iSeries Navigator
Displaying PTF information with the character-based interface
Displaying properties of a fix or fix group
Displaying an inventory of fixes on your system with Management Central
Displaying level of fixes
Working with fix cover letters
Ordering fix cover letters
Copying fix cover letters from media
Displaying and printing fix cover letters
Cleaning up fixes
Removing software fixes
Removing licensed program fixes
Removing IBM i5/OS fixes
Removing Licensed Internal Code fixes
Working with software agreements and licenses
i5/OS Application Server licensing
i5/OS licensing on IBM System i models that offer user entitlements
Software agreements and licensing concepts
Software agreements
Software license keys
Planning for software licensing
Determining the usage limit for products not in the keyed set
Determining the usage limit for products priced by processor
Managing software agreements and license keys
Accepting software agreements
Displaying or printing your software agreements
Preparing software agreements for transfer of ownership
Displaying and changing software license information
Adding license key information
Setting the usage limit
Distributing software license keys
Managing software inventory
Building and managing your own software products
Packaging and sending your own software products
Generating fixes for installed products using Management Central
Generating software agreements for your own products
Generating license keys for your own products
Fixes and software inventory related information
Integrated operating environments
AIX on System i
Domino
Linux
Linux on an integrated xSeries solution
What's New for V5R4
Printable PDF
x86 Linux on iSeries
Planning the installation
Integrated Linux server overview
Linux operating systems tested
Hardware support
Reviewing the planning documentation
Understanding virtual devices
Installing the hardware
iSCSI Host Bus Adapter
iSCSI HBA Installation Overview
Integrated xSeries Adapter
IXA Installation Overview
xSeries hardware and firmware
Updating the xSeries BIOS for your integrated Linux server
RSA I or RSA II adapter and firmware
Advanced System Management software
Video card
Integrated xSeries Adapter card
HSL loop and SPCN network
Integrated xSeries Server
IXS Installation overview
Verifying that an IXS is operational
Locating an Integrated xSeries Server (IXS)
Determining which Integrated xSeries Servers are in use
Completing the preinstallation tasks
Install the required iSeries licensed program for Linux integration
Installing the PTFs required for Linux integration support
Completing the iSCSI preinstallation tasks
Creating the driver diskette for Linux installs on the IXS and IXA
Connecting a USB diskette drive to the IXS
Connecting the integrated server into the Ethernet LAN
Starting the installation from i5/OS
INSLNXSVR command parameter descriptions
Examples: Running the Install Linux Server (INSLNXSVR) command
Completing the installation from the Linux console
Completing the installation of RHEL 3 on the IXS or IXA
Completing the installation of RHEL 4 on the IXA
Completing the installation of SLES 8 on the IXA
Completing the installation of SLES 9 on the IXA
Completing a SLES 9 SP3 or later installation on an iSCSI attached BladeCenter or xSeries
Completing the postinstallation tasks
Run the ixssetup.sh script
Run the ixsupdt utility
Maintaining the Linux integration code
i5/OS operations for integrated Linux servers
Overview
Setting up your operational interface
Managing your integrated Linux server with iSeries Navigator
Managing your integrated Linux server with the i5/OS command line
Using iSeries Navigator to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
Using the i5/OS command line to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
Starting integrated Linux servers
Shutting down integrated Linux servers
Networking integrated servers
Configure virtual Ethernet networks
Managing Linux drives
iSeries storage management overview
Introducing network server storage spaces
Understanding storage space linking
Manage Linux drives
Creating Linux drives
Linking Linux drives
Unlinking Linux drives
Deleting Linux drives
Sharing iSeries tape and optical drives with Linux
Restricting iSeries tape and optical drives
Deleting Linux servers
Viewing messages for a Linux server
Linux-centric backup and recovery
Linux backup and recovery overview
Linux recovery options
Choosing a tape drive for use by your Linux backup application
Restricting iSeries tape drives that can be used by Linux
Setting up an iSeries tape drive for use by Linux
Formatting tape media for use by Linux
Transferring control of a tape drive from i5/OS to Linux
Transferring control of a tape drive from Linux to i5/OS
Backing up files using Linux utilities and applications
Troubleshooting integrated Linux servers
Related information
Linux in a logical partition
What's new
Printable PDF
Plan to run Linux in a partition
Server support
Hosted and nonhosted partitions
Virtual I/O
Directly attached I/O
Supported I/O adapters
SCSI support
Device parity protection
Obtain Linux
Order or upgrade a server
Create a logical partition
Configure a logical partition
Assign I/O adapters
Create a network server description and a network server storage space
Configure the LAN console
Connect the virtual console
Install Linux
Install Linux from CD-ROM images
Start and stop the NWSD
Start device parity protection
Managing Linux
Logical partition authority
Display and change hardware configuration
Display console log
Display the operating environment
Display reference code history
Change host information
Connect to LAN
Directly attached LAN adapters
Virtual Ethernet
Use virtual Ethernet
Enable virtual Ethernet
Create an Ethernet line description
Virtual Ethernet connectivity methods
Proxy ARP
Network Address Translation (NAT)
TCP/IP Routing
Print server configuration
Dynamic movement of shared processor units
Dynamically adding disks
Network server description
Link NWSSTG among multiple NWSDs
Delete NWSDs
Delete disk drives
Network server description parameters
Application support
Access iSeries data using the Linux ODBC driver
i5/OS NetServer support for Samba
How to use SAMBA and NFS
Back up and recover
Backup options
Use the shared, read-only storage space
Sharing access to disks
Clone Linux servers
Save and restore hosted Linux files
Save configuration data
Back up the NWSD and disk drives
Build a rescue image
Use a rescue image
Back up NWSDs
Restore NWSDs
Unlink disk drives
Objects to save on i5/OS
Start a logical partition
IPL type for Linux
Boot from an IPL source
Recovering directly attached disks
Troubleshoot
Debug NWSD error messages
Debug multitasking error
System reference codes
Recover network failure
Related information
i5/OS PASE
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
i5/OS PASE overview
i5/OS PASE concepts
i5/OS PASE as a useful option for application development
Installing i5/OS PASE
Planning for i5/OS PASE
Preparing programs to run in i5/OS PASE
Analyzing your program's compatibility with i5/OS PASE
Compiling your AIX source
Installing AIX compilers on i5/OS PASE
Installing the AIX compilers
PTF update instructions
Copying the i5/OS PASE program to your system
Case sensitivity
Line-terminating characters in integrated file system files
Transferring files
Customizing i5/OS PASE programs to use i5/OS functions
Copying header files
Copying export files
i5/OS PASE APIs for accessing i5/OS functions
Using i5/OS PASE programs in the i5/OS environment
Running i5/OS PASE programs and procedures
Running an i5/OS PASE program with QP2SHELL()
Running an i5/OS PASE program with QP2TERM()
Running an i5/OS PASE program from within i5/OS programs
Examples: Running an i5/OS PASE program from within i5/OS programs
Calling an i5/OS PASE procedure from within i5/OS programs
Example 1: Calling an i5/OS PASE procedure from within i5/OS programs
Example 2: An i5/OS ILE program that uses pointer arguments in a call to an i5/OS PASE procedure
Using i5/OS PASE native methods from Java
Working with environment variables
Calling i5/OS programs and procedures from your i5/OS PASE programs
Calling ILE procedures
Examples: Calling ILE procedures
Calling i5/OS programs from i5/OS PASE
Example: Calling i5/OS programs from i5/OS PASE
Running i5/OS commands from i5/OS PASE
Example: Running i5/OS commands from i5/OS PASE
How i5/OS PASE programs interact with i5/OS
Communications
Database
Example: Calling DB2 UDB for iSeries CLI functions in an i5/OS PASE program
Data encoding
File systems
Globalization
Message services
Printing output from i5/OS PASE applications
Pseudo-terminal (PTY)
Security
Work management
Debugging your i5/OS PASE programs
Optimizing performance
Examples: i5/OS PASE
Related information
Windows environment on iSeries
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Integrated server overview
Advantages
Terminology
Hardware
IXS and IXA attached servers
iSCSI attached servers
iSCSI attached server overview
Basic single server support
Multiple server support
Advanced iSCSI support
Diskless booting over iSCSI
Remote server and service processor discovery
Windows console
Considerations
Performance
iSeries storage spaces versus dedicated disks
Storage space balancing
iSCSI attached server performance
Virtual Ethernet
Networking
Service Processor Connection
iSCSI network
Point to point virtual Ethernet
Virtual Ethernet networks
External networks
Software
Integrated xSeries Server (IXS) and Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA) attached xSeries servers
iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers
iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers with security
High availability
Security
IXSs and IXA attached systems
iSCSI attached systems
User and group
Types of user configurations
User enrollment templates
Password considerations
Install and configure
Hardware requirements
Software requirements
Prepare for the installation of integrated Windows servers
Memory requirements
Time synchronization
Configure i5/OS TCP/IP
iSeries Access
Enable iSeries NetServer
Create a guest user profile for iSeries NetServer
Install IBM i5/OS Integrated Server Support
Plan for the installation of Windows server
Plan for iSCSI hardware installation
Plan the boot mode for your hosted system iSCSI HBA
Create a Service processor configuration and Remote system configuration
Plan your service processor connection
Configure the service processor discovery method on your iSeries server
Network server descriptions
Installation worksheet for OS/400 parameters
Compare FAT, FAT32, and NTFS file systems
Tip: Find resource names when you have multiple integrated servers
Supported language versions
Install Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003
Prepare iSCSI hardware for Windows installation
Initialize service processor security
Create and start a network server host adapter
Start the installation from the i5/OS console
Continue the installation from the integrated Windows server console
Complete the server installation
Upgrade the IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server licensed program
Upgrade the integrated Windows server side of the IBM iSeries Integration licensed program
Migrate to 2890 Integrated xSeries Server hardware
Migrate to iSCSI attached servers
Windows Cluster Service
Install Windows Cluster service
Install Windows Cluster service on a new Windows server
Install Windows Cluster service on an existing server
Prepare Windows before installing Windows Cluster service
Install Windows Cluster service on Windows
Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2000
Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2003
Enabling Kerberos with a Windows Server 2003 Active Directory Server
Install the ATI Radeon 7000M video device drivers for Windows 2000 on the 2892-002 Integrated xSeries Server
Adjust hardware acceleration for Windows Server 2003 on the 2892-002 or 4812-001 Integrated xSeries Server
Respond to error messages during installation
Set an integrated Windows server to automatically vary on with TCP/IP
Code fixes
Types of code fixes
Synchronize software level using Windows server console
Synchronize software level using iSeries Navigator
Synchronize software level using a remote command
Manage virtual Ethernet and external networks
Configure IP address, gateway and MTU values
Configure virtual Ethernet networks
Configure inter-partition virtual Ethernet networks
Explore point-to-point virtual Ethernet networks
External networks
Install network adapter drivers and add adapter address information to Windows server
Remove network adapters
Administer connections to iSCSI attached servers
Work with iSCSI configuration objects
Manage network server host adapters
Create a network server host adapter object
Create a network server host adapter object based on another one
Display network server host adapter properties
Change network server host adapter properties
Start a network server host adapter
Stop a network server host adapter
Delete a network server host adapter
Manage remote system network server configurations
Create a remote system configuration object
Create a remote system configuration object based on another one
Display remote system configuration properties
Change remote system configuration properties
Display remote system status
Delete a remote system configuration object
Manage service processor network server configurations
Create a service processor configuration object
Create a service processor configuration object based on another one
Display service processor configuration properties
Change service processor configuration properties
Initialize a service processor
Delete a service processor configuration object
Manage connection security network server configurations
Create a connection security configuration object
Create a connection security configuration object based on another one
Display connection security configuration properties
Change connection security configuration properties
Delete a connection security object
Configure security between i5/OS and hosted systems
Configure CHAP
Configure IPSec
Configure service processor SSL
Automatic SSL initialization
Manual SSL initialization
Service processor password
Configure a firewall
Manage iSCSI host bus adapters
Hot spare between iSCSI local host adapters
Manage iSCSI HBA usage
Share an iSCSI HBA among multiple hosted servers
Spreading workload over multiple iSCSI HBAs
Using multiple iSCSI HBAs for redundancy
Manage iSCSI HBA allocation at the Windows side of the iSCSI network
Use the qvnimap command to view iSCSI HBA allocation
Display information about virtual Ethernet adapters
Configuring multipath I/O
Configuring the Windows operating system for multipath I/O
Configuring integrated servers for multipath I/O
Maximum transmission unit (MTU) considerations
Configuring virtual Ethernet for maximum performance on iSCSI networks that support frames larger than 1500 bytes
Configuring virtual Ethernet for iSCSI networks that have a maximum frame size that is less than 1500 bytes
Configuring virtual Ethernet to support unusual non-TCP applications that do not negotiate MTU
Integrated DHCP server
Remote server discovery and management
Verify that IBM Director Server is installed and running
Configure remote server and service processor discovery
Service processor discovery configuration
Dynamic IP addressing (DHCP)
Service processor discovery methods
Service Location Protocol (SLP) using multicast addressing
Discovery by IP address
Discovery by host name
Use the MM or RSA II web interface
Administer integrated Windows servers
Start and stop an integrated server
Start and stop using iSeries Navigator
Start and stop using the character-based interface
Shutdown from the Windows server console
How to safely shutdown your iSeries when integrated Windows servers are present
Connect to the 4812 IXS virtual serial console
View or change configuration information
Message logging
Run integrated Windows server commands remotely
Guidelines for submitting remote commands
SBMNWSCMD and file level backup support for Kerberos v5 and EIM
Hot spare between server hardware
Manage storage
i5/OS storage management
Disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Administer integrated Windows server disk drives from OS/400
Access the i5/OS integrated file system from an integrated server
Obtain information about integrated server disk drives
Add disk drives to integrated Windows servers
Create an integrated server disk drive
Link a disk drive to an integrated server
Format integrated server disk drives
Copy a disk drive
Expand a disk drive
Expand a system drive
Unlink integrated Windows server disk drives
Delete integrated Windows server disk drives
Use Windows disk management programs with integrated Windows servers
Share devices
Determine the device description and hardware resource names for iSeries devices
Use iSeries optical drives with integrated Windows servers
Use iSeries tape drives with integrated Windows servers
Install tape device drivers
Format a tape on i5/OS for use with integrated Windows servers
Allocate the iSeries tape drive to an integrated Windows server
Return control of a tape drive from an integrated Windows server to the iSeries
Supported iSeries tape drives
Identify iSeries tape devices for applications
Transfer control of the iSeries tape and optical drives between integrated Windows servers
Print from an integrated Windows server to iSeries printers
Administer Windows server users from i5/OS
Enroll a single user using iSeries Navigator
Enroll an i5/OS group using iSeries Navigator
Enroll users using the character-based interface
Create user templates
Specify a home directory in a template
Changing the LCLPWDMGT user profile attribute
Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
End user enrollment
End group enrollment
The QAS400NT user
Preventing enrollment and propagation to an integrated Windows server
Back up and recover
Back up of the NWSD and disk drives associated with an integrated Windows server
Back up the NWSD of an integrated Windows server
Back up the NWSH of an iSCSI attached integrated Windows server
Back up iSCSI NWSCFGs and validation lists
Back up predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers created on V4R5 and later OS/400 systems
Back up user-defined disk drives for an integrated Windows server
Save and restore user enrollment information
What objects to save and their location on OS/400
Back up individual integrated Windows server files and directories
File-level backup restrictions
Preliminary administrator setup tasks
Create shares on integrated Windows servers
Adding members to QAZLCSAVL
Ensure iSeries NetServer and the integrated Windows server are in same domain
Save your files
Example: How to address parts of an integrated Windows server
Windows Backup utility
Restore an integrated server's NWSD and disk drives
Restore predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Restore user-defined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Restore integrated Windows server NWSDs
Restore integrated Windows server NWSHs for iSCSI attached servers
Restore integrated Windows server NWSCFGs for iSCSI attached servers
Recover integrated Windows server files
Uninstall
Delete an integrated Windows server's NWSD
Delete an integrated Windows server's line descriptions
Delete TCP/IP interfaces associated with an integrated Windows server
Delete controller descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
Delete device descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
Delete network server configurations associated with an iSCSI integrated Windows server
Delete the IBM iSeries Integrated Server Support licensed program
Troubleshoot
Check message and job logs
Monitor Job
Additional logs and messages for iSCSI-attached servers
Problems with integrated Windows servers
Blue screen errors
A full integrated server system drive
Optical device problems
Locked optical device for a failed server
Tape problems
Verify that the tape drive device driver is loaded
Problems starting an integrated Windows server
Problems hot sparing between servers
Problems sharing hosted system hardware
Multiple NWSDs defined to use the same hosted system hardware
Special considerations for iSCSI attached systems
NWSD configuration file errors
Repair the NWSD configuration file
Reset the NWSD configuration file parameter
Use a previous version of the integrated server file
DASD in IXA or iSCSI attached servers
Failures enrolling users and groups
User enrollment authorization problems
Password problems
IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server snap-in program
Problems with iSCSI attached servers
Boot and storage path network analysis
Managing path certificates
IBM Director Troubleshooting
Discovery problems
Problems with SSL connections
Virtual Ethernet problems on iSCSI attached servers
Virtual Ethernet problems with IXS and IXA attached servers
Both line description and icon are present
Line description is present and icon is missing
Line description is missing and icon is present
Both line description and icon are missing
General problems with external networks
Manually update LAN drivers on the integrated Windows server
Begin the LAN driver installation or update
Select the adapter to install or update
Complete the LAN driver installation or update
Point to point LAN IP address conflicts
Assign point to point virtual Ethernet IP addresses
Problems with TCP/IP over virtual Ethernet
Problems accessing Windows Server 2003 shares using the QNTC file system
IFS access problems
Problems with saving integrated Windows server files
Unreadable messages in the server message queue
Problems getting a Windows system memory dump
Reinstall an integrated Windows server
Collect integrated Windows server service data
Create an integrated Windows server memory dump on OS/400
Use the network server description (NWSD) dump tool on OS/400
Network server description configuration files
NWSD configuration file format
Create an NWSD configuration file
Example: NWSD configuration file
Remove lines from an existing integrated Windows server file
TARGETDIR
TARGETFILE
Change an integrated Windows server file with ADDCONFIG
VAR
ADDSTR
ADDWHEN
ADDWHEN and DELETEWHEN expression operators
DELETEWHEN
LINECOMMENT
LOCATION
LINESEARCHPOS
LINESEARCHSTR
LINELOCATION
FILESEARCHPOS
FILESEARCHSTR
FILESEARCHSTROCC
REPLACEOCC
TARGETDIR
TARGETFILE
UNIQUE
VAROCC
VARVALUE
Change an integrated Windows server file with UPDATECONFIG
FILESEARCHPOS
FILESEARCHSTR
FILESEARCHSTROCC
Set configuration defaults
ADDWHEN
DELETEWHEN
FILESEARCHPOS
FILESEARCHSTR
TARGETDIR
TARGETFILE
Use substitution variables for keyword values
Related information
Linux
Linux on an integrated xSeries solution
What's New for V5R4
Printable PDF
x86 Linux on iSeries
Planning the installation
Integrated Linux server overview
Linux operating systems tested
Hardware support
Reviewing the planning documentation
Understanding virtual devices
Installing the hardware
iSCSI Host Bus Adapter
iSCSI HBA Installation Overview
Integrated xSeries Adapter
IXA Installation Overview
xSeries hardware and firmware
Updating the xSeries BIOS for your integrated Linux server
RSA I or RSA II adapter and firmware
Advanced System Management software
Video card
Integrated xSeries Adapter card
HSL loop and SPCN network
Integrated xSeries Server
IXS Installation overview
Verifying that an IXS is operational
Locating an Integrated xSeries Server (IXS)
Determining which Integrated xSeries Servers are in use
Completing the preinstallation tasks
Install the required iSeries licensed program for Linux integration
Installing the PTFs required for Linux integration support
Completing the iSCSI preinstallation tasks
Creating the driver diskette for Linux installs on the IXS and IXA
Connecting a USB diskette drive to the IXS
Connecting the integrated server into the Ethernet LAN
Starting the installation from i5/OS
INSLNXSVR command parameter descriptions
Examples: Running the Install Linux Server (INSLNXSVR) command
Completing the installation from the Linux console
Completing the installation of RHEL 3 on the IXS or IXA
Completing the installation of RHEL 4 on the IXA
Completing the installation of SLES 8 on the IXA
Completing the installation of SLES 9 on the IXA
Completing a SLES 9 SP3 or later installation on an iSCSI attached BladeCenter or xSeries
Completing the postinstallation tasks
Run the ixssetup.sh script
Run the ixsupdt utility
Maintaining the Linux integration code
i5/OS operations for integrated Linux servers
Overview
Setting up your operational interface
Managing your integrated Linux server with iSeries Navigator
Managing your integrated Linux server with the i5/OS command line
Using iSeries Navigator to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
Using the i5/OS command line to work with integrated Linux server NWSDs
Starting integrated Linux servers
Shutting down integrated Linux servers
Networking integrated servers
Configure virtual Ethernet networks
Managing Linux drives
iSeries storage management overview
Introducing network server storage spaces
Understanding storage space linking
Manage Linux drives
Creating Linux drives
Linking Linux drives
Unlinking Linux drives
Deleting Linux drives
Sharing iSeries tape and optical drives with Linux
Restricting iSeries tape and optical drives
Deleting Linux servers
Viewing messages for a Linux server
Linux-centric backup and recovery
Linux backup and recovery overview
Linux recovery options
Choosing a tape drive for use by your Linux backup application
Restricting iSeries tape drives that can be used by Linux
Setting up an iSeries tape drive for use by Linux
Formatting tape media for use by Linux
Transferring control of a tape drive from i5/OS to Linux
Transferring control of a tape drive from Linux to i5/OS
Backing up files using Linux utilities and applications
Troubleshooting integrated Linux servers
Related information
Linux in a logical partition
What's new
Printable PDF
Plan to run Linux in a partition
Server support
Hosted and nonhosted partitions
Virtual I/O
Directly attached I/O
Supported I/O adapters
SCSI support
Device parity protection
Obtain Linux
Order or upgrade a server
Create a logical partition
Configure a logical partition
Assign I/O adapters
Create a network server description and a network server storage space
Configure the LAN console
Connect the virtual console
Install Linux
Install Linux from CD-ROM images
Start and stop the NWSD
Start device parity protection
Managing Linux
Logical partition authority
Display and change hardware configuration
Display console log
Display the operating environment
Display reference code history
Change host information
Connect to LAN
Directly attached LAN adapters
Virtual Ethernet
Use virtual Ethernet
Enable virtual Ethernet
Create an Ethernet line description
Virtual Ethernet connectivity methods
Proxy ARP
Network Address Translation (NAT)
TCP/IP Routing
Print server configuration
Dynamic movement of shared processor units
Dynamically adding disks
Network server description
Link NWSSTG among multiple NWSDs
Delete NWSDs
Delete disk drives
Network server description parameters
Application support
Access iSeries data using the Linux ODBC driver
i5/OS NetServer support for Samba
How to use SAMBA and NFS
Back up and recover
Backup options
Use the shared, read-only storage space
Sharing access to disks
Clone Linux servers
Save and restore hosted Linux files
Save configuration data
Back up the NWSD and disk drives
Build a rescue image
Use a rescue image
Back up NWSDs
Restore NWSDs
Unlink disk drives
Objects to save on i5/OS
Start a logical partition
IPL type for Linux
Boot from an IPL source
Recovering directly attached disks
Troubleshoot
Debug NWSD error messages
Debug multitasking error
System reference codes
Recover network failure
Related information
Lotus software for i5/OS
Lotus Domino for i5/OS
Lotus Domino Document Manager for i5/OS
Lotus Workflow
IBM Integrated Domino Fax
Lotus Enterprise Integrator
Lotus QuickPlace
Lotus Sametime
Migration
Upgrading your iSeries server
Printable PDF
iSeries upgrade concepts
Upgrade terminology
Upgrade process
Partitioned-server upgrades
Upgrade paths
Upgrade planning
Performing the upgrade on your iSeries
Customizing your upgrade checklist
Performing all upgrade tasks
Adding or replacing a hardware feature
Preparing to change the hardware feature
Preparing to change the hardware feature for a partitioned server
Performing the hardware feature change
Performing resource management
Performing resource management for a partitioned server
Activating all standby processors
Upgrading to i5/OS Version 5 Release 4
Converting expansion units for a partitioned server
Planning to convert the expansion unit
SPD cabling
Preparing to convert the expansion unit
Resequencing SPCN addressing
Documenting and preparing the server
Printing disk configuration status
Printing parity set configuration and status
Displaying, verifying, and printing hardware resource information
Assigning all unassigned I/O resources
Removing failed or nonreporting resources
Clearing nonreporting logical partitioning resources
Changing the system value settings
Performing the expansion unit conversion
Performing resource management
Resolving LPAR configuration error
Reassigning buses and IOPs
Cleaning up the server
Renaming resources for each partition
Upgrading the server
Preparing to upgrade the server
Preparing to upgrade the partitioned server
Completing the server upgrade
Performing the server upgrade
Preparing the server for production
System reference code (SRC) A900 2000 recovery
Fixing hardware resource names after an upgrade
Preparing the partitioned server for production
Troubleshooting an iSeries upgrade
Related information for iSeries upgrades
Data migrations
Printable PDF
i5/OS data migration concepts
Migration terminology
Planning the i5/OS data migration
Performing the migration
Preparing for the migration
Completing the migration
Preparing for the migration from an iSeries system that does not support V5R4
Completing the migration from an iSeries system that does not support V5R4
Scenarios: Data migration
Troubleshooting the data migration
Related information for i5/OS data migration
Networking
HTTP Server
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Web Administration
Context, directives, and the server area
Content negotiation
Virtual hosts
Proxy server types
Log formats
Security tips
Validation lists
Kerberos
User profiles and required authorities
File compression
Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
Web Publishing with the PUT Method
WebDAV
Real time server statistics
Highly available Web server cluster
Web crawling
Webserver search engine
Triggered cache manager (TCM)
Trigger messages
ASF Jakarta Tomcat server
WebSphere Application Server
Scenarios
Setting up HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
Adding a new directory
Adding user directories
Adding cookie tracking
Adding virtual hosts
Adding password protection
Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process JSP file
Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process Java servlet
Setting up ASF Tomcat in-process War file
Monitoring Web server activity with logs
Tasks
Getting started
Installing and testing
HTTP Server tasks
Setting up additional MIME types
Setting up content and language negotiation
Setting up customized error messages
Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
Setting up environment variables
Setting up highly available Web server cluster
Setting up a cluster with CL commands
Setting up welcome or index page
Manually editing HTTP Server
Managing HTTP Servers
Managing addresses and ports
Managing backup files
Managing directories
Managing a highly available server
Managing ports for ADMIN server
Managing server performance
Compression tasks
Setting up input decompression
Setting up output compression
FRCA tasks
Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
Log tasks
Setting up logs
Proxy tasks
Setting up forward proxy
Setting up reverse proxy
Set up proxy chaining
Search tasks
Managing document lists
Setting up thesaurus dictionary
Managing thesaurus dictionary
Managing search indexes
Setting up document list
Setting up options objects
Managing Web crawlers
Setting up URL mapping rules file
Setting up URL object
Setting up Webserver search engine
Setting up validation lists
Security tasks
Setting up password protection
Setting up SSL for ADMIN server
Setting up to secure against denial of service
Tomcat tasks
Managin ASF Tomcat servers
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process JSP files
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process Java servlets
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process WAR files
Triggered cache manager tasks
Setting up triggered cache manager (TCM)
WebDAV tasks
Setting up WebDAV
Web tasks
Managing WebSphere Application Server
Web Performance Monitor
Web Performance Advisor
Configure SSL for ADMIN wizard
WebSphere Portal
Virtual host tasks
Setting up virtual hosts
Programming
API
HTTP Server APIs
Directives
CGI
Overview of CGI
Environment variables
Overview of High Availability CGI
Guidelines for writing high availability CGIs
Overview of Persistent CGI
Common gateway interface (CGI)
The CGI Process
CGI Program Interface
CGI Programs and Activation Groups
Setting up CGI programs
CGI in PASE
How to enable the server to run CGI programs
Troubleshooting your CGI programs
Apache APR and APIs
Regular expression notation
Setting up third party modules
Handlers
Net.Data programs
Java servlets and JSPs
Troubleshooting
Reference
CL commands
Environment variables
Lotus Domino plug-in
Server-side include commands
Supported i5/OS file systems for Web content
Time formats
Related information
Legal
Network scenarios
Printable PDFs
Network planning worksheet
Scenario: Setting up System i to communicate with LAN
Reviewing planning worksheet
Installing the TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for i5/OS licensed program
Configuring TCP/IP
Testing TCP/IP
Installing and configuring iSeries Access for Windows on your workstation
Configuring printers on the LAN
Testing network connections
Securing your system
Implementing system security recommendations
Exploring TCP/IP services, applications, and protocols
Scenario: Enabling remote connections
Setting up certificate authority with Digital Certificate Manager
Completing planning worksheets for DCM
Starting IBM HTTP Server for i5/OS on System A
Configuring System A as a certificate authority
Creating digital certificate for System B
Renaming .KDB and .RDB files on System B
Changing certificate store password on System B
Defining CA trust for i5/OS VPN key manager on System B
Configuring VPN connection between the branch sales office and the corporate office
Completing planning worksheets for VPN connection from the branch office to remote sales employees
Configuring VPN on System A
Configuring VPN on System B
Activating filter rules on both systems
Starting the VPN connection
Testing VPN connection between endpoints
Configuring VPN connection to remote users
Completing planning worksheets for VPN connection from the branch office to remote sales people
Configuring L2TP terminator profile for System A
Starting receiver connection profile
Configuring a VPN connection on System A for remote clients
Updating VPN policies for remote connections from Windows XP and Windows 2000 clients
Activating filter rules
Configuring VPN on Windows XP client
Testing VPN connection between endpoints
Scenario: Creating a virtual Ethernet for interpartition communications
Enabling the logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
Creating the Ethernet line descriptions
Turning on IP datagram forwarding
Creating the interface to enable proxy ARP
Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition A
Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition B
Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition C
Creating the virtual Ethernet interface on partition D
Creating the routes
Verifying network communications
Scenario: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
Scenario details: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
Step 1: Configuring the L2TP terminator profile for any interface on the partition that owns the modems
Step 2: Configuring an L2TP originator profile on 10.1.1.74
Step 3: Configuring an L2TP remote dial profile for 192.168.1.2
Step 4: Testing the connection
Network communications
Get started with communications
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Networking concepts
Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking
Advanced program-to-program communications
Dependent LU requester support
High-performance routing
Systems Network Architecture
TCP/IP
Configure
Create a network interface description
Create a network server description
Create a line description
Optimize
Improve wide area network performance
Adjust WAN protocols for optimum iSeries server performance
Adjust the WAN line speed for optimum iSeries server performance
WAN configuration considerations for IOPs
Improve local area network performance
Adjust LANs for optimum communications performance
Adjust LAN lines for optimum communications performance
LAN line speed considerations for IOPs
Improve data path performance
Considerations for subsystem configuration for error recovery performance
Communications performance considerations for interactive jobs
Communications performance considerations for batch jobs
Mix interactive and batch jobs on a WAN line
AnyNet communications for the iSeries system
Set up the AnyNet environment
Performance considerations for AnyNet communications
Enterprise Extender communications
Migration from AnyNet to Enterprise Extender
Subsystems
Applications
User written APPC applications
Distributed data management (DDM)
Application program interface (API) performance considerations
Performance considerations for intersystem communications function
Performance considerations for Common Programming Interface Communications
Communicate with host systems
Match iSeries system parameters for a host system
Match iSeries system line description parameters for a host system
Match iSeries system controller description parameters for a host system
Match iSeries system device description parameters for a host system
Match iSeries system mode and class-of-service description parameters for a host system
Configure dependent LU requester (DLUR)
Configure the host controller description
Configure the device descriptions
Communicate with a remote iSeries system
Match iSeries system line description parameters for a remote iSeries system
Match iSeries system controller description parameters for a remote iSeries system
Match iSeries system device description parameters for a remote iSeries system
Connect one iSeries server to another iSeries server
Communicate with remote workstation controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for 5494 controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by token-ring
Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by Ethernet
Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by frame relay
Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by SDLC
Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by X.21
Match iSeries system parameters for a 5494 connected by X.25
Match iSeries system parameters for 3x74 controller
Match iSeries system parameters for a 3174 controller
Match iSeries system parameters for a 3274 controller
Match iSeries system parameters for finance controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for 470x finance controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for FBSS finance controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for retail controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for 3651 retail controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for 3684 retail controllers
Match iSeries system parameters for 4680/4690 LINE parameter
Match iSeries system parameters for 4680/4690 LINK parameter
Match iSeries system parameters for 4684 retail controllers
Networking standards
Local area network standards
Distributed data interface network
Ethernet networks
Token-ring networks
Wireless network
Wide area network standards
Asynchronous communications
Binary synchronous communications
Frame relay networks
Synchronous data link control network
X.25 network
X.21 network
Troubleshoot
Display message queues to solve communication problems
Display the Product Activity Log to solve communication problems
Display the Print Error Log to solve communication problems
Job logs and communication problems
Solve communication problems using communications trace
Communications trace and communication problems
Trace Common Programming Interface (CPI) Communications (TRCCPIC) command
Solve communication problems using the system problem log
Solve communication problems using status information
Considerations for system tuning during error recovery
Use error messages to aid in error recovery
Solve communication problems using reason codes
APPC, APPN, and HPR
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Plan your APPN and HPR network
Select your APPC networking protocol
Design an APPN and HPR network to optimize communications performance
Configure APPC, APPN, and HPR
Automatic configuration on LANs
Determine parameters during automatic configuration
Automatic creation and vary on of the controller description
Automatic vary off and deletion of controller descriptions
Communication considerations using model controllers
Control automatic configuration
Manual configuration for APPN and HPR
Change network attributes
Create an APPC controller description
Create device descriptions for APPC connections
Create APPN location lists
Create mode descriptions
Create a class-of-service description
Configure Branch Extender support
Connection network support
Requirements for an APPN connection network
Connection network configuration considerations
Configuration considerations used to optimize error recovery performance
General configuration considerations for improved error recovery performance
Considerations for communications-related system values
Considerations for network attributes that can affect APPC error recovery
Considerations for line configuration settings that can affect error recovery
Considerations for controller configuration descriptions that can affect error recovery
Considerations for modes that can affect error recovery
Considerations for jobs that can affect error recovery
Connect a PC to iSeries using Personal Communications
Configure APPC with VTAM
Examples: APPC, APPN, and HPR configurations
APPN configuration examples
Two iSeries servers as end nodes using APPN
Two iSeries servers as network nodes using APPN
Three iSeries servers using APPN
Two APPN networks with different network IDs linked together
Multiple iSeries servers using APPN
HPR configuration examples
Two iSeries servers as network nodes using HPR
Three iSeries servers using HPR
Optimize APPN and HPR communication performance
Performance considerations for APPN and HPR
Optimize communications using high-performance routing
APPN virtual controllers and communications performance
Fine-tune configuration parameters for APPC performance
Maximum length request/response unit size (MAXLENRU) parameter
Maximum frame size (MAXFRAME) parameter
Pacing (INPACING, OUTPACING, MAXINPACING) parameters
Transmission priority (TMSPTY) parameter
APPC, APPN, and HPR security
Session-level security for APPN and HPR
Protect your system in an APPN and HPR environment
APPN filtering support
Create a session endpoint filter
Class of service (COS) routing
Troubleshooting APPN and HPR
Solve remote communication problems using STRPASTHR
Solve communication problems using DSPAPPNINF
Solve communication problems using WRKAPPNSTS
Solve communications problems using communications trace
Solve communication problems using session activity
Find Systems Network Architecture sense codes
APPN error log data
Standard APPN diagnostic data
APPN session setup states
Optional APPN diagnostic data
Ethernet
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Ethernet support
Ethernet terminology
Ethernet capabilities
Line speed
Duplex mode
Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Auto-negotiation
Auto-sensing
Establishment of a physical connection to your network
Hardware requirements for Ethernet
LAN IOA addresses
Ethernet frame format
Types of Ethernet frames sent
Maximum Ethernet frame sizes
Maximum LAN frame sizes
LAN device connection
LAN device identification
SNA exchange identifiers
LAN device connection initiation
SNA connections to LAN protocols
SNA service access points
Configuring Ethernet support
Configuring TCP/IP over Ethernet
Configuring SNA over Ethernet
Selecting a LAN IOA and creating the Ethernet line description
Creating the SNA controller description
Creating the SNA device description
Varying on configuration objects for SNA
Managing Ethernet support
Using existing line descriptions with iSeries Navigator
Changing your line description
Assigning your line description to a TCP/IP interface
Enabling objects to accept connections
Varying on configuration objects for SNA
Starting the TCP/IP interface
Viewing the LAN IOA address
Configuration object commands
Tuning Ethernet performance
Adjusting your LAN-frame size
Remote bridges dropping frames
Improvement of Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Ethernet performance
SNA over Ethernet timing parameters
LANCNNTMR and LANCNNRTY
LANRSPTMR and LANFRMRTY
LANACKTMR and LANACKFRQ
LANINACTMR
LANMAXOUT
LANWDWSTP
LANACCPTY
Changing timing parameters
Troubleshooting Ethernet
Viewing QSYSOPR or other message queues
Troubleshooting LANs
Physical network problems
Connection failure and controller descriptions
Remote system connection failure
Related information for Ethernet
Frame relay
Printable PDF
Network connections for frame relay
Physical environment for frame relay
Connections for frame relay
SNA direct connections
IP direct connections
Bridged connections for frame relay
System connection without a frame-relay network
Configuration objects for frame relay
Frame-relay addressing
Data link connection identifiers
Adapter addresses for frame relay
Routing characteristics for frame relay
Maximum frame-size parameter requirements for frame relay
Additional MAXFRAME parameter considerations
Tuning frame-relay performance
Local management interface
Parameters that control exchanges of information over local management interface
Local management interface exchanges
Scenarios: Frame-relay configuration
Scenarios: SNA direct connection for frame relay
Scenario: SNA direct connection of two System i models
Scenario details: Configuration for the System i model in Minneapolis
Scenario details: Configuration for the System i model in Madison
Scenario: SNA direct connection using a modem eliminator
Scenario details: Configuration for SYSTEM1
Scenario details: Configuration for SYSTEM2
Scenario: SNA direct connection to a host system
Scenarios: Bridged configuration for frame relay
Scenario: Bridged connections to remote token-ring networks
Scenario details: Creating the frame-relay network interface description
Scenario details: Configuring the System i connection to a remote token-ring network through the 6611 Network Processor
Scenario details: Configuring the System i connection to a remote token-ring network through a RouteXpander/2
Scenario: Bridged connection to an Ethernet network
Related information for frame relay
OptiConnect
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
OptiConnect connectivity advantages
OptiConnect and System i clustering
OptiConnect software capabilities
How OptiConnect works
OptiConnect hardware
HSL OptiConnect
Virtual OptiConnect
SPD OptiConnect
Mixed technology environments
OptiConnect software
Application structure
OptiConnect components
QSOC subsystem
OptiConnect job descriptions
Installing OptiConnect
Software requirements
Hardware requirements
Installing OptiConnect software
Verifying OptiConnect software installation
Activating logical partitions for OptiConnect
Activating logical partitions for Virtual OptiConnect
Activating logical partitions for HSL OptiConnect
Configuring OptiConnect
Configuring fast path routing
Configuring extended function path routing
Customizing OptiConnect
Routing SNADS over OptiConnect
Initial library list
Changing QUSER access authority
QYYCDTSU job description
QYYCMGR job description
OptiConnect performance factors
Advanced OptiConnect customization
Routing SQL over OptiConnect
Routing remote journals over OptiConnect
Using the mode table
Reloading the mode table
Journaling OptiConnect transactions
Submitting remote jobs
Configuring TCP/IP over OptiConnect
Features
Defining the OptiConnect TCP/IP interface
Configuring the TCP/IP interfaces for OptiConnect
OptiConnect and IP forwarding
Proxy ARP with OptiConnect
Starting the OptiConnect IP interface
Ending the OptiConnect IP interface
Managing OptiConnect
Starting OptiConnect
Ending OptiConnect
Considerations for starting and ending OptiConnect
Getting information about OptiConnect activity
Working with active jobs (WRKACTJOB)
Working with OptiConnect activity (WRKOPCACT)
Displaying OptiConnect link status (DSPOPCLNK)
Working with hardware resources (WRKHDWRSC)
Displaying hardware resources (DSPHDWRSC)
Troubleshooting
Basic troubleshooting procedure
Re-establishing system connections when OptiConnect is installed
OptiConnect error messages
OptiConnect cluster diagnostics
Related information
Token ring
Printable PDF
Token-ring overview
Supported token-ring functions
Connection establishment between LAN devices
How LAN devices identify themselves
SNA exchange identifiers
Which LAN device initiates the connection
Dial mode (SNA)
Answer mode (SNA)
SNA connections to LAN protocols
Your SNA service access points
Maximum frame size of token ring
Planning for token-ring support
Maximum LAN frame size
LAN IOA addresses
Configuring token-ring support
Configuring TCP/IP over token ring
Configuring SNA over token ring
Creating the token-ring line description
Token-ring IOAs
Selecting a LAN IOA
Creating the SNA controller description
Creating the SNA device description
Examples: Configuring SNA over token ring
Example: Connecting a system to another system
Example: Connecting the system to itself
Example: Connecting a system to a 3745 host
Example: Creating a host physical configuration
Example: Creating a host logical configuration
Example: Connecting a system to a 3174 Model 1L gateway
Example: Creating the NCP generation for a 3174 gateway
Example: Connecting a system to a 3174 subsystem control unit
Example: Creating parallel connections to a host
Example: Configuring the physical and logical parallel connections on the host system
Managing token-ring support
Changing the line descriptions to use token ring
Assigning the token-ring line description to a TCP/IP interface
Enabling objects to accept connections
Viewing the address of your LAN IOA
Configuration object commands
Tuning token-ring performance
Adjusting your LAN-frame size
Viewing the QSYSOPR message queue or other message queues
Bridges dropping frames
Token-ring line description commands
Timing
Timing parameters
The LANCNNTMR and LANCNNRTY parameters
The LANRSPTMR and LANFRMRTY parameters
The LANACKTMR and LANACKFRQ parameters
The LANINACTMR parameter
The LANMAXOUT parameter
The LANWDWSTP parameter
The LANACCPTY parameter
Changing timing parameters
Troubleshooting token ring
Troubleshooting LANs
Why some LAN connections fail
Why PCs do not connect to your system
Understanding the token-ring address format
Related information
Networking security
Cryptography
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Cryptography concepts
4764 and 4758 Cryptographic Coprocessors
Cryptographic hardware concepts
Features
Cryptographic Coprocessor scenarios
Scenario: Protecting private keys with cryptographic hardware
Scenario: Writing an i5/OS application to use the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Planning for the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Requirements
Secure access
Object authorities that are required for SAPI
Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Creating a device description
Naming files to key store file
Creating and defining roles and profiles
Example: ILE C program for creating roles and profiles for your Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for enabling all access control points in the default role for your Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for creating roles or profiles for your Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for enabling all access control points in the default role for your Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for changing an existing profile for your Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for changing an existing profile for your Coprocessor
Setting the environment ID and clock
Example: ILE C program for setting the environment ID on your Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for setting the environment ID on your Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for setting the clock on your Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for setting the clock on your Coprocessor
Loading a function control vector
Example: ILE C program for loading a function control vector for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for loading a function control vector for your Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for clearing a function control vector from your Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for clearing a function control vector from your Coprocessor
Loading and setting a master key
Example: ILE C program for loading a master key into your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for loading a master key into your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for re-encrypting keys for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor for use with DCM and SSL
Configuring the Cryptographic Coprocessor for use with i5/OS applications
Migrating to the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Migrating key store files from the IBM CCA Services for OS/400 PRPQ
Example: EXPORTing keys
Example: IMPORTing keys
Migrating Cryptographic Support for system cross-domain key files
Migrating keys: Method 1 (recommended)
Using IMPORTER key-encrypting keys
Migrating keys: Method 2
Managing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Logging on or off of the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for logging on to your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for logging on to your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for logging off of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for logging off of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Query status or request information
Example: Querying the status of your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: Requesting information from your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Initializing a key store file
Example: ILE C program for initializing a key store for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for initializing a key store for your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Creating DES and PKA keys
Example: Creating a DES key with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: Creating a PKA key with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Encrypting or decrypting a file
Example: Encrypting data with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Working with PINs
Example: Working with PINs on your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Generating and verifying a digital signature
Example: Signing a file with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: Verifying a digital signature with your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Managing multiple Cryptographic Coprocessors
Example: ILE C program for allocating a Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for allocating a Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for deallocating a Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for deallocating a Coprocessor
Cloning master keys
Example: ILE C program for setting the min and max values for master key shares in your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for setting the min and max values for master key shares in your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for generating a retained key pair for cloning master keys
Example: ILE RPG program for generating a retained key pair for cloning master keys
Example: ILE C program for registering a public key hash
Example: ILE RPG program for registering a public key hash
Example: ILE C program for registering a public key certificate
Example: ILE RPG program for registering a public key certificate
Example: ILE C program for certifying a public key token
Example: ILE RPG program for certifying a public key token
Example: ILE C program for obtaining a master key share
Example: ILE RPG program for obtaining a master key share
Example: ILE C program for installing a master key share
Example: ILE RPG program for installing a master key share
Example: ILE C program for listing retained keys
Example: ILE RPG program for listing retained keys
Example: ILE C program for deleting retained keys
Example: ILE RPG program for deleting retained keys
Troubleshooting the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Reinitializing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE C program for reinitializing the Cryptographic Coprocessor
Example: ILE RPG program for reinitializing your Cryptographic Coprocessor
Using the Hardware Service Manager
2058 Cryptographic Accelerator
Features
Scenario: Enhancing system SSL performance
Planning for the 2058 Cryptographic Accelerator
Configuring the 2058 Cryptographic Accelerator
Related information for cryptographic hardware
Digital Certificate Manager (DCM)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
DCM concepts
Certificate extensions
Certificate renewal
Distinguished name
Digital signatures
Public-private key pair
Certificate Authority (CA)
Certificate Revocation List (CRL) Locations
Certificate stores
Cryptography
IBM Cryptographic Coprocessors for System i
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
Application definitions
Validation
DCM scenarios
Scenario: Using certificates for external authentication
Completing planning work sheets
Creating a server or client certificate request
Configuring applications to use SSL
Importing and assigning the signed public certificate
Starting applications in SSL mode
(Optional): Defining a CA trust list for an application that requires
Scenario: Using certificates for internal authentication
Completing planning work sheets
Configuring the human resources HTTP Server to use SSL
Creating and operating a local CA
Configuring client authentication for human resources Web server
Starting the human resources Web server in SSL mode
Installing a copy of the local CA certificate in a browser
Requesting a certificate from the local CA
Planning for DCM
DCM set up requirements
Backup and recovery considerations for DCM data
Types of digital certificates
Public certificates versus private certificates
Digital certificates for SSL secure communications
Digital certificates for user authentication
Digital certificates and Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
Digital certificates for VPN connections
Digital certificates for signing objects
Digital certificates for verifying object signatures
Configuring DCM
Starting Digital Certificate Manager
Setting up certificates for the first time
Creating and operating a local CA
Managing user certificates
Creating a user certificate
Assigning a user certificate
Managing user certificates by expiration
Using APIs to programmatically issue certificates to users other than System i users
Obtaining a copy of the private CA certificate
Managing certificates from a public Internet CA
Managing public Internet certificates for SSL communications sessions
Managing public Internet certificates for signing objects
Managing certificates for verifying object signatures
Renewing an existing certificate
Renewing a certificate from the local CA
Renewing a certificate from an Internet CA
Importing a certificate
Managing DCM
Using a local CA to issue certificates for other System i models
Using a private certificate for SSL
Using a private certificate for signing objects on a target system
Managing applications in DCM
Creating an application definition
Managing the certificate assignment for an application
Defining a CA trust list for an application
Managing certificates by expiration
Validating certificates and applications
Assigning a certificate to applications
Managing CRL locations
Storing certificate keys on an IBM Cryptographic Coprocessor
Using the coprocessor master key to encrypt the certificate private key
Managing the request location for a PKIX CA
Managing LDAP location for user certificates
Signing objects
Verifying object signatures
Troubleshooting DCM
Troubleshooting passwords and general problems
Troubleshooting certificate store and key database problems
Troubleshooting browser problems
Troubleshooting HTTP Server for System i problems
Troubleshooting assigning a user certificate
Related information for DCM
Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Enterprise Identity Mapping overview
Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
EIM domain controller
EIM domain
EIM identifier
EIM registry definitions
System registry definitions
Application registry definitions
Group registry definitions
EIM associations
Lookup information
Identifier associations
Policy associations
Default domain policy associations
Default registry policy associations
Certificate filter policy associations
Certificate filters
EIM lookup operations
Lookup operation examples: Example 1
Lookup operation examples: Example 2
Lookup operation examples: Example 3
Lookup operation examples: Example 4
Lookup operation examples: Example 5
EIM mapping policy support and enablement
EIM access control
EIM access control group: API authority
EIM access control group: EIM task authority
LDAP concepts for EIM
Distinguished name
Parent distinguished name
LDAP schema and other considerations for EIM
Enterprise Identity Mapping concepts
i5/OS user profile considerations for EIM
i5/OS auditing for EIM
EIM enabled applications for i5/OS
Enterprise Identity Mapping scenarios
Planning for Enterprise Identity Mapping
Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for eServer
Enterprise Identity Mapping setup requirements for eServer
Identifying needed skills and roles
Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain
Planning an Enterprise Identity Mapping domain controller
Developing an Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definition naming plan
Developing an identity mapping plan
Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping associations
Developing an EIM identifier naming plan
Enterprise Identity Mapping implementation planning worksheets
Planning for Enterprise Identity mapping application development
Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for i5/OS
EIM installation prerequisites for System i
Installing required iSeries Navigator options
Backup and recovery considerations for EIM
Configuring Enterprise Identity Mapping
Creating and joining a new local domain
Creating and joining a new remote domain
Joining an existing domain
Configuring a secure connection to the EIM domain controller
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping domains
Adding an EIM domain to the Domain Management folder
Connecting to an EIM domain
Enabling policy associations for a domain
Testing EIM mappings
Removing an EIM domain from the Domain Management folder
Deleting an EIM domain and all configuration objects
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping registry definitions
Adding a system registry definition
Adding an application registry definition
Adding a group registry definition
Adding an alias to a registry definition
Defining a private user registry type in EIM
Enabling mapping lookup support and the use of policy associations for a target registry
Deleting a registry definition
Removing an alias from a registry definition
Adding a member to a group registry definition
Managing Enterprise Identity Mapping identifiers
Creating an EIM identifier
Adding an alias to an EIM identifier
Removing an alias from an EIM identifier
Deleting an EIM identifier
Customizing the EIM identifiers view
Managing EIM associations
Creating EIM associations
Creating EIM identifier association
Creating a policy association
Creating a default domain policy association
Creating a default registry policy association
Creating a certificate filter policy association
Adding lookup information to a target user identity
Removing lookup information from a target user identity
Displaying all identifier associations for an EIM identifier
Displaying all policy associations for a domain
Displaying all policy associations for a registry definition
Deleting an identifier association
Deleting a policy association
Managing EIM user access control
Managing EIM configuration properties
Troubleshooting Enterprise Identity Mapping
Troubleshooting domain controller connection problems
Troubleshooting general EIM configuration and domain problems
Troubleshooting EIM mapping problems
Enterprise Identity Mapping APIs
Related information for Enterprise Identity Mapping
System i and Internet security
Printable PDFs
System i and Internet security considerations
Planning Internet security
The layered defense approach to security
Security policy and objectives
Scenario: JKL Toy Company e-business plans
Security levels for basic Internet readiness
Network security options
Firewalls
i5/OS packet rules
Intrusion detection
Choosing i5/OS network security options
Application security options
Web serving security
Java Internet security
E-mail security
FTP security
Transmission security options
Using digital certificates for SSL
SSL for secure Telnet access
SSL for secure iSeries Access for Windows
Virtual private network for secure private communications
Intrusion detection
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Intrusion detection concepts
Intrusion detection terminology
Setting up an intrusion detection policy
Editing the intrusion detection policy file
Example: Traffic regulation policy
Example: Restricted IP options policy
Example: Perpetual echo policy
Example: Intrusion detection scan policy
Overview: Intrusion detection policy directives
Details: Intrusion detection policy directives
Backing up the intrusion detection policy file
Writing intrusion detection programs
Auditing intrusion detection activities
Analyzing the auditing data
Scan events
Attack events
Related information
IP filtering and network address translation
Printable PDF
Scenarios: Packet rules
Scenario: Mapping IP addresses using NAT
Scenario: Creating filter rules to allow HTTP, Telnet, and FTP traffic
Scenario: Combining NAT and IP filtering
Scenario: Hiding IP addresses using masquerade NAT
Packet rules concepts
Packet rules terminology
Packet rules versus other i5/OS security solutions
Network address translation
Static (map) NAT
Masquerade (hide) NAT
Masquerade (port-mapped) NAT
IP filtering
Sample filter statements
IP packet header
Organizing NAT rules with IP filter rules
Organizing multiple IP filter rules
Spoof protection
Planning for packet rules
Packet rules: User authority requirements
Packet rules: System requirements
Packet rules: Planning worksheet
Configuring packet rules
Accessing the packet rules editor
Defining addresses and services
Creating NAT rules
Creating IP filter rules
Defining IP filter interfaces
Including files in packet rules
Adding comments in the packet rules
Verifying packet rules
Activating packet rules
Managing packet rules
Deactivating packet rules
Viewing packet rules
Editing packet rules
Backing up packet rules
Journaling and auditing packet rules actions by packet rules
Troubleshooting packet rules
Related information
Network authentication service
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Network authentication service terminology
How does network authentication service work?
Network authentication service protocols
Network authentication service environment variables
Scenarios
Scenario: Setting up a Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
Completing the planning work sheets
Configuring Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
Changing encryption values on i5/OS PASE Kerberos server
Stopping and restarting Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
Creating host principals for Windows 2000 and Windows XP workstations
Creating user principals on the Kerberos server
Adding System A service principal to the Kerberos server
Configuring Windows 2000 and Windows XP workstations
Configuring network authentication service
Creating a home directory for users on System A
Testing network authentication service
Scenario: Configuring network authentication service
Completing the planning work sheets
Configuring network authentication service on System A
Adding System A principal to the Kerberos server
Creating a home directory for users on System A
Testing network authentication service on System A
Scenario: Setting up cross-realm trust
Completing the planning work sheets
Ensuring that the Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE on System B has started
Creating a cross-realm trust principal on the i5/OS PASE Kerberos server
Changing encryption values on i5/OS PASE Kerberos server
Configuring the Windows 2000 server to trust SHIPDEPT.MYCO.COM
Adding the SHIPDEPT.MYCO.COM realm to System A
Scenario: Propagating network authentication service configuration across multiple systems
Completing the planning work sheets
Creating a system group
Propagating system settings from the model system (System A) to System B and System C
Configuring network authentication service on System D
Adding the principals for endpoint systems to the Windows 2000 domain
Scenario: Using Kerberos authentication between Management Central servers
Completing the planning work sheets
Setting the central system to use Kerberos authentication
Creating MyCo2 system group
Collecting system values inventory
Comparing and updating Kerberos settings in iSeries Navigator
Restarting Management Central server on the central system and target systems
Adding Kerberos service principal to the trusted group file for each endpoint
Verifying the Kerberos principals are added to the trusted group file
Allowing trusted connections for the central system
Repeating steps 4 through 6 for target systems
Testing authentication on the endpoint systems
Scenario: Enabling single sign-on for i5/OS
Completing the planning work sheets
Creating a basic single sign-on configuration for System A
Configuring System B to participate in the EIM domain and configuring System B for network authentication service
Adding both i5/OS service principals to the Kerberos server
Creating user profiles on Systems A and B
Creating home directories on Systems A and B
Testing network authentication service on Systems A and B
Creating EIM identifiers for two administrators, John Day and Sharon Jones
Creating identifier associations for John Day
Creating identifier associations for Sharon Jones
Creating default registry policy associations
Enabling registries to participate in lookup operations and to use policy associations
Testing EIM identity mappings
Configuring iSeries Access for Windows applications to use Kerberos authentication
Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
Post configuration considerations
Planning network authentication service
Planning a Kerberos server
Planning realms
Planning principal names
Host name resolution considerations
Resolving your host names
Network authentication service planning work sheets
Configuring network authentication service
Configuring a Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
Changing encryption values on Kerberos server
Stopping and restarting the Kerberos server
Creating host, user, and service principals
Configuring Windows 2000 and Windows XP workstations
Configuring a secondary Kerberos server
Configuring network authentication service
Adding i5/OS principals to the Kerberos server
Creating a home directory
Testing network authentication service configuration
Managing network authentication service
Synchronizing system times
Adding realms
Deleting realms
Adding a Kerberos server to a realm
Adding a password server
Creating a trust relationship between realms
Changing host resolution
Adding encryption settings
Obtaining or renewing ticket-granting tickets
kinit
Displaying credentials cache
klist
Managing keytab files
keytab
Changing Kerberos passwords
kpasswd
Deleting expired credentials cache files
kdestroy
Managing Kerberos service entries in LDAP directories
ksetup
Defining realms in the DNS database
Defining realms in the LDAP server
Defining schema on an LDAP server
Troubleshooting
Network authentication service errors and recovery
Application connection problems and recovery
API trace tool
Setting up the API trace tool
Accessing the API trace log file
Troubleshooting Kerberos server in i5/OS PASE
Network authentication service commands
Related information for network authentication service
Object signing and signature verification
Printable PDF
Object signing concepts
Digital signatures
Signable objects
Object signing processing
Signature verification processing
Code checker integrity verification function
Object signing scenarios
Scenario: Using DCM to sign objects and verify signatures
Scenario details: Using DCM to sign objects and verify signatures
Scenario: Using APIs to sign objects and verify object signatures
Scenario details: Using APIs to sign objects and verify object signatures
Scenario: Using iSeries Navigator Management Central to sign objects
Scenario details: Using iSeries Navigator Management Central to sign objects
Object signing and signature verification prerequisites
Managing signed objects
System values and commands that affect signed objects
Save and restore considerations for signed objects
Code checker commands to ensure signature integrity
Verifying code checker function integrity
Troubleshooting signed objects
Troubleshooting object signing errors
Troubleshooting signature verification errors
Interpreting code checker verification error messages
Related information for object signing and signature verification
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Scenarios
Scenario: Securing a client connection to your Management Central server with SSL
Configuration details: Secure a client connection to your Management Central server with SSL
Scenario: Securing all connections to your Management Central server with SSL
Configuration details: Secure all connections to your Management Central server with SSL
SSL concepts
History of SSL
How SSL works
Supported SSL and Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols
Server authentication
Client authentication
Planning SSL
Application security with SSL
Troubleshooting SSL
Related information for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
Single signon
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Single signon concepts
Single signon overview
Authentication
Authorization
Domains
Identity mapping
i5/OS enablement
ISV enablement
Single signon scenarios
Scenario: Creating a single signon test environment
Completing the planning work sheets
Creating a basic single signon configuration for System A
Adding System A service principal to the Kerberos server
Creating home directory for John Day on System A
Testing network authentication service configuration on System A
Creating an EIM identifier for John Day
Creating a source association and target association for the new EIM identifier
Testing EIM identity mappings
Configuring iSeries Access for Windows applications to use Kerberos authentication
Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
(Optional) Post configuration considerations
Scenario: Enabling single signon for i5/OS
Completing the planning work sheets
Creating a basic single signon configuration for System A
Configuring System B to participate in the EIM domain and configure System B for network authentication service
Adding both i5/OS service principals to the Kerberos server
Creating user profiles on System A and System B
Creating home directories on System A and System B
Testing network authentication service on System A and System B
Creating EIM identifiers for two administrators, John Day and Sharon Jones
Creating identifier associations for John Day
Creating identifier associations for Sharon Jones
Creating default registry policy associations
Enabling registries to participate in lookup operations and to use policy associations
Testing EIM identity mappings
Configuring iSeries Access for Windows applications to use Kerberos authentication
Verifying network authentication service and EIM configuration
(Optional) Post configuration considerations
Scenario: Propagating network authentication service and EIM across multiple systems
Completing the planning work sheets
Creating a system group
Propagating system settings from the model system (System A) to System B and System C
Completing the configurations for network authentication service and EIM on System B and System C
Configuring network authentication service and EIM on the V5R2 or later system, System D
Scenario: Configuring the Management Central servers for single signon
Verifying that the domain appears in Domain Management
Creating EIM identifiers
Creating identifier associations
Configuring the Management Central servers to use network authentication service
Configuring the Management Central servers to use EIM
Scenario: Enabling single signon for ISV applications
Completing the planning prerequisite worksheet
Writing a new application or change an existing application
Creating a single signon test environment
Testing your application
ISV code examples
Planning for single signon
Requirements for configuring a single signon environment
Planning Enterprise Identity Mapping for i5/OS
Single signon planning worksheets
Configuring Single signon
Managing Single signon
Troubleshooting Single signon
Related information
Virtual Private Networking (VPN)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
VPN concepts
IP Security (IPSec) protocols
Authentication Header
Encapsulating Security Payload
AH and ESP combined
Key management
Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol (L2TP)
Network address translation for VPN
NAT compatible IPSec with UDP
IP Compression (IPComp)
VPN and IP filtering
VPN connections with no policy filters
Implicit IKE
VPN scenarios
Scenario: Basic branch office connection
Completing the planning worksheets
Configuring VPN on System-A
Configuring VPN on System-C
Starting VPN
Testing a connection
Scenario: Basic business to business connection
Completing the planning worksheets
Configuring VPN on System-A
Configuring VPN on System-C
Activating packet rules
Starting a connection
Testing a connection
Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
Configuring VPN on System-A
Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-A
Applying the l2tptocorp dynamic-key group to the toCorp PPP profile
Configuring VPN on System-B
Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-B
Activating packet rules
Scenario: Firewall Friendly VPN
Completing the planning worksheets
Configuring VPN on Gateway-B
Configuring VPN on System-E
Starting Connection
Testing the connection
Scenario: Using network address translation for VPN
Planning for VPN
VPN setup requirements
Determining what type of VPN to create
VPN planning advisor
Completing VPN planning worksheets
Planning worksheet for dynamic connections
Planning worksheet for manual connections
Configuring VPN
Configuring VPN connections with the New Connection wizard
Configuring VPN security policies
Configuring an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) policy
Configuring a data policy
Configuring a secure VPN connection
Configuring a manual connection
Configuring VPN packet rules
Configuring the pre-IPSec filter rule
Configuring a policy filter rule
Defining an interface for the VPN filter rules
Activating VPN packet rules
Configure Traffic Flow Confidentiality (TFC)
Configuring Extended Sequence Number (ESN)
Starting a VPN connection
Managing VPN
Setting default attributes for your connections
Resetting connections in error state
Viewing error information
Viewing attributes of active connections
Viewing the VPN server trace
Viewing VPN server job logs
Viewing attributes of Security Associations (SA)
Stopping a VPN connection
Deleting VPN configuration objects
Troubleshooting VPN
Getting started with VPN troubleshooting
Common VPN configuration errors and how to fix them
VPN error message: TCP5B28
VPN error message: Item not found
VPN error message: PARAMETER PINBUF IS NOT VALID
VPN error message: Item not found, Remote key server...
VPN error message: Unable to update the object
VPN error message: Unable to encrypt key...
VPN error message: CPF9821
VPN error: All keys are blank
VPN error: Sign-on for a different system appears when using Packet Rules
VPN error: Blank connection status in iSeries Navigator window
VPN error: Connection has enabled status after you stop it
VPN error: 3DES not a choice for encryption
VPN error: Unexpected columns display in the iSeries Navigator window
VPN error: Active filter rules fail to deactivate
VPN error: The key connection group for a connection changes
Troubleshooting VPN with the QIPFILTER journal
QIPFILTER journal fields
Troubleshooting VPN with the QVPN journal
QVPN journal fields
Troubleshooting VPN with the VPN job logs
Common VPN Connection Manager error messages
Troubleshooting VPN with the communications trace
Related information for VPN
Related information
NetWare on iSeries
Printable PDF
NetWare Enhanced Integration advantages
Install NetWare Enhanced Integration
Software and hardware requirements for NetWare Enhanced Integration
Configure NetWare Enhanced Integration
Activate the TCP/IP protocol
Configure TCP/IP for NetWare
Install Novell NetWare patches on servers
Install the NetWare Enhanced Integration NLM on servers
Create installation diskettes for NetWare Enhanced Integration NLMs
Load the NetWare Enhanced Integration NLM
Create a QNETWARE user profile on NetWare servers
Enable iSeries to automatically start authenticated connections
Set up authentication entries
Restart iSeries after installing NetWare Enhanced Integration
Verify communications to the NLMs
Define network server attributes
Unlink and delete NetWare NWSDs when you upgrade the release level
Manage NetWare server connections and authentication
Authenticated connections process
Manually start a connection to the NetWare server
Details: Connections in a batch job or printing
Create authentication entries
NetWare Directory Services
iSeries authentication entry commands
Work with NetWare connections
Work with your NetWare servers from iSeries
Manage NetWare users from iSeries
Advantages of managing NetWare users from iSeries
User enrollment
QNETWARE user profile
Network server user attributes
Profile characteristics
NetWare object rights and attributes
Use of multiple iSeries systems to enroll users
Set up your NetWare servers for user enrollment
Set up iSeries for user enrollment
Create iSeries group and user profiles for NetWare servers
Enroll iSeries users on NetWare
Specify the default list of NDS trees
Enroll users when iSeries does not store passwords
Propagate profile changes to NetWare
Check iSeries user enrollment status
User enrollment and authentication commands
End user enrollment
Manage NetWare volumes from iSeries
About NetWare volumes
Access files in your NetWare volumes from iSeries
Create a NetWare volume
Change a NetWare volume
Increase NetWare volume size
Mount and remove NetWare volumes
Display NetWare volumes
Delete a NetWare volume
Manage NetWare files from iSeries with QNetWare file system
QNetWare directory structure
Details: QNetWare file system
Authorize users to files and directories
Inherited Rights Filter and effective rights
NetWare authority and ownership
Change file or directory ownership
Mount NetWare file systems
Display information about particular file systems
Copy objects
Example: Copying a file to the QNetWare file system
Example: Copying an iSeries database file that has packed decimal fields to the QNetWare file system
Example: ILE C for iSeries program to copy an iSeries database file to QNetWare File System
Considerations for using integrated file system APIs on the QNetWare file system
Save and restore NetWare data from the QNetWare directory
Save NetWare data through the QNetWare directory
Restoring NetWare data through the QNetWare directory
Print from iSeries to NetWare printers
iSeries-to-NetWare printing environment
Set up NetWare print support
Start the print server function
Use multiple NetWare print queues
Create an output queue on iSeries for NetWare printers
Start writers to the output queue
Troubleshoot NetWare Enhanced Integration
View job logs to analyze problems
Details: Events that start the QNETWARE and QPRFSYNCH jobs
User enrollment error codes
Troubleshoot connection problems
Troubleshoot system operator rights problems
Troubleshoot communication problems
Troubleshoot QNETWARE file system problems
TCP/IP setup
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Internet Protocol version 6
IPv6 overview
Available IPv6 functions
IPv6 concepts
IPv6 address formats
IPv6 address types
Neighbor discovery
Stateless address autoconfiguration
Comparison of IPv4 and IPv6
Scenario: IPv6
Scenario: Creating an IPv6 local area network
IPv6 troubleshooting
Related information for IPv6
Planning TCP/IP setup
Gathering TCP/IP configuration information
TCP/IP security considerations
Installing TCP/IP
Configuring TCP/IP
Configuring TCP/IP for the first time
Configuring TCP/IP using the EZ-Setup wizard
Configuring TCP/IP using the character-based interface
Configuring a line description (Ethernet)
Turning on IP datagram forwarding
Configuring an interface
Configuring a route
Defining local domain and host names
Defining a host table
Starting TCP/IP
Configuring IPv6
Hardware and software requirements
Configuring IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration
Creating a new IPv6 interface
Configuring TCP/IP when the operating system is in restricted state
Customizing TCP/IP with iSeries Navigator
Changing TCP/IP settings
Configuring IPv6
Adding IPv4 interfaces
Adding IPv6 interfaces
Adding IPv4 routes
Adding IPv6 routes
TCP/IP techniques connecting virtual Ethernet to external LANs
Proxy Address Resolution Protocol method
Step 1: Enabling logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 270 and 8xx
Creating the Ethernet line descriptions on systems other than models 270 and 8xx
Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
Step 4: Creating the interface to enable proxy ARP
Step 5: Creating the virtual TCP/IP interface on partition A
Step 6: Creating the virtual TCP/IP interface on partition B
Step 7: Creating a preferred interface list
Step 8: Creating the route
Step 9: Verifying network communications
Network address translation method
Step 1: Enabling logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 270 and 8xx
Creating Ethernet line descriptions on systems other than models 270 and 8xx
Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
Step 4: Creating the interfaces
Step 5: Verifying network communications
Step 6: Creating packet rules
Step 7: Verifying network communications
TCP/IP routing method
Step 1: Enabling logical partitions to participate in a virtual Ethernet
Step 2: Creating Ethernet line descriptions
Creating Ethernet line descriptions on models 270 and 8xx
Creating Ethernet line descriptions on systems other than models 270 and 8xx
Step 3: Turning on IP datagram forwarding
Step 4: Creating the interfaces
Virtual Ethernet considerations
Related information for TCP/IP setup
TCP/IP applications, protocols, and services
BOOTP
Printable PDF
Configuring the BOOTP server
Changing BOOTP attributes
Working with the BOOTP table
Connecting to the Internet
DHCP
Printable PDF
DHCP concepts
DHCP client/server interaction
Leases
Relay agents and routers
DHCP client support
BOOTP
Dynamic updates
DHCP options lookup
Examples: DHCP
Example: Simple DHCP subnet
Example: Multiple TCP/IP subnets
Example: DHCP and multihoming
Example: DNS and DHCP on the same System i
Example: DNS and DHCP on different System i models
Example: PPP and DHCP on a single System i
Example: DHCP and PPP profile on different System i models
Planning for DHCP
Security considerations
Network topology considerations
Configuring DHCP
Configuring the DHCP server and BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
Configuring or viewing the DHCP server
Starting or stopping the DHCP server
Configuring the DHCP server to be started automatically
Accessing the DHCP server monitor
Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
Starting or stopping the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent
Configuring the BOOTP/DHCP relay agent to be started automatically
Configuring clients to use DHCP
Enabling DHCP for Windows Me clients
Checking the DHCP lease for Windows Me clients
Enabling DHCP for Windows 2000 clients
Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
Updating DNS A records
Enabling DHCP for Windows XP clients
Checking the MAC address and DHCP lease
Updating DNS A records
Configuring DHCP to send dynamic updates to DNS
Disabling DNS dynamic updates
Managing leased IP addresses
Troubleshooting DHCP
Gathering detailed DHCP error information
Tracing the DHCP server
Problem: Clients are not receiving an IP address or their configuration information
Problem: Duplicate IP address assignments on the same network
Problem: DNS records are not being updated by DHCP
Problem: DHCP job log has DNS030B messages with error code 3447
Related information for DHCP
IBM Directory Server for iSeries (LDAP)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Directory Server concepts
Directories
Distinguished names (DNs)
Suffix (naming context)
Schema
IBM Directory Server schema
Common schema support
Object classes
Attributes
Common subschema elements
The objectclass attribute
The attributetypes attribute
The IBMAttributeTypes attribute
Matching rules
Indexing rules
Indexing rules specifications for attributes
Attribute syntax
Object identifier (OID)
The subschema entries
The IBMsubschema object class
Schema queries
Dynamic schema
Disallowed schema changes
Schema checking
iPlanet compatibility
Generalized and UTC time
Recommended practices for directory structure
Publishing
Replication
Replication overview
Replication terminology
Replication agreements
How replication information is stored in the server
Security considerations for replication information
Replication in a high availability environment
Realms and user templates
Search parameters
National language support (NLS) considerations
Language tags
LDAP directory referrals
Transactions
Directory Server security
Auditing
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) with the Directory Server
Kerberos authentication with the Directory Server
Groups and roles
Static groups
Dynamic groups
Nested groups
Hybrid groups
Determining group membership
Group object classes for nested and dynamic groups
Group attribute types
Roles
Administrative access
Proxy authorization
Access control lists
Filtered access control lists
The access control attribute syntax
EntryOwner
Propagation
Access evaluation
Subtree replication considerations
Example of defining the ACIs and entry owners
Example of changing the ACI and entry owner values
Example of deleting the ACI and entry owner values
Example of retrieving the ACI and entry owner values
Ownership of LDAP directory objects
Password policy
Password policy tips
Authentication
Denial of service
Operating system projected backend
User projected directory information tree
LDAP operations
Administrator and replica bind DNs
User projected schema
Read access to projected users
Directory Server and i5/OS journaling support
Unique attributes
Operational attributes
Server caches
Attribute cache
Filter cache
Entry cache
ACL cache
Controls and extended operations
Save and restore considerations
Getting started with Directory Server
Migration considerations
Migrating to V5R4 from V5R3 or V5R2
Migrating data from V4R4 ,V4R5, or V5R1 to V5R4
Upgrading from V4R4, V4R5, or V5R1 to an interim release
Saving the database library and installing V5R4
Migrating a network of replicating servers
Kerberos service name change
Planning your Directory Server
Configuring the Directory Server
Populating the directory
Web administration
Set up Web administration for the first time
Web administration tool
Scenarios
Scenario: Setting up a Directory Server
Scenario: Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
Administering Directory Server
General administration tasks
Starting the Directory Server
Stopping the Directory Server
Checking the status of the Directory Server
Checking jobs on the Directory Server
Managing server connections
Managing connection properties
Enabling event notification
Specifying transaction settings
Changing the port or IP address
Specifying a server for directory referrals
Adding and removing Directory Server suffixes
Granting administrator access to projected users
Enabling language tags
Tracking access and changes to the LDAP directory
Enabling object auditing for the Directory Server
Adjusting search settings
Enabling or disabling read access to projected users
Publishing information to the Directory Server
Importing an LDIF file
Exporting an LDIF file
Copying users from an HTTP server validation list to the Directory Server
Administrative group tasks
Enabling the administrative group
Adding, editing, and removing administrative group members
Search limit group tasks
Creating a search limit group
Changing a search limit group
Copying a search limit group
Removing a search limit group
Proxy authorization group tasks
Creating a proxy authorization group
Changing a proxy authorization group
Copying a proxy authorization group
Removing a proxy authorization group
Unique attribute tasks
Determining if an attribute can be specified as unique
Creating a unique attributes list
Removing an entry from the unique attributes list
Performance tasks
Setting database connections and cache settings
Configuring attribute cache
Configuring transaction settings
Replication tasks
Creating a master-replica topology
Creating a master-forwarder-replica topology
Creating a master server (replicated subtree)
Creating a new replica server
Creating replication credentials
Creating a replica server
Coping data to the replica
Adding supplier information to the new replica
Creating a complex replication topology
Creating a complex topology with peer replication
Promoting a server to be a peer
Setting up a gateway topology
Changing replication properties
Adding supplier information
Editing supplier information
Removing supplier information
Creating replication schedules
Creating a daily replication schedule
Managing replication queues
Setting up replication over a secure connection
Topology tasks
Viewing the topology
Adding a replica
Editing an agreement
Moving or promoting a server
Demoting a master
Replicating a subtree
Editing a subtree
Removing a subtree
Quiescing the subtree
Editing access control lists
Security property tasks
Password tasks
Setting password policy properties
Setting password lockout properties
Setting password validation properties
Viewing password policy attributes
Overriding password policy attributes
Enabling SSL and Transport Layer Security on the Directory Server
Enabling Kerberos authentication on the Directory Server
Configuring DIGEST-MD5 authentication on the Directory Server
Schema tasks
Viewing object classes
Adding an object class
Editing an object class
Copying an object class
Deleting an object class
Viewing attributes
Adding an attribute
Editing an attribute
Copying an attribute
Deleting an attribute
Copying the schema to other servers
Directory entry tasks
Browsing the directory tree
Adding an entry
Adding an entry containing attributes with language tags
Deleteing an entry
Editing an entry
Copying an entry
Editing access control lists
Adding an auxiliary object class
Deleting an auxiliary class
Changing group membership
Searching the directory entries
Changing binary attributes
User and group tasks
User tasks
Adding users
Finding users within the realm
Editing a user's information
Copying a user
Removing a user
Group tasks
Adding groups
Finding groups within the realm
Editing a group's information
Copying a group
Removing a group
Realm and user template tasks
Creating a realm
Creating a realm administrator
Creating a template
Adding the template to a realm
Creating groups
Adding a user to the realm
Realm tasks
Adding a realm
Editing a realm
Removing a realm
Editing ACLs on the realm
Template tasks
Adding a user template
Editing a template
Removing a template
Editing ACLs on the template
Access control list (ACL) tasks
Viewing access rights for a specific effective ACL
Viewing effective owners
Adding , editing. and removing nonfiltered ACLs
Adding , editing. and removing filtered ACLs
Adding or removing owners
Reference
Command line utilities
ldapmodify and ldapadd
ldapdelete
ldapexop
ldapmodrdn
ldapsearch
ldapchangepwd
ldapdiff
Using SSL with the LDAP command line utilities
LDAP data interchange format (LDIF)
Example: LDIF
Version 1 LDIF support
Examples: Version 1 LDIF
Directory Server configuration schema
Directory information tree
Attributes
Object identifiers (OIDs)
IBM Tivoli Directory Server equivalence
Default configuration for Directory Server
Troubleshooting Directory Server
Monitoring errors and access with the Directory Server job log
Using TRCTCPAPP to help find problems
Using the LDAP_OPT_DEBUG option to trace errors
GLEnnnn message identifiers
Common LDAP client errors
ldap_search: Timelimit exceeded
[Failing LDAP operation]: Operations error
ldap_bind: No such object
ldap_bind: Inappropriate authentication
[Failing LDAP operation]: Insufficient access
[Failing LDAP operation]: Cannot contact LDAP server
[Failing LDAP operation]: Failed to connect to SSL server
Password policy-related errors
Troubleshooting the QGLDCPYVL API
Related information
Domain Name System
Printable PDF
DNS concepts
Understanding zones
Understanding DNS queries
DNS domain setup
Dynamic updates
BIND 8 features
DNS resource records
Mail and MX records
Examples: DNS
Example: Single DNS server for an intranet
Example: Single DNS server with Internet access
Example: DNS and DHCP on the same System i
Example: Splitting DNS over firewall
Planning for DNS
Determining DNS authorities
Determining domain structure
Planning security measures
DNS requirements
Determining if DNS is installed
Installing DNS
Configuring DNS
Accessing DNS in iSeries Navigator
Configuring name servers
Creating a name server instance
Editing DNS server properties
Configuring zones on a name server
Configuring DNS to receive dynamic updates
Importing DNS files
Record validation
Accessing external DNS data
Managing DNS
Verifying the DNS function is working
Managing security keys
Managing DNS keys
Managing dynamic update keys
Accessing DNS server statistics
Accessing server statistics
Accessing an active server database
Maintaining DNS configuration files
Advanced DNS features
Changing DNS attributes
Starting or stopping DNS servers
Changing debug values
Troubleshooting DNS
Logging DNS server messages
Changing DNS debug settings
Related information for DNS
E-mail
Printable PDF
E-mail concepts
SMTP on i5/OS
POP on i5/OS
Scenario: Sending and receiving e-mail locally
Planning for e-mail
Controlling e-mail access
Controlling SMTP access
Controlling POP access
Preventing e-mail access
Preventing SMTP access
Preventing SMTP from starting when TCP/IP starts
Preventing access to SMTP ports
Holding SNADS queues
Preventing POP access
Preventing POP from starting when TCP/IP starts
Preventing access to POP ports
Configuring e-mail
Accessing e-mail servers with iSeries Navigator
Configuring TCP/IP for e-mail
Configuring SMTP and POP servers for e-mail
Configuring the SMTP server
Configuring the POP server
Enrolling e-mail users
Starting and stopping e-mail servers
Starting the e-mail servers
Stopping the e-mail servers
Configuring a dial-up mail connection profile
Configuring the ISP Dial-up Connection wizard
Scheduling batch ISP e-mail jobs
Configuring the SMTP server for dial-up mail retrieval
Supporting multiple domains
Securing e-mail
Sending e-mail through a router or firewall
Restricting relays
Accepting relay messages from POP clients
Using relay restriction and connection restriction functions together
Restricting connections
Filtering e-mail to prevent virus proliferation
Sending and receiving e-mail
Setting up POP e-mail clients
QtmmSendMail API
JavaMail
Sending spooled files as PDF files
Using LDAP for addresses
Using SNADS to send e-mail
Setting up headers to differentiate between recipients
Supporting Internet addressing for the SNDDST command
Attaching files
Using SNADS to receive e-mail
Managing e-mail
Checking e-mail servers
Removing POP e-mail users
Preventing large e-mail messages from splitting
Supporting Delivery Status Notification
Hosting a Domino and SMTP server on the same system
Hosting Domino LDAP and Directory Server on the same system
Managing SMTP server performance
Changing values for the SMTP server
Changing values for the SMTP client
Selecting new subsystem for SMTP server jobs
E-mail reference information
Mail server journal entries
SMTP
POP
Troubleshooting e-mail
Determining problems with e-mail
Checking component journals
Tracking undelivered e-mail
Solving problems with the QtmmSendMail API
Checking the API call
Checking the MIME file
Checking mail server framework jobs
Related information for e-mail
FTP
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Scenarios: FTP
Scenario: Transferring a file from a remote host
Scenario: Securing FTP with SSL
Configuration details
Creating and operating a local CA on the MyCo system
i5/OS FTP: Enabling SSL for MyCo's FTP server
Exporting a copy of MyCo's local CA certificate to a file
Creating an *SYSTEM certificate store on TheirCo's system
Importing MyCo's local CA certificate into TheirCo's *SYSTEM certificate store
Specifying MyCo's local CA as a trusted CA for TheirCo's FTP client
Configuring the FTP server on i5/OS
Configuring FTP server in iSeries Navigator
Configuring FTP servers for graphical FTP clients and Web tools
File and directory entries in i5/OS format
Files and directory entries in UNIX-style format
Configuring anonymous FTP
Preparing for anonymous FTP
Writing exit programs for anonymous FTP
Creating an i5/OS user profile: ANONYMOUS
Creating a public library or directory
Installing and registering exit programs
Installing exit programs
Registering exit programs
Securing FTP on i5/OS
Preventing FTP server access on i5/OS
Preventing the FTP server from starting automatically on i5/OS
Preventing access to FTP ports on i5/OS
Controlling FTP access on i5/OS
Using SSL to secure the FTP server on i5/OS
Creating a local CA on i5/OS
Associating a certificate with the FTP server on i5/OS
Requiring client authentication for the FTP server
Enabling SSL on the FTP server
Securing FTP clients with TLS or SSL
Managing access using FTP exit programs
Managing access using iSeries Navigator
Monitoring incoming FTP users
Managing the FTP server
Starting and stopping the FTP server
Setting the number of available FTP servers
Improving FTP server performance with configurable subsystem support
Using the FTP client on the System i platform
Starting and stopping a client session
Server timeout considerations
Transferring files with FTP
Running FTP in unattended mode using a batch job on i5/OS
Simple example: Batch FTP
Complex example: Batch FTP
Example: Creating a CL program to start FTP
Example: Creating the FTP input file (FTCPDMS)
Example: CL program for submitting the FTPBATCH job
Example: Checking the FTP output file for errors
Example: Network description for batch FTP
FTP reference information
FTP server subcommands on i5/OS
FTP client subcommands on i5/OS
FTP exit programs
Request validation exit point: client and server
Example: FTP client or server request validation exit program in CL code
Example: FTP server request validation exit program in ILE RPG code
VLRQ0100 exit point format
VLRQ0100 exit point format usage notes
FTP server logon exit point
Example: FTP Server Logon exit program in CL code
Example: FTP server logon exit program in C code
Example: FTP server logon exit program in ILE RPG code
TCPL0100 exit point format
TCPL0100 format usage notes
TCPL0200 exit point format
TCPL0300 exit point format
Removing exit programs
Data transfer methods
Transferring files that contain packed decimal data between System i platforms
Transferring *SAVF files
Transferring QDLS documents
Transferring root, QOpenSys, QDLS, and QOPT files
Transferring files using QfileSvr.400
Transferring QSYS.LIB files
Receiving text files to QSYS.LIB
Considerations for creating files before transferring them into QSYS.LIB
CCSID conversions
Specifying mapping tables
CCSID code page tagging for i5/OS files
NLS considerations for FTP
File systems and naming conventions
i5/OS file systems that are supported by FTP
Status messages from the FTP server
FTP server syntax conventions
FTP client syntax conventions
Enclosing subcommand parameters
File names for client-transfer subcommands
Naming files for transfer
Troubleshooting File Transfer Protocol
Determining problems with FTP
Materials required for reporting FTP problems
Tracing the FTP server
Tracing the FTP client
Working with FTP server jobs and job log
IP filtering and network address translation
Printable PDF
Scenarios: Packet rules
Scenario: Mapping IP addresses using NAT
Scenario: Creating filter rules to allow HTTP, Telnet, and FTP traffic
Scenario: Combining NAT and IP filtering
Scenario: Hiding IP addresses using masquerade NAT
Packet rules concepts
Packet rules terminology
Packet rules versus other i5/OS security solutions
Network address translation
Static (map) NAT
Masquerade (hide) NAT
Masquerade (port-mapped) NAT
IP filtering
Sample filter statements
IP packet header
Organizing NAT rules with IP filter rules
Organizing multiple IP filter rules
Spoof protection
Planning for packet rules
Packet rules: User authority requirements
Packet rules: System requirements
Packet rules: Planning worksheet
Configuring packet rules
Accessing the packet rules editor
Defining addresses and services
Creating NAT rules
Creating IP filter rules
Defining IP filter interfaces
Including files in packet rules
Adding comments in the packet rules
Verifying packet rules
Activating packet rules
Managing packet rules
Deactivating packet rules
Viewing packet rules
Editing packet rules
Backing up packet rules
Journaling and auditing packet rules actions by packet rules
Troubleshooting packet rules
Related information
iSeries NetServer
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDFs
iSeries NetServer versus iSeries Access for Windows
Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows PCs
Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows 2000
Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows XP
Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows Server 2003
Installing iSeries Access for Windows on Windows Vista
Accessing iSeries NetServer with Linux and Samba client support
Getting started
Requirements
Configuring i5/OS for NetServer
Configuring and connecting your PC client
iSeries NetServer User Datagram Protocol broadcasts
iSeries NetServer and Domain Name System management
Connecting your PC client with DNS
Configuring your PC client with DNS
Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows 2000
Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows XP
Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows Server 2003
Configuring your PC client with DNS on Windows Vista
iSeries NetServer and Windows Internet Naming Service management
Connecting your PC client with WINS
Configuring your PC client with WINS
Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows 2000
Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows XP
Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows Server 2003
Configuring your PC client with WINS on Windows Vista
Configuring iSeries NetServer with the address of the network WINS server
PC client LMHOSTS static configuration files
Finding iSeries NetServer on the network
Administering iSeries NetServer
Viewing and configuring iSeries NetServer properties
Enabling iSeries NetServer support for Kerberos V5 authentication
Installing iSeries Navigator Security option
Starting iSeries NetServer Configuration wizard
Additional configuration requirements for Kerberos V5 authentication enablement
Changing the iSeries NetServer server name
Disabled user profiles
Displaying disabled user profiles
Enabling a disabled user profile
Starting and stopping iSeries NetServer
Administering subsystems for iSeries NetServer
Setting the guest user profile for iSeries NetServer
Viewing iSeries NetServer status
Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer shared objects
Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer shared objects using iSeries Navigator
Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer shared objects using Windows clients
Viewing and configuring iSeries NetServer shared object properties
Viewing shared object status
Viewing a list of iSeries NetServer sessions
Viewing iSeries NetServer session properties
Viewing iSeries NetServer session connection status
Stopping an iSeries NetServer session
File shares
Creating an iSeries NetServer file share
Controlling access to iSeries NetServer file shares
Stopping file sharing
Accessing file shares from a Windows client
Print shares
Creating a print share
PC client print device drivers for use with print shares
Stopping print sharing
Using print shares with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Vista client
Domain logon support
iSeries NetServer and client PC configuration
Logon server setup
Logon server home directories
Roaming profiles
Configuring user profiles from Windows 2000 and Windows XP clients
Mandatory profiles
Roaming profile issues
Logon scripts
Policy serving
Browsing support
Tips and techniques
Troubleshooting the logon server
iSeries NetServer security
User profile authority requirements
Guest user profiles
Hiding iSeries NetServer from the network
Requiring clients to sign requests
Using Windows messenger service with iSeries NetServer
Configuring the clients
Configuring clients on Windows 2000 and Windows XP
Configuring clients on Windows Server 2003
Configuring clients on Linux
Enabling iSeries NetServer for messaging specific to Windows
Associated i5/OS messages
Displaying a log of the message send attempts
Sending custom messages through iSeries NetServer
Tips and techniques
iSeries NetServer does not appear in Windows My Network Places
iSeries NetServer fails to start
Starting iSeries NetServer at initial program load
iSeries NetServer security: Guest versus nonguest
API guides
Backup and recovery of configuration and share information
Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer
Troubleshooting user profile connections
Troubleshooting file share directory paths
Troubleshooting print share problems
Troubleshooting print problems when using guest support
Troubleshooting PC client connection problems
Troubleshooting file share problems
Troubleshooting print device driver problems
Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer using the QSYSOPR message queue
Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer location on the network
Troubleshooting iSeries NetServer using Windows messenger service
HTTP Server
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Web Administration
Context, directives, and the server area
Content negotiation
Virtual hosts
Proxy server types
Log formats
Security tips
Validation lists
Kerberos
User profiles and required authorities
File compression
Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
Web Publishing with the PUT Method
WebDAV
Real time server statistics
Highly available Web server cluster
Web crawling
Webserver search engine
Triggered cache manager (TCM)
Trigger messages
ASF Jakarta Tomcat server
WebSphere Application Server
Scenarios
Setting up HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
Adding a new directory
Adding user directories
Adding cookie tracking
Adding virtual hosts
Adding password protection
Adding dynamic content with server-side includes
Adding Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protection
Enabling single signon for HTTP Server
Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process JSP file
Setting up ASF Tomcat server in-process Java servlet
Setting up ASF Tomcat in-process War file
Monitoring Web server activity with logs
Tasks
Getting started
Installing and testing
HTTP Server tasks
Setting up additional MIME types
Setting up content and language negotiation
Setting up customized error messages
Setting up directory indexing and directory listing
Setting up environment variables
Setting up highly available Web server cluster
Setting up a cluster with CL commands
Setting up welcome or index page
Manually editing HTTP Server
Managing HTTP Servers
Managing addresses and ports
Managing backup files
Managing directories
Managing a highly available server
Managing ports for ADMIN server
Managing server performance
Compression tasks
Setting up input decompression
Setting up output compression
FRCA tasks
Setting up Fast Response Cache Accelerator (FRCA)
Log tasks
Setting up logs
Proxy tasks
Setting up forward proxy
Setting up reverse proxy
Set up proxy chaining
Search tasks
Managing document lists
Setting up thesaurus dictionary
Managing thesaurus dictionary
Managing search indexes
Setting up document list
Setting up options objects
Managing Web crawlers
Setting up URL mapping rules file
Setting up URL object
Setting up Webserver search engine
Setting up validation lists
Security tasks
Setting up password protection
Setting up SSL for ADMIN server
Setting up to secure against denial of service
Tomcat tasks
Managin ASF Tomcat servers
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process JSP files
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process Java servlets
Setting up ASF Tomcat server out-of-process WAR files
Triggered cache manager tasks
Setting up triggered cache manager (TCM)
WebDAV tasks
Setting up WebDAV
Web tasks
Managing WebSphere Application Server
Web Performance Monitor
Web Performance Advisor
Configure SSL for ADMIN wizard
WebSphere Portal
Virtual host tasks
Setting up virtual hosts
Programming
API
HTTP Server APIs
Directives
CGI
Overview of CGI
Environment variables
Overview of High Availability CGI
Guidelines for writing high availability CGIs
Overview of Persistent CGI
Common gateway interface (CGI)
The CGI Process
CGI Program Interface
CGI Programs and Activation Groups
Setting up CGI programs
CGI in PASE
How to enable the server to run CGI programs
Troubleshooting your CGI programs
Apache APR and APIs
Regular expression notation
Setting up third party modules
Handlers
Net.Data programs
Java servlets and JSPs
Troubleshooting
Reference
CL commands
Environment variables
Lotus Domino plug-in
Server-side include commands
Supported i5/OS file systems for Web content
Time formats
Related information
Legal
Quality of service
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Differentiated service
Prioritized classes: How to classify network traffic
Setting priorities: How to handle the classes
Traffic conditioners
Integrated service
Traffic control functions
Integrated service types
Token bucket and bandwidth limits
Integrated service using differentiated service markings
Inbound admission policy
Class of service
Using codepoints to assign per-hop behaviors
Average connection rate and burst limits
QoS APIs
QoS API connection-oriented functional flow
QoS API connectionless functional flow
QoS sendmsg() API extensions
Directory server
Keywords
Distinguished name
Scenarios: Quality of service policies
Scenario: Limiting browser traffic
Scenario details: Creating the differentiated service policy
Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
Scenario details: Changing properties
Scenario: Secure and predictable results (VPN and QoS)
Scenario details: Setting up a host-to-host VPN connection
Scenario details: Creating the differentiated service policy
Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
Scenario details: Changing properties
Scenario: Limiting inbound connections
Scenario details: Creating the inbound admission policy
Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
Scenario details: Verifying your policy is working
Scenario details: Changing properties
Scenario: Predictable B2B traffic
Scenario details: Creating the integrated service policy
Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
Scenario details: Changing properties
Scenario: Dedicated delivery (IP telephony)
Scenario details: Creating the integrated service policy
Scenario details: Starting or updating the QoS server
Scenario details: Verifying that the policy is working
Scenario details: Changing properties
Scenario: Monitoring current network statistics
Scenario details: Opening QoS within iSeries Navigator
Scenario details: Creating a differentiated service policy
Scenario details: Completing a new class of service
Scenario details: Monitoring your policy
Scenario details: Changing values
Scenario details: Monitoring the policy again
Planning for QoS
Quality of Service (QoS) planning advisor
Authority requirements
System requirements
Service level agreement
Network hardware and software
Configuring QoS
Configuring QoS with wizards
Configuring directory server
Ordering QoS policies
Managing QoS
Accessing QoS help in iSeries Navigator
Backing up QoS policies
Copying an existing policy
Editing QoS policies
Monitoring QoS
Troubleshooting QoS
Journaling QoS policies
Viewing the journal entries on the monitor
Viewing the journal entries through the output file
Logging QoS server jobs
Monitoring system transactions
Trace TCP applications
Examples: Reading the trace output
Related information for QoS
Remote Access Services: PPP connections
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
PPP concepts
What is PPP
Connection profiles
Group policy support
Scenarios: Remote access using PPP connections
Scenario: PPP and DHCP on a single iSeries server
Scenario: DHCP and PPP profile on different iSeries servers
Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
Scenario: Connecting your system to a PPPoE access concentrator
Scenario: Connecting remote dial-in clients to your system
Scenario: Connecting your office LAN to the Internet with a modem
Scenario: Connecting your corporate and remote networks with a modem
Scenario: Authenticating dial-up connections with RADIUS NAS
Scenario: Managing remote user access to resources using group policies and IP filtering
Scenario: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
Scenario details: Sharing a modem between logical partitions using L2TP
Step 1: Configuring the L2TP terminator profile for any interface on the partition that owns the modems
Step 2: Configuring an L2TP originator profile on 10.1.1.74
Step 3: Configuring an L2TP remote dial profile for 192.168.1.2
Step 4: Testing the connection
Planning PPP
Software and hardware requirements
Connection alternatives
Analog telephone lines
Digital service and Digital Data Services
Switched-56
Integrated Services Digital Network
T1/E1 and fractional T1 connections
Frame relay
L2TP (tunneling) support for PPP connections
Voluntary tunnel
Compulsory tunnel model - incoming call
Compulsory tunnel model - remote dial
L2TP multi-hop connection
PPPoE (DSL) support for PPP connections
Connection equipment
Modems
CSU/DSU
ISDN terminal adapters
ISDN terminal adapter suggestions
ISDN terminal adapter restrictions
IP address handling
IP packet filtering
IP address management strategy
System authentication
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol with MD5
Extensible Authentication Protocol
Password Authentication Protocol
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service overview
Validation list
Bandwidth considerations for multilink
Configuring PPP
Creating a connection profile
Protocol type: PPP or Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP)
Mode selections
Switched line
Leased line
L2TP (virtual line)
PPPoE line
Link configuration
Single line
Line pool
Multiple-connection profile support
Remote IP address pools
Configuring your modem for PPP
Configuring a new modem
Setting modem command strings
Example: Configuring an ISDN terminal adapter
Associating a modem with a line description
Configuring a remote PC
Configuring Internet access through the AT&T Global Network
Connection wizards
Configuring a group access policy
Applying IP packet filtering rules to a PPP connection
Enabling RADIUS and DHCP services for connection profiles
Managing PPP
Setting properties for PPP connection profiles
Monitoring PPP activity
Troubleshooting PPP
Related information for PPP
REXEC
Printable PDF
Changing attributes
REXEC command considerations
Selecting a command processor
REXEC connection usage
For i5/OS CL command processing
For Qshell and spawned path command processing
Spooled output considerations
Client considerations
REXEC server jobs and job names
Creating REXEC server spooled job logs
Exit points for controlling REXEC server
RXCS0100
Determining problems with REXEC
Materials required for reporting REXEC problems
Getting a copy of a REXEC server job log
Tracing the REXEC server
RouteD
Printable PDF
RouteD configuration commands
RouteD attribute commands
Work with RouteD Configuration command
Scenario: RouteD configuration
RIP_INTERFACE statement
Supply values
DIST_ROUTES_IN
Metric
Community
Additional parameters
BLOCK
FORWARD
FORWARD.COND
NOFORWARD
Simple Network Time Protocol
Printable PDF
SNTP concepts
SNTP client
SNTP server
Scenario: Synchronizing clocks with i5/OS
Configuring System A as an SNTP client and server
Configuring your firewall to allow SNTP traffic
Configuring the SNTP client on other systems in the network
Specifying SNTP as your time maintenance application
Starting SNTP manually
Configuring SNTP
Troubleshooting SNTP
Logging SNTP activity
TCP/IP routing and workload balancing
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
TCP/IP routing functions by release
Packet processing
General routing rules
Routing connectivity methods
Routing with point-to-point connections
Proxy Address Resolution Protocol routing
Transparent subnets
Dynamic routing
Route binding
Classless Inter-Domain Routing
Routing with virtual IP
Fault tolerance
Routing with network address translation
Masquerade NAT
Inbound masquerade NAT processing (response and other)
Outbound masquerade NAT processing
Dynamic NAT
Static NAT
Routing with OptiConnect and logical partitions
TCP/IP and OptiConnect
Routing with virtual OptiConnect and logical partitions
TCP/IP workload balancing methods
DNS-based load balancing
Duplicate route-based load balancing
Scenario: Adapter failover using virtual IP and proxy ARP
Failover using automatic interface selection
Failover using a preferred interface list
Related information for TCP/IP routing and workload balancing
TCP/IP subnet calculator advisor
Telnet
Printable PDF
Telnet scenarios
Telnet scenario: Telnet server configuration
Telnet scenario: Cascaded Telnet sessions
System request processing scenarios
Using a group job
Telnet scenario: Securing Telnet with SSL
Configuration details for securing Telnet with SSL
Planning for the Telnet server
Virtual device descriptions
Telnet security
Preventing Telnet access
Controlling Telnet access
Configuring the Telnet server
Starting the Telnet server
Setting the number of virtual devices
Automatically configuring virtual devices
Creating your own virtual devices
Restricting privileged users to specific devices and limiting sign-on attempts
Setting the session keep-alive parameter
Assigning devices to subsystems
Activating the QSYSWRK subsystem
Creating user profiles
i5/OS supported emulation types
Configuring Telnet server for 5250 full-screen mode
Configuring Telnet server for 3270 full-screen mode
Supported 3270 terminal types
Configuring Telnet server for VTxxx full-screen mode
Securing Telnet with SSL
Configuring SSL on the Telnet server
Removing port restrictions
Assigning a certificate to the Telnet server
Enabling client authentication for the Telnet server
Example: Enabling client authentication for a PC5250 session
Enabling SSL on the Telnet server
SSL initialization and handshake
Managing the Telnet server
Configuring Telnet printer sessions
Requirements for Telnet printer sessions
Telnet server print support to iSeries Access for Windows Telnet client
Ending the Telnet server session
Ending device manager jobs
Using Telnet exit point programs
Device initialization exit program
Telnet exit point format INIT0100: Required parameter group
INIT0100: Format of user description information
INIT0100: Format of device description information
INIT0100: Format of connection description information
Device termination exit program
Examples: Telnet exit programs
Managing the Telnet client
Controlling Telnet server functions from the client
5250 Telnet client sessions
Starting a Telnet client session
3270 Telnet client sessions
Starting a 3270 Telnet client session
3270 full-screen considerations
Using a display station
3270 keyboard mapping for Telnet servers
VTxxx Telnet client sessions
Starting a VTxxx Telnet client session
VTxxx full screen considerations
VTxxx emulation options
VTxxx key values
VTxxx national language support
VTxxx national mode
Numeric keypad
Editing keypad
VTxxx key values by 5250 function
VT220 workstation operating modes
VT220 top-row function keys
VT100 and VT220 control character keywords
Establishing a cascaded Telnet session
Moving between cascaded Telnet sessions
Ending a Telnet client session
Troubleshooting the Telnet problems
Determining problems with Telnet
Pinging your host server
Troubleshooting emulation types
Troubleshooting your Telnet SSL server
Checking system status
Checking for an active SSL listener
Checking the Telnet job log
SSL return codes
TRCTCPAPP service program outputs
Materials needed to report Telnet problems
Automatically generated diagnostic information
Related information for Telnet
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Printable PDF
Configuring TFTP for clients
Changing TFTP attributes
Server ports and client ports
TFTP Transfer Size option
TFTP Subnet Broadcast option
Client-to-server TFTP Read Request options
Server-to-client TFTP option acknowledgment
Server-to-client broadcast data packets
Exit points for controlling TFTP server
User-defined servers
Virtual Private Networking (VPN)
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
VPN concepts
IP Security (IPSec) protocols
Authentication Header
Encapsulating Security Payload
AH and ESP combined
Key management
Layer 2 Tunnel Protocol (L2TP)
Network address translation for VPN
NAT compatible IPSec with UDP
IP Compression (IPComp)
VPN and IP filtering
VPN connections with no policy filters
Implicit IKE
VPN scenarios
Scenario: Basic branch office connection
Completing the planning worksheets
Configuring VPN on System-A
Configuring VPN on System-C
Starting VPN
Testing a connection
Scenario: Basic business to business connection
Completing the planning worksheets
Configuring VPN on System-A
Configuring VPN on System-C
Activating packet rules
Starting a connection
Testing a connection
Scenario: Protecting an L2TP voluntary tunnel with IPSec
Configuring VPN on System-A
Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-A
Applying the l2tptocorp dynamic-key group to the toCorp PPP profile
Configuring VPN on System-B
Configuring a PPP connection profile and virtual line on System-B
Activating packet rules
Scenario: Firewall Friendly VPN
Completing the planning worksheets
Configuring VPN on Gateway-B
Configuring VPN on System-E
Starting Connection
Testing the connection
Scenario: Using network address translation for VPN
Planning for VPN
VPN setup requirements
Determining what type of VPN to create
VPN planning advisor
Completing VPN planning worksheets
Planning worksheet for dynamic connections
Planning worksheet for manual connections
Configuring VPN
Configuring VPN connections with the New Connection wizard
Configuring VPN security policies
Configuring an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) policy
Configuring a data policy
Configuring a secure VPN connection
Configuring a manual connection
Configuring VPN packet rules
Configuring the pre-IPSec filter rule
Configuring a policy filter rule
Defining an interface for the VPN filter rules
Activating VPN packet rules
Configure Traffic Flow Confidentiality (TFC)
Configuring Extended Sequence Number (ESN)
Starting a VPN connection
Managing VPN
Setting default attributes for your connections
Resetting connections in error state
Viewing error information
Viewing attributes of active connections
Viewing the VPN server trace
Viewing VPN server job logs
Viewing attributes of Security Associations (SA)
Stopping a VPN connection
Deleting VPN configuration objects
Troubleshooting VPN
Getting started with VPN troubleshooting
Common VPN configuration errors and how to fix them
VPN error message: TCP5B28
VPN error message: Item not found
VPN error message: PARAMETER PINBUF IS NOT VALID
VPN error message: Item not found, Remote key server...
VPN error message: Unable to update the object
VPN error message: Unable to encrypt key...
VPN error message: CPF9821
VPN error: All keys are blank
VPN error: Sign-on for a different system appears when using Packet Rules
VPN error: Blank connection status in iSeries Navigator window
VPN error: Connection has enabled status after you stop it
VPN error: 3DES not a choice for encryption
VPN error: Unexpected columns display in the iSeries Navigator window
VPN error: Active filter rules fail to deactivate
VPN error: The key connection group for a connection changes
Troubleshooting VPN with the QIPFILTER journal
QIPFILTER journal fields
Troubleshooting VPN with the QVPN journal
QVPN journal fields
Troubleshooting VPN with the VPN job logs
Common VPN Connection Manager error messages
Troubleshooting VPN with the communications trace
Related information for VPN
Related information
TCP/IP troubleshooting
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
TCP/IP troubleshooter
Troubleshooting tools and techniques
Tools to verify your network structure
Netstat
Using Netstat from a character-based interface
Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Interfaces
Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Routes
Using Netstat from a character-based interface: Connections
Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator
Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator: Interfaces
Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator: Routes
Using Netstat from iSeries Navigator: Connections
Ping
Using Ping from a character-based interface
Pinging the loopback interface on your system
Pinging your own system
Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
Using Ping from iSeries Navigator
Pinging the loopback interface on your system
Pinging your own system
Pinging the interface on a network not directly attached to your local network
Common error messages
PING parameters
Trace route
Using trace route from a character-based interface
Using trace route from iSeries Navigator
Tools for tracing data and jobs
Communications trace
Planning a communications trace
Performing a communications trace
Starting a communications trace
Ending a communications trace
Dumping a communications trace
Printing a communications trace
Viewing the contents of a communications trace
Reading a communications trace
Deleting a communications trace
Tools for analyzing a communication trace
Installing the Communication Trace Analyzer
Starting the Communications Trace Analyzer
Additional communications trace functions
Checking a communications trace
Programmatically checking storage space
Trace connection
Trace TCP/IP application
Job trace
Starting a job trace
Re-creating the problem
Ending a job trace
Printing a job trace
Deleting a job trace
Advanced job trace functions
Multiple generic traces
Trace type information is cumulative
Advanced trace function: Watch support
Scenarios: Using watch support with traces
Scenario: Using watch support with a communications trace
Scenario: Using watch support with a job trace
Watch parameters
Using watch exit programs
Example: Watch exit program
Example: Modifying the exit program
Traces that use watch support
Troubleshooting tips
Server table
Checking jobs, job logs, and message logs
Verifying that necessary jobs exist
Verifying jobs from a character-based interface
Verifying jobs from iSeries Navigator
Checking the job logs for error messages and other indication of problems
Checking job logs using the character-based interface
Checking job logs using iSeries Navigator
Changing the message logging level on job descriptions and active jobs
Changing the message logging level from a character-based interface
Changing the message logging level from iSeries Navigator
Other job considerations
Checking for active filter rules
Verifying system startup considerations for networking
Starting subsystems
Starting TCP/IP
Starting TCP/IP using the character-based interface
Starting TCP/IP using iSeries Navigator
Starting interfaces
Starting servers
Starting servers from a character-based interface
Starting servers from iSeries Navigator
Timing considerations
Varying on lines, controllers, and devices
Verifying the logical partition configuration
Verifying the LPAR configuration from a character-based interface
Verifying the LPAR configuration from iSeries Navigator
Troubleshooting IPv6–related problems
Advanced troubleshooting tools
Licensed Internal Code logs
Trace Internal (TRCINT) command
Product activity log
IOP dump
Process dump
Call stack dump
Full job dump
Troubleshooting problems related to specific applications
Windows environment on iSeries
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Integrated server overview
Advantages
Terminology
Hardware
IXS and IXA attached servers
iSCSI attached servers
iSCSI attached server overview
Basic single server support
Multiple server support
Advanced iSCSI support
Diskless booting over iSCSI
Remote server and service processor discovery
Windows console
Considerations
Performance
iSeries storage spaces versus dedicated disks
Storage space balancing
iSCSI attached server performance
Virtual Ethernet
Networking
Service Processor Connection
iSCSI network
Point to point virtual Ethernet
Virtual Ethernet networks
External networks
Software
Integrated xSeries Server (IXS) and Integrated xSeries Adapter (IXA) attached xSeries servers
iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers
iSCSI attached xSeries and BladeCenter servers with security
High availability
Security
IXSs and IXA attached systems
iSCSI attached systems
User and group
Types of user configurations
User enrollment templates
Password considerations
Install and configure
Hardware requirements
Software requirements
Prepare for the installation of integrated Windows servers
Memory requirements
Time synchronization
Configure i5/OS TCP/IP
iSeries Access
Enable iSeries NetServer
Create a guest user profile for iSeries NetServer
Install IBM i5/OS Integrated Server Support
Plan for the installation of Windows server
Plan for iSCSI hardware installation
Plan the boot mode for your hosted system iSCSI HBA
Create a Service processor configuration and Remote system configuration
Plan your service processor connection
Configure the service processor discovery method on your iSeries server
Network server descriptions
Installation worksheet for OS/400 parameters
Compare FAT, FAT32, and NTFS file systems
Tip: Find resource names when you have multiple integrated servers
Supported language versions
Install Windows 2000 Server or Windows Server 2003
Prepare iSCSI hardware for Windows installation
Initialize service processor security
Create and start a network server host adapter
Start the installation from the i5/OS console
Continue the installation from the integrated Windows server console
Complete the server installation
Upgrade the IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server licensed program
Upgrade the integrated Windows server side of the IBM iSeries Integration licensed program
Migrate to 2890 Integrated xSeries Server hardware
Migrate to iSCSI attached servers
Windows Cluster Service
Install Windows Cluster service
Install Windows Cluster service on a new Windows server
Install Windows Cluster service on an existing server
Prepare Windows before installing Windows Cluster service
Install Windows Cluster service on Windows
Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2000
Install Windows Cluster service on Windows 2003
Enabling Kerberos with a Windows Server 2003 Active Directory Server
Install the ATI Radeon 7000M video device drivers for Windows 2000 on the 2892-002 Integrated xSeries Server
Adjust hardware acceleration for Windows Server 2003 on the 2892-002 or 4812-001 Integrated xSeries Server
Respond to error messages during installation
Set an integrated Windows server to automatically vary on with TCP/IP
Code fixes
Types of code fixes
Synchronize software level using Windows server console
Synchronize software level using iSeries Navigator
Synchronize software level using a remote command
Manage virtual Ethernet and external networks
Configure IP address, gateway and MTU values
Configure virtual Ethernet networks
Configure inter-partition virtual Ethernet networks
Explore point-to-point virtual Ethernet networks
External networks
Install network adapter drivers and add adapter address information to Windows server
Remove network adapters
Administer connections to iSCSI attached servers
Work with iSCSI configuration objects
Manage network server host adapters
Create a network server host adapter object
Create a network server host adapter object based on another one
Display network server host adapter properties
Change network server host adapter properties
Start a network server host adapter
Stop a network server host adapter
Delete a network server host adapter
Manage remote system network server configurations
Create a remote system configuration object
Create a remote system configuration object based on another one
Display remote system configuration properties
Change remote system configuration properties
Display remote system status
Delete a remote system configuration object
Manage service processor network server configurations
Create a service processor configuration object
Create a service processor configuration object based on another one
Display service processor configuration properties
Change service processor configuration properties
Initialize a service processor
Delete a service processor configuration object
Manage connection security network server configurations
Create a connection security configuration object
Create a connection security configuration object based on another one
Display connection security configuration properties
Change connection security configuration properties
Delete a connection security object
Configure security between i5/OS and hosted systems
Configure CHAP
Configure IPSec
Configure service processor SSL
Automatic SSL initialization
Manual SSL initialization
Service processor password
Configure a firewall
Manage iSCSI host bus adapters
Hot spare between iSCSI local host adapters
Manage iSCSI HBA usage
Share an iSCSI HBA among multiple hosted servers
Spreading workload over multiple iSCSI HBAs
Using multiple iSCSI HBAs for redundancy
Manage iSCSI HBA allocation at the Windows side of the iSCSI network
Use the qvnimap command to view iSCSI HBA allocation
Display information about virtual Ethernet adapters
Configuring multipath I/O
Configuring the Windows operating system for multipath I/O
Configuring integrated servers for multipath I/O
Maximum transmission unit (MTU) considerations
Configuring virtual Ethernet for maximum performance on iSCSI networks that support frames larger than 1500 bytes
Configuring virtual Ethernet for iSCSI networks that have a maximum frame size that is less than 1500 bytes
Configuring virtual Ethernet to support unusual non-TCP applications that do not negotiate MTU
Integrated DHCP server
Remote server discovery and management
Verify that IBM Director Server is installed and running
Configure remote server and service processor discovery
Service processor discovery configuration
Dynamic IP addressing (DHCP)
Service processor discovery methods
Service Location Protocol (SLP) using multicast addressing
Discovery by IP address
Discovery by host name
Use the MM or RSA II web interface
Administer integrated Windows servers
Start and stop an integrated server
Start and stop using iSeries Navigator
Start and stop using the character-based interface
Shutdown from the Windows server console
How to safely shutdown your iSeries when integrated Windows servers are present
Connect to the 4812 IXS virtual serial console
View or change configuration information
Message logging
Run integrated Windows server commands remotely
Guidelines for submitting remote commands
SBMNWSCMD and file level backup support for Kerberos v5 and EIM
Hot spare between server hardware
Manage storage
i5/OS storage management
Disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Administer integrated Windows server disk drives from OS/400
Access the i5/OS integrated file system from an integrated server
Obtain information about integrated server disk drives
Add disk drives to integrated Windows servers
Create an integrated server disk drive
Link a disk drive to an integrated server
Format integrated server disk drives
Copy a disk drive
Expand a disk drive
Expand a system drive
Unlink integrated Windows server disk drives
Delete integrated Windows server disk drives
Use Windows disk management programs with integrated Windows servers
Share devices
Determine the device description and hardware resource names for iSeries devices
Use iSeries optical drives with integrated Windows servers
Use iSeries tape drives with integrated Windows servers
Install tape device drivers
Format a tape on i5/OS for use with integrated Windows servers
Allocate the iSeries tape drive to an integrated Windows server
Return control of a tape drive from an integrated Windows server to the iSeries
Supported iSeries tape drives
Identify iSeries tape devices for applications
Transfer control of the iSeries tape and optical drives between integrated Windows servers
Print from an integrated Windows server to iSeries printers
Administer Windows server users from i5/OS
Enroll a single user using iSeries Navigator
Enroll an i5/OS group using iSeries Navigator
Enroll users using the character-based interface
Create user templates
Specify a home directory in a template
Changing the LCLPWDMGT user profile attribute
Enterprise Identity Mapping (EIM)
End user enrollment
End group enrollment
The QAS400NT user
Preventing enrollment and propagation to an integrated Windows server
Back up and recover
Back up of the NWSD and disk drives associated with an integrated Windows server
Back up the NWSD of an integrated Windows server
Back up the NWSH of an iSCSI attached integrated Windows server
Back up iSCSI NWSCFGs and validation lists
Back up predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers created on V4R5 and later OS/400 systems
Back up user-defined disk drives for an integrated Windows server
Save and restore user enrollment information
What objects to save and their location on OS/400
Back up individual integrated Windows server files and directories
File-level backup restrictions
Preliminary administrator setup tasks
Create shares on integrated Windows servers
Adding members to QAZLCSAVL
Ensure iSeries NetServer and the integrated Windows server are in same domain
Save your files
Example: How to address parts of an integrated Windows server
Windows Backup utility
Restore an integrated server's NWSD and disk drives
Restore predefined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Restore user-defined disk drives for integrated Windows servers
Restore integrated Windows server NWSDs
Restore integrated Windows server NWSHs for iSCSI attached servers
Restore integrated Windows server NWSCFGs for iSCSI attached servers
Recover integrated Windows server files
Uninstall
Delete an integrated Windows server's NWSD
Delete an integrated Windows server's line descriptions
Delete TCP/IP interfaces associated with an integrated Windows server
Delete controller descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
Delete device descriptions associated with an integrated Windows server
Delete network server configurations associated with an iSCSI integrated Windows server
Delete the IBM iSeries Integrated Server Support licensed program
Troubleshoot
Check message and job logs
Monitor Job
Additional logs and messages for iSCSI-attached servers
Problems with integrated Windows servers
Blue screen errors
A full integrated server system drive
Optical device problems
Locked optical device for a failed server
Tape problems
Verify that the tape drive device driver is loaded
Problems starting an integrated Windows server
Problems hot sparing between servers
Problems sharing hosted system hardware
Multiple NWSDs defined to use the same hosted system hardware
Special considerations for iSCSI attached systems
NWSD configuration file errors
Repair the NWSD configuration file
Reset the NWSD configuration file parameter
Use a previous version of the integrated server file
DASD in IXA or iSCSI attached servers
Failures enrolling users and groups
User enrollment authorization problems
Password problems
IBM iSeries Integration for Windows Server snap-in program
Problems with iSCSI attached servers
Boot and storage path network analysis
Managing path certificates
IBM Director Troubleshooting
Discovery problems
Problems with SSL connections
Virtual Ethernet problems on iSCSI attached servers
Virtual Ethernet problems with IXS and IXA attached servers
Both line description and icon are present
Line description is present and icon is missing
Line description is missing and icon is present
Both line description and icon are missing
General problems with external networks
Manually update LAN drivers on the integrated Windows server
Begin the LAN driver installation or update
Select the adapter to install or update
Complete the LAN driver installation or update
Point to point LAN IP address conflicts
Assign point to point virtual Ethernet IP addresses
Problems with TCP/IP over virtual Ethernet
Problems accessing Windows Server 2003 shares using the QNTC file system
IFS access problems
Problems with saving integrated Windows server files
Unreadable messages in the server message queue
Problems getting a Windows system memory dump
Reinstall an integrated Windows server
Collect integrated Windows server service data
Create an integrated Windows server memory dump on OS/400
Use the network server description (NWSD) dump tool on OS/400
Network server description configuration files
NWSD configuration file format
Create an NWSD configuration file
Example: NWSD configuration file
Remove lines from an existing integrated Windows server file
TARGETDIR
TARGETFILE
Change an integrated Windows server file with ADDCONFIG
VAR
ADDSTR
ADDWHEN
ADDWHEN and DELETEWHEN expression operators
DELETEWHEN
LINECOMMENT
LOCATION
LINESEARCHPOS
LINESEARCHSTR
LINELOCATION
FILESEARCHPOS
FILESEARCHSTR
FILESEARCHSTROCC
REPLACEOCC
TARGETDIR
TARGETFILE
UNIQUE
VAROCC
VARVALUE
Change an integrated Windows server file with UPDATECONFIG
FILESEARCHPOS
FILESEARCHSTR
FILESEARCHSTROCC
Set configuration defaults
ADDWHEN
DELETEWHEN
FILESEARCHPOS
FILESEARCHSTR
TARGETDIR
TARGETFILE
Use substitution variables for keyword values
Related information
Planning
Printing
Basic printing
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Printing concepts
Basic printing terminology
Overview
Printer file
Printer file overview
Printer file overrides
Spooled files and output queues
Spooling overview
Spooled file
Output queue
Multiple output queues
Output queue recovery
Spooled file cleanup
Default output queues
Order of spooled files on an output queue
Data queue support
Record type 01 data queue entry format
Record type 02 data queue entry format
Spooled file names
Spooled file security
Output queue security
QPRTJOB job
Spooled file subsystem
Spooled file library
Spooled files in independent ASPs
Printer writer program
Printer data streams
SNA character string
Advanced Function Presentation data stream
Intelligent Printer Data Stream
American National Standard Code for Information Interchange
Printer device description
Job description
Workstation description
User profile
System values
Controlling printing to output queue or printer
Routing process order
Routing examples
Example 1: Determining your output queue
Example 2: Determining your output queue
Example 3: Determining your output queue
Example 4: Determining your output queue
Example 5: Determining your output queue
Example 6: Determining your output queue
Example 7: Determining your output queue
Example 8: Determining your printer name
Example 9: Determining your printer name
Example 10: Determining your printer name when using batch
Example 11: Determining your printer name when using batch
Example 12: Determining your printer name when using batch
Self-test: Determining output queue and printer device
Self-test answers
Printer attachment methods
TCP/IP-network-attached printers
Intelligent Printer Data Stream with Print Services Facility
Simple Network Management Protocol
Printer Job Language
Internet Printing Protocol
Line printer requester/line printer daemon
PC-attached printers
Twinaxial-workstation-controller-attached printers
ASCII-workstation-controller-attached printers
Lexlink-network-attached printers
Printers attached to IBM InfoWindow 3477, 3486, 3487, and 3488 display stations
Remote system printing
Benefits
How remote system printing works
User print information
Send and defer status
Fonts
TrueType and OpenType fonts
AFP compatibility fonts
Font character sets
Font global identifiers
Code pages
Stand-alone code pages
Character set and code page combinations
Coded fonts
Double-byte character set support
Special DBCS printer functions
Character rotation
Character expansion
Condensed printing
Horizontal and vertical lines
Shift-control character printing
Double-byte character printing considerations
Extended character printing
Condensed printing
Page width
Unprintable double-byte characters
Double-byte data in an alphanumeric field
Spanned lines
Spanned pages
Print key use
5553 printer end-of-forms
Double-byte data printed on alphanumeric printers
DBCS spooled support
3130 printer resident font support
Internet Printing Protocol server
Network print server
Network print server objects
How the network print server is accessed
Exit points and the network print server
Exit point QIBM_QNPS_ENTRY
Exit point QIBM_QNPS_SPLF
Use of network print server exit points
Communications network printing functions
3270 printer emulation
Remote job entry printing
3x74-attached printers
Distributed data management printing
Object distribution printing
Host print transform
Host print transform advantages
How the host print transform function works
AFP-to-ASCII transform function
Host print transform in raster mode
Host print transform and emulator products
Image print transform
Image print transform overview
Image print transform advantages
Image configuration objects
Convert Image API
Conversion of PostScript data streams with image print transform
Page size
Additional printing considerations
Direct print considerations
Open considerations
Output considerations
Close considerations
First-character forms-control data considerations
Printer font considerations
Alternative character sets and code pages for printer output considerations
Output field considerations
Externally described printer-file record-format considerations
Redirecting output considerations
3812 and 3816 SCS printer considerations
3835 printer considerations
3912, 3916, and 4028 printer considerations
Special printer file considerations for AFP data stream
Special data description specifications considerations for AFP data stream
Performance considerations
Planning printing
Configuring printing
Configuring PJL printers
Configuring SNMP printers
Configuring LPR/LPD
Configuring IPP printers
Setting up validation lists for the IPP print driver
Setting up the IPP server
Verifying IPP server prerequisite programs
Configuring your Web browser
Starting the administrator interface
Configuring an IPP server
Configuring an IPP printer
Configuring an IPP client
Configuring Lexlink printers
Configuring remote system printing
i5/OS to i5/OS for remote system printing
i5/OS to VM/MVS for remote system printing
i5/OS to NetWare for remote system printing
Configuring host print transform
Automatically creating printer device descriptions
Changing an existing printer device description
Displaying the printer device description
IBM iSeries Access for Windows PC5250 configuration recommendations
3486, 3487, and 3488 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
3477 InfoWindow display station configuration recommendations
3197 display station configuration recommendations
ASCII workstation controller configuration recommendations
IBM remote 5250 emulation program configuration recommendations
Configuring image print transform
Printing to an ASCII printer with image print transform
Printing to an IPDS printer with image print transform
Printing with remote output queues and image print transform
Managing printing
Managing spooled files
Displaying a list of spooled files
Displaying the contents of a spooled file
Displaying messages associated with a spooled file
Holding a spooled file
Releasing a spooled file
Moving a spooled file
Deleting spooled files
Converting a spooled file to PDF
Copying a spooled file to a physical file
Sending a spooled file to another user or system
Changing attributes of a spooled file
Restarting the printing of a spooled file
Suspending one spooled file and printing another
Enabling spooled file notification message
Controlling the number of spooled files
Deleting expired spooled files
Reclaiming spooled file storage
Saving and restoring spooled files
Controlling printing by spooled file size
Printer-file-related tasks
Changing printer files
Overriding printer files
Overriding file attributes
Overriding file names or types
Overriding file names or types and file attributes of the new file
Generic override for printer files
Deleting printer file overrides
Displaying printer file overrides
Managing printers
Checking the status of a printer
Making printer available
Making printer unavailable
Managing printer writers
Starting a printer writer
Stopping a printer writer
Checking the status of a printer writer
Managing remote writers
Displaying remote writer status
Starting a remote writer
Stopping a remote writer
Managing IPP server
Starting the IPP server
Stopping the IPP server
Changing an IPP printer configuration
Displaying an IPP printer configuration
Deleting an IPP printer configuration
Miscellaneous printing tasks
Allowing direct printing
Specifying separator pages
Specifying print text
Replacing unprintable characters
Printing a graphic with other output
Displaying graphic symbol sets
Changing remote output queue description
Examples: Using DDS and printer files
Examples: Using DDS with RPG or COBOL
Example: DDS row and column positioning source code
Example: DDS absolute positioning source code
Example: COBOL positioning source code
Example: RPG positioning source code
Example: Print font samples
DDS source code
C source code
COBOL source code
RPG source code
Example: Using a program-described printer file with an application program
Example: Using an externally described printer file with an application program
Troubleshooting printing
Troubleshooting the IPP server
Troubleshooting the image print transform
Reference information
CL commands
Jobs
Output queues
Printer devices
Printer files
Printer writers
Spooled files
User profiles
Printer file parameter considerations
Align (ALIGN) parameter
Coded font (CDEFNT) parameter
Corner staple (CORNERSTPL) parameter
DBCS coded font (IGCCDEFNT) parameter
Device type (DEVTYPE) parameter
Edge stitch (EDGESTITCH) parameter
Fidelity (FIDELITY) parameter
Font character set (FNTCHRSET) parameter
Margin (FRONTMGN and BACKMGN) parameters
MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*NONE) parameters
MULTIUP(1, 2, 3, or 4) and REDUCE(*TEXT) parameters
MULTIUP support
MULTIUP support for the 4224, 4230, 4234, 4247 printers
Restrictions for MULTIUP with REDUCE(*TEXT)
Output priority (OUTPTY) parameter
Overlay (FRONTOVL and BACKOVL) parameters
Page rotation (PAGRTT) parameter
PAGRTT = *AUTO
PAGRTT = *DEVD
PAGRTT = 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees
PAGRTT = *COR
Page rotation on the 3831, 3835, 3900, InfoPrint 3000, and InfoPrint 4000 printers
Page rotation and duplex printing
Saddle stitch (SADLSTITCH) parameter
Spooled output schedule (SCHEDULE) parameter
Printer file return codes
Major code 00 (00xx)
Major code 80 (80xx)
Major code 81 (81xx)
Major code 82 (82xx)
Major code 83 (83xx)
Printer file feedback areas
Open feedback area for printer
Device definition list
I/O feedback area
AFP compatibility fonts and font substitution
Font-related examples
Font information
Font attributes and font types
Printer font support
Font substitution by font ID range
Mapping host-resident to printer-resident font character sets
Mapping host-resident to printer-resident code pages
Mapping printer-resident to host-resident font character sets
Mapping printer-resident to host-resident code pages
CHRID values supported
LPI values supported
CPI values supported
4019 printer information
4234 compressed font substitution by lines-per-inch value
QWP4019 program
QWP4019 parameter names and functions
QWP4019 program use
QPQCHGCF program
QPQCHGCF parameter names and functions
QPQCHGCF program use
Restrictions on using the QPQCHGCF program
Coded fonts whose font character sets reside in the 3130
QPQCHGCF instructions for marking coded fonts
Related information for printing
Advanced Function Presentation
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Concepts
Overview of AFP printing
AFP resources
AFP fonts
Form definitions
Line data
Mixed data
Object containers
Overlays
Page definitions
Page segments
Resources in the integrated file system
Resource library lists
AFP font libraries
TrueType and OpenType fonts
How TrueType and OpenType fonts differ from AFP fonts
PSF configuration objects
IPDS pass-through
How page definitions, form definitions, and printer files interact
Plan for AFP
When PSF is required
Install PSF
Ensure you have the necessary AFP resources
Get started with AFP
Obtain AFP resources
Fonts provided by i5/OS
Create AFP resources
Receive AFP resources from another system
Fonts from zSeries
Receive AFP resources inline in the data stream
Receive resources and AFPDS data sent to network files
Use AFP resources
Specify AFP resources
Specify a form definition
Specify a page definition
Specify a PSF configuration object
Specify an overlay
Specify an AFP font
Specify a TrueType or OpenType font
Example: specify a font
Specify a page segment
Specify an object container
Search order of library list
Create AFP data
Print AFP data with PSF
Print AFP data generated on the iSeries server
Print data sent to iSeries from zSeries
Transform data to PDF
Transform spooled files to PDF without manual setup
Transform spooled files to PDF with manual setup
Set up your PSF configuration object
Change the input file to create multiple output files or an indexed file
Configure a device for PDF conversion
Send the PDF file as e-mail
Configure PSF
Manage PSF
Enable IPDS pass-through support
Share print sessions
Automatic session recovery
Send data from zSeries to iSeries servers
Send print data from a VM S/390 to the output queue of a user ID
Send print data from MVS S/390 to an i5/OS output queue
Send data from a zSeries server to i5/OS network files
Line and mixed data stream support
Printer file parameters used with line and mixed data
Special characters used with line data
Considerations and restrictions when using line data
AFP reference information
Form definitions included with the server
Page definitions included with the server
CL commands for PSF configuration objects
CL commands for device descriptions
Purchase fonts
TrueType fonts on OS/400 V5R2
S/390 parameters and corresponding i5/OS printer file parameters
ANSI carriage control characters
Machine code carriage control characters
Troubleshoot AFP
Related information for AFP
Programming
Application programming interfaces
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDFs
API finder
APIs by category
Backup and Recovery APIs
Client Management Support APIs
Cluster APIs
Communications APIs
Configuration APIs
Cryptographic Services APIs
Database and File APIs
Date and Time APIs
Debugger APIs
Dynamic Screen Manager APIs
Edit Function APIs
GDDM APIs
Hierarchical File System APIs
High-Level Language APIs
HTTP Server for i5/OS APIs
ILE CEE APIs
International Components for Unicode APIs
iSeries Access for Windows APIs
Java APIs
Journal and Commit APIs
Lotus Domino for i5/OS APIs
Machine Interface Instructions APIs
Message Handling APIs
National Language Support APIs
Network Management APIs
Object APIs
Office APIs
Operational Assistant APIs
i5/OS PASE APIs
Performance Management APIs
Print APIs
Problem Management APIs
Process Open List APIs
Program and CL Command APIs
Pthread APIs
Registration Facility APIs
Remote Control Panel APIs
Remote Procedure Call APIs
Security APIs
Server Support APIs
System Manager for i5/OS APIs
Software Product APIs
UNIX-Type APIs
User Application APIs
User Interface Manager APIs
Virtual Terminal APIs
Work Management APIs
Work Station Support APIs
XML Parsing APIs
Miscellaneous APIs
Alphabetic list of APIs
API concepts
Overview: APIs
API terminology
Generic library names
API naming conventions
Language selection considerations
Types of APIs
APIs for the program-based environment
APIs for the service program-based environment
APIs for the ILE Common Execution Environment
Differences between program-based APIs and service program-based APIs
Example in ILE C: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
Example in OPM COBOL: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
Example in OPM RPG: Logging software errors (program API without pointers)
Example in ILE RPG: Logging software error (program API without pointers)
Example in ILE C: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
Example in ILE COBOL: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
Example in ILE RPG: Reporting software errors (bindable API with pointers)
APIs for the UNIX-type environment
Examples: UNIX-type APIs
API information format
API description
API format
API field descriptions
API error messages
Extracting a field from the format
Processing lists that contain data structures
API parameters
Passing parameters
Input and output parameters
Offset values and lengths
Offset versus displacement considerations for structures
Error code parameter
Error code parameter format
Examples: Receiving error conditions
Using the job log to diagnose API errors
Include files and the QSYSINC library
Internal object types
Data types and APIs
Internal identifiers
User spaces and receiver variables
User spaces
General data structure
Common data structure formats
Example: User space format
List sections
Receiver variables
Bytes available and bytes returned fields
Keyed interface
User space alternative
Continuation handle
List APIs overview
General data structure for list APIs
User spaces for list APIs
Logic flow of processing a list of entries
Manipulating a user space with pointers
Manipulating a user space without pointers
Examples: Changing a user space
Example: User space before and after change
Example in ILE RPG: Changing a user space
Example in OPM RPG: Changing a user space
Additional information about list APIs and a user space
Example in CL: Listing database file members
Example in OPM RPG: List APIs
Example in ILE CL: List APIs
Example in ILE C: List APIs
Example in ILE RPG: List APIs
Example in ILE COBOL: List APIs
Domains
Exit programs
User index considerations
Performance considerations
APIs and system objects
Open list information format
Path name format
Using APIs
Examples: Program-based APIs
Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (exception message)
Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
Example in ILE C: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the HOLD parameter (error code structure)
Example in OPM RPG: Printing the HOLD value
Example in ILE COBOL: Printing the HOLD value
Example in ILE C: Printing the HOLD value
Example in ILE RPG: Printing the HOLD value
Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving the initial library list
Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving the initial library list
Example in ILE C: Retrieving the initial library list
Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving the initial library list
Example in OPM RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
Example in ILE COBOL: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
Example in ILE C: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
Example in ILE RPG: Using keys with the List Spooled Files (QUSLSPL) API
Examples: Service program-based APIs
Example in ILE C: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
Example in OPM COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
Example in ILE COBOL: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
Example in OPM RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
Example in ILE RPG: Registering exit points and adding exit programs
Example in ILE C: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
Example in OPM COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
Example in ILE COBOL: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
Example in OPM RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
Example in ILE RPG: Removing exit programs and deregistering exit points
Example in ILE C: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
Example in OPM COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
Example in OPM RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving exit point and exit program information
Performing tasks using APIs
Examples: Packaging your own software products
Creating the example product
Example in CL: Creating objects for packaging a product
Example in OPM RPG: Packaging a product
Example in ILE C: Packaging a product
Example in ILE COBOL: Packaging a product
Example in ILE RPG: Packaging a product
Examples: Retrieving a file description to a user space
Example in ILE C: Retrieving a file description to a user space
Example in ILE COBOL: Retrieving a file description to a user space
Example in ILE RPG: Retrieving a file description to a user space
Examples: Using data queues or user queues
Considerations for using data queues and user queues
Example in ILE C: Using data queues
Example in ILE COBOL: Using data queues
Example in OPM RPG: Using data queues
Example in ILE RPG: Using data queues
Example in ILE C: Using user queues
Examples: APIs and exit programs
Example: Changing an active job
Example: Changing a job schedule entry
Example: Creating a batch machine
Example: Creating and manipulating a user index
Example: Creating your own telephone directory
Example: Defining queries
Example: Deleting old spooled files
Example: Diagnostic reporting
Example: Generating and sending an alert
Example: Listing directories
Example: Listing subdirectories
Example: Saving to multiple devices
Example: Saving and restoring system-level environment variables
Examples: Scanning string patterns
Example: Using a COBOL program to call APIs
Examples: Using the Control Device (QTACTLDV) API
Examples: Processing data queue entries
Example: Using environment variables
Examples: Using ILE Common Execution Environment APIs
Example: Using generic terminal APIs
Example: Using profile handles
Example: Using registration facility APIs
Example: Using semaphore set and shared memory functions
Example: Using SNA/Management Services Transport APIs
Example: Using source debugger APIs
Example: Using process-related APIs
Example: Using the user-defined communications programs for file transfer
Example: Working with stream files
Example: Creating a PTF exit program
Example: Creating an exit program for Operational Assistant backup
Machine interface programming
Machine interface instructions
Example: Writing an MI program
Compiling an MI program
Creating an MI version of the CLCRTPG program
Enhanced version of the MICRTPG program
Creating the MICRTPG2 program
Example: Common MI programming techniques
Program storage
Common API programming errors
Using the error code parameter
Defining data structures
Defining receiver variables
Defining list entry format lengths
Using null pointers with program-based APIs
Defining byte alignment
Using offsets in a user space
Coding for new functions
Control language
Overview: Control language
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDFs
CL command finder
Alphabetic list of commands
CL commands by category
Advanced Job Scheduler for iSeries commands
AFP Utilities for iSeries commands
Backup Recovery and Media Services for iSeries commands
Business Graphics Utility for AS/400 commands
CICS Transaction Server for iSeries commands
Communications Utilities for iSeries commands
Content Manager OnDemand for iSeries commands
Cryptographic Support for AS/400 commands
DB2 DataPropagator for iSeries, V8.1 commands
DB2 Query Manager and SQL Development Kit for iSeries commands
Developer Kit for Java commands
HTTP Server for iSeries commands
Infoprint Server for iSeries commands
IBM eServer iSeries Access for Web commands
i5/OS commands
Managed System Services for iSeries commands
Performance Tools for iSeries commands
Query for iSeries commands
System Manager for iSeries commands
TCP/IP Connectivity Utilities for iSeries commands
WebSphere Development Studio commands
CL concepts
System operation control
Control language
Menus
Messages
Message descriptions
Message queues
CL commands
CL command names
Abbreviations of CL commands and keywords
CL command verb abbreviations
CL command abbreviations
CL command keyword abbreviations
CL command parts
CL command syntax
CL command label
CL command parameters
CL command delimiters
CL command continuation
CL command comments
CL command definition parts
CL command coding rules
CL command information and documentation
CL command documentation format
CL environment classification
CL threadsafe classification
CL command description
CL parameters
CL command coding examples
CL error messages
CL command help
Printing CL command descriptions on the system
CL command prompters
CL commands that operate on i5/OS objects
CL commands that operate on multiple objects
CL programs and procedures
CL procedure
CL module
CL program
Service program
CL parameters
Parameter values
Constant value
Character string
Hexadecimal values
Date values
Decimal values
Logical values
Floating-point constants
Variable name
Expressions
List of values
Parameters in keyword and positional form
Required, optional, and key parameters
Commonly used parameters
AUT parameter
CLS parameter
COUNTRY parameter
FILETYPE parameter
FRCRATIO parameter
IGCFEAT parameter
JOB parameter
LABEL parameter
LICOPT parameter
MAXACT parameter
OBJ parameter
OBJTYPE parameter
OUTPUT parameter
PRTTXT parameter
REPLACE parameter
JOBPTY, OUTPTY, and PTYLMT scheduling priority parameters
SEV parameter
SPLNBR parameter
TEXT parameter
VOL parameter
WAITFILE parameter
Parameter values used for testing and debugging
Program-variable description
Basing-pointer description
Subscript description
Qualified-name description
Control language elements
CL character sets and values
Character sets
Double-byte character text in CL commands
Special character use
Symbolic operators
Predefined values
Expressions in CL commands
Arithmetic expressions
Character string expressions
Example: Character string expressions
Example: Using character strings and variables
Relational expressions
Logical expressions
Operators in expressions
Priority of operators when evaluating expressions
Built-in functions for CL
Naming within commands
Folder and document names
i5/OS objects
Library objects
External object types
Simple and qualified object names
Generic object names
Object naming rules
Communication names (*CNAME)
Generic names (*GENERIC)
Names (*NAME)
Path names (*PNAME)
Simple names (*SNAME)
Additional rules for unique names
Database files and device files used by CL commands
CL programming
Process for creating a CL source program or CL procedure
Interactive entry
Batch entry
Parts of a CL procedure
Example: Simple CL procedure
Commands used in CL procedures
Common commands used in CL procedures
Operations performed by CL procedures
Variables in CL commands
Declaring variables to a CL procedure
Uses for based variables
Uses for defined variables
Variables to use for specifying a list or qualified name
Cases of characters in variables
Variables that replace reserved or numeric parameter values
Changing the value of a variable
Trailing blanks on command parameters
Writing comments in CL procedures
Controlling processing within a CL program or CL procedure
GOTO command and command labels in a CL program or procedure
IF command in a CL program or procedure
ELSE command in a CL program or procedure
Embedded IF commands in a CL program or procedure
DO command and DO groups in a CL program or procedure
DOUNTIL command in a CL program or procedure
DOWHILE command in a CL program or procedure
DOFOR command in a CL program or procedure
ITERATE command in a CL program or procedure
LEAVE command in a CL program or procedure
CALLSUBR command in a CL program or procedure
SELECT command and SELECT groups in a CL program or procedure
SUBR command and subroutines in a CL program or procedure
*AND, *OR, and *NOT operators
%ADDRESS built-in function in a CL program or procedure
%BINARY built-in function
%OFFSET built-in function
%SUBSTRING built-in function
%SWITCH built-in function
%SWITCH with the IF command
%SWITCH with the Change Variable command
Monitor Message command
Retrieving values that can be used as variables
Retrieving system values
Example: Retrieving QTIME system value
Retrieving the QDATE system value into a CL variable
Retrieving configuration source
Retrieving configuration status
Retrieving network attributes
Example: Using the Retrieve Network Attributes command
Retrieving job attributes
Example: Using the Retrieve Job Attributes command
Retrieving user profile attributes
Example: Using the Retrieve User Profile command
Retrieving member description information
Example: Using the Retrieve Member Description command
Compiling CL procedures
Logging CL procedure commands
CL module compiler listings
Common compilation errors
Obtaining a CL procedure dump
Displaying module attributes
Displaying program attributes
Return code summary
Compiling source programs for a previous release
Previous-release (*PRV) libraries
Installing CL compiler support for a previous release
Controlling flow and communicating between programs and procedures
Passing control to another program or procedure
Using the Call Program command to pass control
Using the Call Bound Procedure command to pass control
Using the Return command to pass control
Passing parameters
Using the Call Program command to pass control to a called program
Common errors when calling programs and procedures
Data type errors using the CALL command
Data type errors when passing parameters
Decimal length and precision errors
Character length errors
Communicating between programs and procedures
Using data queues
Remote data queues
Comparisons with using database files as queues
Similarities to message queues
Prerequisites for using data queues
Managing the storage used by a data queue
Allocating data queues
Examples: Using a data queue
Example: Waiting up to two hours to receive data from data queue
Example: Waiting for input from a display file and an ICF file
Example: Waiting for input from a display file and a data queue
Creating data queues associated with an output queue
Using data areas
Local data area
Group data area
Program Initialization Parameter data area
Remote data areas
Creating a data area
Data area locking and allocation
Displaying a data area
Changing a data area
Retrieving a data area
Examples: Retrieving a data area
Example: Retrieving data area ORDINFO
Example: Retrieving data area DA1
Example: Retrieving data area DA2
Example: Changing and retrieving a data area
Defining and documenting commands
Defining commands
Command definition statements
Creating user-defined commands
Command definition process
Create Command command
Command definition object
Validity checking
Prompt override program
Command processing program
Command exit programs and independent ASPs
Authority needed for defining commands
Example: Creating a command
Defining a command
Using the CMD statement
Defining parameters
Naming the keyword for the parameter
Parameter types
Length of parameter value
Default values
Example: Defining a parameter
Data type and parameter restrictions
Defining lists for parameters
Defining a simple list
Using CL or other HLLs for simple lists
Using REXX for simple lists
Defining a mixed list
Using CL or other HLLs for mixed lists
Using REXX for mixed lists
Defining lists within lists
Using CL or other HLLs for lists within lists
Using REXX for lists within lists
Defining a qualified name
Using CL or other HLLs for a qualified name
Using REXX for a qualified name
Defining a dependent relationship
Possible choices and values for parameter definitions
Specifying prompt control
Specifying conditional prompting
Additional parameters for prompting
Key parameters and prompt override programs
Using a prompt override program
Identifying key parameters
Prompt override program
Parameters passed to the prompt override program
Information returned from the prompt override program
Allowing for errors in a prompt override program
Specifying the prompt override program when creating or changing commands
Example: Using a prompt override program
Creating commands
Command definition source listing
Command errors when processing command definition statements
Displaying a command definition
Effect of changing the command definition of a command in a procedure or program
Changing command defaults
Examples: Changing command defaults
Command processing program
CL or HLL command processing program
REXX command processing procedure
Validity checking program
Examples: Defining and creating commands
Example: Calling application programs
Example: Substituting a default value
Example: Displaying an output queue
Example: Displaying messages from IBM-supplied commands more than once
Example: Creating abbreviated change job command
Example: Creating abbreviated printer writer command
Example: Deleting files and source members
Example: Deleting program objects
Documenting command
Commands and command help
Writing command help
Generating UIM source for command help
Common help sharing
Organizing help text into help modules
Generating HTML source for command documentation
Proxy commands
Command-related APIs
QCAPCMD program
QCMDEXC program
QCMDEXC program with DBCS data
QCMDCHK program
Prompting for user input at run time
Using the i5/OS prompter within a CL procedure or program
Using selective prompting for CL commands
Using QCMDEXC with prompting in CL procedures and programs
Entering program source
Using the Start Programmer Menu command
Using the EXITPGM parameter of the Start Programmer Menu command
Command analyzer exit points
Designing application programs for DBCS data
Designing DBCS application programs
Converting alphanumeric programs to process DBCS data
Using DBCS data in a CL program
Loading and running an application from tape or optical media
Example: QINSTAPP program
Transferring control to improve performance
Example: Using the Transfer Control command
Passing parameters using the Transfer Control command
Examples: CL programs and procedures
Example: Initial program for setup (programmer)
Example: Saving specific objects in an application (system operator)
Example: Recovery from abnormal end (system operator)
Example: Timing out while waiting for input from a device display
Example: Performing date arithmetic
Debugging CL programs and procedures
Debugging ILE programs
Debug commands
Preparing a program object for a debug session
Using a root source view to debug ILE programs
Using a listing view to debug ILE programs
Using a statement view to debug ILE programs
Starting the ILE source debugger
Adding program objects to a debug session
Removing program objects from a debug session
Viewing the program source
Changing a module object
Changing the module object view
Setting and removing breakpoints
Setting and removing unconditional breakpoints
Setting and removing conditional breakpoints
Using the Work with Breakpoints display
Using the BREAK and CLEAR debug commands to set and remove conditional breakpoints
National Language Sort Sequence
Examples: Conditional breakpoint
Removing all breakpoints
Using instruction stepping
F10 (Step) to step over program objects or F22 (Step into) to step into program objects
Using the STEP debug command to step through a program object
Displaying variables
Example: Displaying logical variable
Examples: Displaying character variable
Example: Displaying decimal variable
Example: Displaying variables as hexadecimal values
Changing the value of variables
Example: Changing logical variable
Examples: Changing character variable
Examples: Changing decimal variable
Displaying variable attributes
Equating a name with a variable, an expression, or a command
Source debug and i5/OS globalization
Working with *SOURCE view
Operations that temporarily remove steps
Debugging original program model programs
Starting debug mode
Adding programs to debug mode
Preventing updates to database files in production libraries
Displaying the call stack
Program activations
Handling unmonitored messages
Breakpoints
Adding breakpoints to programs
Adding conditional breakpoints
Removing breakpoints from programs
Traces
Adding traces to programs
Using instruction stepping
Using breakpoints within traces
Removing trace information from the system
Removing traces from programs
Displaying testing information
Displaying the values of variables
Changing the values of variables
Reasons for using a job to debug another job
Debugging batch jobs that are submitted to a job queue
Debugging batch jobs that are not started from job queues
Debugging a job that is running
Debugging another interactive job
Considerations when debugging one job from another job
Debugging at the machine interface level
Security considerations
Operations that temporarily remove breakpoints
Objects and libraries
Objects
Object types and common attributes
Functions performed on objects
Functions the system performs automatically
Functions you can perform using commands
Libraries
Library lists
Functions of using a library list
A job's library list
Changing the library list
Considerations for using a library list
Displaying a library list
Using library lists to search for objects
Generic object names searching
Searching for multiple objects or a single object
Using libraries
Creating a library
Authority for libraries specification
Object authority
Data authority
Combined authority
Security considerations for objects
The Display Audit Journal Entries command to generate security journal audit reports
Setting default public authority
Setting default auditing attribute
Placing objects in libraries
Deleting and clearing libraries
Displaying library names and contents
Displaying and retrieving library descriptions
Changing national language versions
Describing objects
Displaying object descriptions
Retrieving object descriptions
Example: Using the Retrieve Object Description command
Creation information for objects
Detecting unused objects on the system
Moving objects from one library to another
Creating duplicate objects
Renaming objects
Object compression or decompression
Restrictions for compression of objects
Temporarily decompressed objects
Automatic decompression of objects
Deleting objects
Allocating resources
Lock states for objects
Displaying the lock states for objects
Accessing objects in CL programs
Accessing command definitions, files, and procedures
Accessing command definitions
Accessing files
Accessing procedures
Checking for the existence of an object
Working with files in CL procedures
Data manipulation commands
Files in a CL procedure
Opening and closing files in a CL procedure
Declaring a file
Sending and receiving data with a display file
Example: Writing a CL program to control a menu
The Override with Display File command to override display files in a CL procedure or program
Working with multiple device display files
The Receive File command to receive data from a database file
The Override with Database File command to override database files in a CL procedure or program
Output files from display commands
Messages
Defining message descriptions
Creating a message file
Message files in independent ASPs
Determining the size of a message file
Adding messages to a file
Assigning a message identifier
Defining messages and message help
Defining substitution variables
Assigning a severity code
Specifying validity checking for replies
Example: Sending an immediate message and handling a reply
Sending immediate messages with double-byte characters
Defining default values for replies
Specifying default message handling for escape messages
Example: Sending the last diagnostic message as an escape message
Specifying the alert option
Example: Describing a message
Defining double-byte messages
Viewing messages
Message file searching
System message file searches
Overriding message files
Example: Overriding a message file
Message queues
Types of message queues
Creating or changing a message queue
Message queues in independent ASPs
Message queues in break mode
Placing a message queue in break mode automatically
Job message queues
External message queue
Call message queue
Commands used to send messages to a system user
Commands used to send messages from a CL program
Inquiry and informational messages
Completion and diagnostic messages
Status messages
Escape and notify messages
Examples: Sending messages
Identifying a call stack entry
Using the Send Program Message command as the base
Identifying the base entry by name
Using the program boundary as a base
Using the most recently called procedure as a base
Using a control boundary as a base
Considerations for service programs
Receiving messages into a CL procedure or program
Receiving request messages
Writing request-processor procedures and programs
Determining if a request processor exists
Retrieving message descriptions from a message file
Removing messages from a message queue
Monitoring for messages in a CL program or procedure
Watching for messages
CL handling for unmonitored messages
Monitoring for notify messages
Monitoring for status messages
Preventing the display of status messages
Receiving a message from a program or procedure that has ended
Break-handling programs
Ways of handling replies to inquiry messages
Using a sender copy message to obtain a reply
Finding the job that sent the reply
Using the system reply list
Using the reply handling exit program
Message subfiles in a CL program or procedure
Log messages
Job log
Writing a job log to a file
Controlling information written in a job log
Job log message filtering
Example: Controlling information written in a job log
Job log sender or receiver information
Displaying a job log
Preventing the production of job logs
Job log considerations
Interactive job log considerations
Batch job log considerations
Message filtering through the Control Job Log Output API
Job log output files
Job log direction
Primary job log model
QHST history log
Format of the history log
QHST file processing
QHST job start and completion messages
QHST files deletion
QSYSMSG message queue
Messages sent to QSYSMSG message queue
Example: Receiving messages from QSYSMSG
Communications
Socket programming
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDFs
Prerequisites for socket programming
How sockets work
Socket characteristics
Socket address structure
Socket address family
AF_INET address family
AF_INET6 address family
AF_UNIX address family
AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
Socket type
Socket protocols
Basic socket design
Creating a connection-oriented socket
Example: A connection-oriented server
Example: A connection-oriented client
Creating a connectionless socket
Example: A connectionless server
Example: A connectionless client
Designing applications with address families
Using AF_INET address family
Using AF_INET6 address family
Using AF_UNIX address family
Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX address family
Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX address family
Using AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
Example: Server application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
Example: Client application that uses AF_UNIX_CCSID address family
Advanced socket concepts
Asynchronous I/O
Secure sockets
Global Secure ToolKit (GSKit) APIs
SSL_ APIs
Secure socket API error code messages
Client SOCKS support
Thread safety
Nonblocking I/O
Signals
IP multicasting
File data transfer—send_file() and accept_and_recv()
Out-of-band data
I/O multiplexing—select()
Socket network functions
Domain Name System support
Environment variables
Data caching
Berkeley Software Distribution compatibility
UNIX 98 compatibility
Descriptor passing between processes: sendmsg() and recvmsg()
Socket scenario: Creating an application to accept IPv4 and IPv6 clients
Example: Accepting connections from both IPv6 and IPv4 clients
Example: IPv4 or IPv6 client
Socket application design recommendations
Examples: Socket application designs
Examples: Connection-oriented designs
Examples: Establishing secure connections
Example: Writing an iterative server program
Example: Using the spawn() API to create child processes
Example: Creating a server that uses spawn()
Example: Enabling the worker job to receive a data buffer
Example: Passing descriptors between processes
Example: Server program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
Example: Worker program used for sendmsg() and recvmsg()
Examples: Using multiple accept() APIs to handle incoming requests
Example: Server program to create a pool of multiple accept() worker jobs
Example: Worker jobs for multiple accept()
Example: Generic client
Example: Using asynchronous I/O
Examples: Establishing secure connections
Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous data receive
Example: GSKit secure server with asynchronous handshake
Example: Establishing a secure client with Global Secure ToolKit APIs
Example: Establishing a secure server with SSL_ APIs
Example: Establishing a secure client with SSL_ APIs
Example: Using gethostbyaddr_r() for threadsafe network routines
Example: Nonblocking I/O and select()
Using poll() instead of select()
Example: Using signals with blocking socket APIs
Examples: Using multicasting with AF_INET
Example: Sending multicast datagrams
Example: Receiving multicast datagrams
Example: Updating and querying DNS
Examples: Transferring file data using send_file() and accept_and_recv() APIs
Example: Using accept_and_recv() and send_file() APIs to send contents of a file
Example: Client request for a file
Xsockets tool
Configuring Xsockets
What is created by integrated Xsocket setup
Configuring Xsockets to use a Web browser
Configuring HTTP Server (powered by Apache)
Configuring Tomcat
Updating configuration files
Testing Xsockets tool in a Web browser
Using Xsockets
Using integrated Xsockets
Using Xsockets in a Web browser
Deleting objects created by the Xsockets tool
Customizing Xsockets
Serviceability tools
Using Sun TI-RPC to develop distributed applications
Printable PDF
Using the rpcbind daemon
Ensuring that the rpcbind daemon is running on i5/OS
Starting and ending the rpcbind daemon on i5/OS
Using the rpcgen compiler
Using the network selection mechanism
Using data conversion support
Examples: Developing service applications based on TI-RPC code
Example: TI-RPC simplified-level service API
Example: TI-RPC top-level service API
Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level service API
Example: TI-RPC expert-level service API
Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC service
Examples: Developing client applications based on TI-RPC code
Example: TI-RPC simplified-level client API
Example: TI-RPC top-level client API
Example: TI-RPC intermediate-level client API
Example: TI-RPC expert-level client API
Example: Adding authentication to the TI-RPC client
DDS
DDS keyword finder
DDS concepts
Printable PDF
Creating a file using DDS
Completing the DDS form
Entering the DDS source statements
Creating the DDS file
DDS coding rules, conventions, and terms
Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
Rules for DDS keywords and parameter values
DDS naming conventions
DDS keywords and parameters
General considerations for using DBCS text with DDS files
Positional entries for files that use DBCS data
Length (positions 30 through 34)
Data type (position 35)
Keyword entries for files that use DBCS (positions 45 through 80)
DBCS character strings
Entering bracketed-DBCS character strings
Entering DBCS-graphic character strings
DDS computer printouts with DBCS output
Examples: DDS coding
Examples: DDS syntax
DDS syntax for a physical file
DDS syntax for a simple logical file
DDS syntax for a join logical file
DDS syntax for a display file
DDS syntax for a printer file
DDS syntax for an intersystem communications function file
Examples: DDS for each file type
Example: A field reference file
Example: A physical file with a new record format
Example: A logical file specifying multiple formats and new keys
Example: A logical file specifying a new record format
Example: A join logical file
Example: An inquiry display with two record formats in DDS
Example: A subfile with SFLPAG value equal to SFLSIZ value
Example: A subfile with paging by i5/OS and high-level language program
Example: A horizontal subfile displayable on two display sizes
Example: A message subfile using DDS
Example: A printer file using DDS
Example: An intersystem communications function file using DDS
Example: Program that uses a physical file, display file, and printer file
Example: DDS compiler listing
DDS debugging template
When to specify REF and REFFLD keywords for DDS files
Related information for DDS concepts
DDS for physical and logical files
What's new for V5R4
Printable PDF
Defining physical and logical files using DDS
Defining a physical file using DDS
Defining a logical file using DDS
Simple- and multiple-format logical files in DDS
Join logical files in DDS
Specifying record formats in a logical file in DDS
Positional entries for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 44)
Sequence number for physical and logical files (positions 1 through 5)
Form type for physical and logical files (position 6)
Comment for physical and logical files (position 7)
Conditioning for physical and logical files (positions 8 through 16)
Type of name or specification for physical and logical files (position 17)
Reserved for physical and logical files (position 18)
Name for physical and logical files (positions 19 through 28)
Record format
Field name
Key field name
DDS access path keywords
DDS logical files with more than one record format
Using *NONE in the key field when creating a DDS file
Example 1: Specifying the key field
Example 2: Specifying the key field
Example 3: Specifying the key field
Example 4: Specifying the key field
Select/omit field name
Reference for physical and logical files (position 29)
Length for physical and logical files (positions 30 through 34)
Data type for physical and logical files (position 35)
Conversion of one numeric data type to another in a DDS file
Conversion between zoned decimal and character or hexadecimal in a DDS file
Conversion of a field from floating point to packed decimal, zoned decimal, or binary in DDS
Conversion of data types when concatenating fields in DDS
Conversion of data types when substringing fields in DDS
Decimal positions for physical and logical files (positions 36 and 37)
Usage for physical and logical files (position 38)
Location for physical and logical files (positions 39 through 44)
Keyword entries for physical and logical files (positions 45 through 80)
ABSVAL (Absolute Value) keyword for physical and logical files
ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for physical and logical files
ALL (All) keyword—logical files only
ALTSEQ (Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
ALWNULL (Allow Null Value) keyword—physical files only
CCSID (Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
CHECK (Check) keyword for physical and logical files
CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for physical and logical files
CMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
COLHDG (Column Heading) keyword for physical and logical files
COMP (Comparison) keyword for physical and logical files
Specifying COMP at the field level
Specifying COMP at the select/omit-field level
CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword—logical files only
DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for physical and logical files
DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
DESCEND (Descend) keyword for physical and logical files
DFT (Default) keyword—physical files only
DIGIT (Digit) keyword for physical and logical files
DYNSLT (Dynamic Select) keyword—logical files only
EDTCDE (Edit Code) and EDTWRD (Edit Word) keywords for physical and logical files
FCFO (First-Changed First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
FIFO (First-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) keyword for physical and logical files
FORMAT (Format) keyword for physical and logical files
JDFTVAL (Join Default Values) keyword—join logical files only
JDUPSEQ (Join Duplicate Sequence) keyword—join logical files only
JFILE (Joined Files) keyword—join logical files only
JFLD (Joined Fields) keyword—join logical files only
JOIN (Join) keyword—join logical files only
JREF (Join Reference) keyword—join logical files only
LIFO (Last-In First-Out) keyword for physical and logical files
NOALTSEQ (No Alternative Collating Sequence) keyword for physical and logical files
PFILE (Physical File) keyword—logical files only
RANGE (Range) keyword for physical and logical files
Specifying RANGE at the field level
Specifying RANGE at the select/omit-field level
REF (Reference) keyword—physical files only
REFACCPTH (Reference Access Path Definition) keyword—logical files only
REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword—physical files only
REFSHIFT (Reference Shift) keyword for physical and logical files
RENAME (Rename) keyword—logical files only
SIGNED (Signed) keyword for physical and logical files
SST (Substring) keyword—logical files only
TEXT (Text) keyword for physical and logical files
TIMFMT (Time Format) keyword for physical and logical files
TIMSEP (Time Separator) keyword for physical and logical files
TRNTBL (Translation Table) keyword—logical files only
UNIQUE (Unique) keyword for physical and logical files
UNSIGNED (Unsigned) keyword for physical and logical files
VALUES (Values) keyword for physical and logical files
Specifying VALUES at the field level
Specifying VALUES at the select/omit-field level
VARLEN (Variable-Length Field) keyword for physical and logical files
ZONE (Zone) keyword for physical and logical files
Unicode considerations for database files
Unicode considerations for database files: Length (positions 30 through 34)
Unicode considerations for database files: Data type (position 35)
Unicode considerations for database files: Decimal positions (positions 36 and 37)
Unicode considerations for database files: Keyword considerations (positions 45 through 80)
DBCS considerations for database files
Positional entry considerations for database files that use DBCS
Length (positions 30 through 34)
Data type (position 35)
Decimal (positions 36 and 37)
Keyword considerations for database files that use DBCS
CONCAT (Concatenate) keyword
Additional considerations for describing database files that contain DBCS data
DDS for display files
Printable PDF
Defining a display file for DDS
Conventions and terminology used in the DDS information
Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 44)
Positional entries for display files (positions 1 through 7)
Condition for display files (positions 7 through 16)
Specifying a condition for a field or for more than one keyword
Display size condition names
Type of name or specification for display files (position 17)
Reserved for display files (position 18)
Name for display files (positions 19 through 28)
Reference for display files (position 29)
Length for display files (positions 30 through 34)
Data type and keyboard shift for display files (position 35)
Keyboard types
Typewriter-like keyboard
Data-entry keyboard
Valid entries for display files
Default (blank)
Alphabetic only (X)
Alphanumeric shift (A)
Numeric shift (N)
Signed numeric (S)
Numeric only (Y)
Katakana (W)
Inhibit keyboard entry (I)
Digits only (D)
Numeric only character (M)
Floating point (F)
Date (L), Time (T), and Timestamp (Z)
Decimal positions for display files (positions 36 and 37)
Usage for display files (position 38)
Location for display files (positions 39 through 44)
Line (positions 39 through 41)
Position (positions 42 through 44)
Beginning attribute character
Ending attribute character
Overlapping fields
Display length
DDS keyword entries for display files (positions 45 through 80)
ALARM (Audible Alarm) keyword for display files
ALIAS (Alternative Name) keyword for display files
ALTHELP (Alternative Help Key) keyword for display files
ALTNAME (Alternative Record Name) keyword for display files
ALTPAGEDWN/ALTPAGEUP (Alternative Page Down/Alternative Page Up) keyword for display files
ALWGPH (Allow Graphics) keyword for display files
ALWROL (Allow Roll) keyword for display files
ASSUME (Assume) keyword for display files
AUTO (Auto) keyword for display files
BLANKS (Blanks) keyword for display files
BLINK (Blink) keyword for display files
BLKFOLD (Blank Fold) keyword for display files
CAnn (Command Attention) keyword for display files
CFnn (Command Function) keyword for display files
CHANGE (Change) keyword for display files
CHCACCEL (Choice Accelerator Text) keyword for display files
CHCAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Available) keyword for display files
CHCCTL (Choice Control) keyword for display files
CHCSLT (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Selected) keyword for display files
CHCUNAVAIL (Choice Color/Display Attribute when Unavailable) keyword for display files
CHECK (Check) keyword for display files
CHGINPDFT (Change Input Default) keyword for display files
CHKMSGID (Check Message Identifier) keyword for display files
CHOICE (Selection Field Choice) keyword for display files
CHRID (Character Identifier) keyword for display files
CLEAR (Clear) keyword for display files
CLRL (Clear Line) keyword for display files
CMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
CNTFLD (Continued-Entry Field) keyword for display files
COLOR (Color) keyword for display files
COMP (Comparison) keyword for display files
CSRINPONLY (Cursor Movement to Input-Capable Positions Only) keyword for display files
CSRLOC (Cursor Location) keyword for display files
DATE (Date) keyword for display files
DATFMT (Date Format) keyword for display files
DATSEP (Date Separator) keyword for display files
DFT (Default) keyword for display files
DFTVAL (Default Value) keyword for display files
DLTCHK (Delete Check) keyword for display files
DLTEDT (Delete Edit) keyword for display files
DSPATR (Display Attribute) keyword for display files
DSPMOD (Display Mode) keyword for display files
DSPRL (Display Right to Left) keyword for display files
DSPSIZ (Display Size) keyword for display files
DUP (Duplication) keyword for display files
Programming for the Dup key
EDTCDE (Edit Code) keyword for display files
EDTMSK (Edit Mask) keyword for display files
EDTWRD (Edit Word) keyword for display files
ENTFLDATR (Entry Field Attribute) keyword for display files
ERASE (Erase) keyword for display files
ERASEINP (Erase Input) keyword for display files
ERRMSG (Error Message) and ERRMSGID (Error Message Identifier) keywords for display files
ERRSFL (Error Subfile) keyword for display files
FLDCSRPRG (Cursor Progression Field) keyword for display files
FLTFIXDEC (Floating-Point to Fixed Decimal) keyword for display files
FLTPCN (Floating-Point Precision) Keyword for Display Files
FRCDTA (Force Data) keyword for display files
GETRETAIN (Get Retain) keyword for display files
HELP (Help) keyword for display files
HLPARA (Help Area) keyword for display files
HLPBDY (Help Boundary) keyword for display files
HLPCLR (Help Cleared) keyword for display files
HLPCMDKEY (Help Command Key) keyword for display files
HLPDOC (Help Document) keyword for display files
HLPEXCLD (Help Excluded) keyword for display files
HLPFULL (Help Full) keyword for display files
HLPID (Help Identifier) keyword for display files
HLPPNLGRP (Help Panel Group) keyword for display files
HLPRCD (Help Record) keyword for display files
HLPRTN (Help Return) keyword for display files
HLPSCHIDX (Help Search Index) keyword for display files
HLPSEQ (Help Sequencing) keyword for display files
HLPTITLE (Help Title) keyword for display files
HOME (Home) keyword for display files
HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) keyword for display files
INDARA (Indicator Area) keyword for display files
INDTXT (Indicator Text) keyword for display files
INVITE (Invite) keyword for display files
INZINP (Initialize Input) keyword for display files
ERASEINP(*ALL) keyword
INZRCD (Initialize Record) keyword for display files
KEEP (Keep) keyword for display files
LOCK (Lock) keyword for display files
LOGINP (Log Input) keyword for display files
LOGOUT (Log Output) keyword for display files
LOWER (Lower) keyword for display files
MAPVAL (Map Values) keyword for display files
MDTOFF (Modified Data Tag Off) keyword for display files
MLTCHCFLD (Multiple-Choice Selection Field) keyword for display files
MNUBAR (Menu Bar) keyword for display files
MNUBARCHC (Menu-Bar Choice) keyword for display files
MNUBARDSP (Menu-Bar Display) keyword for display files
MNUBARSEP (Menu-Bar Separator) keyword for display files
MNUBARSW (Menu-Bar Switch Key) keyword for display files
MNUCNL (Menu-Cancel Key) keyword for display files
MOUBTN (Mouse Buttons) keyword for display files
MSGALARM (Message Alarm) keyword for display files
MSGCON (Message Constant) keyword for display files
MSGID (Message Identifier) keyword for display files
MSGLOC (Message Location) keyword for display files
NOCCSID (No Coded Character Set Identifier) keyword for display files
OPENPRT (Open Printer File) keyword for display files
OVERLAY (Overlay) keyword for display files
OVRATR (Override Attribute) keyword for display files
OVRDTA (Override Data) keyword for display files
PAGEDOWN/PAGEUP (Page Down/Page Up) keywords for display files
PASSRCD (Passed Record) keyword for display files
PRINT (Print) keyword for display files
PROTECT (Protect) keyword for display files
PSHBTNCHC (Push Button Field Choice) keyword for display files
PSHBTNFLD (Push Button Field) keyword for display files
PULLDOWN (Pull-Down Menu) keyword for display files
PUTOVR (Put with Explicit Override) keyword for display files
PUTRETAIN (Put-Retain) keyword for display files
RANGE (Range) keyword for display files
REF (Reference) keyword for display files
REFFLD (Referenced Field) keyword for display files
RETKEY (Retain Function Keys) and RETCMDKEY (Retain Command Keys) keywords for display files
RETLCKSTS (Retain Lock Status) keyword for display files
RMVWDW (Remove Window) keyword for display files
ROLLUP/ROLLDOWN (Roll Up/Roll Down) keywords for display files
RTNCSRLOC (Return Cursor Location) keyword for display files
RTNDTA (Return Data) keyword for display files
SETOF (Set Off) keyword for display files
SETOFF (Set Off) keyword for display files
SFL (Subfile) keyword for display files
SFLCHCCTL (Subfile Choice Control) keyword for display files
SFLCLR (Subfile Clear) keyword for display files
SFLCSRPRG (Subfile Cursor Progression) keyword for display files
SFLCSRRRN (Subfile Cursor Relative Record Number) keyword for display files
SFLCTL (Subfile Control) keyword for display files
SFLDLT (Subfile Delete) keyword for display files
SFLDROP (Subfile Drop) keyword for display files
SFLDSP (Subfile Display) keyword for display files
SFLDSPCTL (Subfile Display Control) keyword for display files
SFLEND (Subfile End) keyword for display files
SFLENTER (Subfile Enter) keyw